Home

User Manual

1. Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information we m is When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 175 Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when EST panel messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the EST message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the EST panel and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the EST package The EST messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group
2. Color Picker O No Color Picker J Color Sample No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Results 0 records Duration Reset Outputs Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 DA codes ul Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 157 158 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output i e door strikes lights or sirens when DMP SCS 1 receiver messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the SCS 1 message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs form may not apply Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the SCS package The SCS 1 messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an al
3. Appendix B Configuring a CCTV interface This appendix provides information on configuring the interface between a CCTV controller and Picture Perfect which provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras In this appendix po E E E anad Lede ad E E E Manaaes 46 SOltWwd re requirements care ieee ci otise nisd tramis Ck Ld ee 47 Hardware r gatrementy oce edre ed nina ee ee des 48 COn ONTON occire eiea rr ees DECRE GE RR Ge RA CER Nh 56 Advanced configuration ccelis eee eet ee er bene 67 Interface data file backup and restore lees 70 46 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The CCTV control systems operate separately from Picture Perfect and require their own hardware and software which is provided by the CCTV manufacturer The interface between a CCTV controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras For controllers providing video loss monitoring and reporting using the controller printer port an optional video loss interface component of Picture Perfect can be configured to issue alarms using the Alarm Monitor feature whenever a camera video signal has been lost The first step is to configure the Picture Perfect system and the CCTV system or to verify the set up if this is an existing system Next use Picture Perfect to link or map the desired Picture Perfect alarms to the appropriate CCTV cameras When the mapped alarm is rece
4. Ta J Refer to Figure 33 Example printed report sorted by Kalatel site number or command string index on page 66 for a sample of a printed report 65 66 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 33 Example printed report sorted by Kalatel site number or command string index 10 25 96 15 59 Picture Perfect to Kalatel mapped alarms Kalatel Site No Input LocId Cmd String Alarm Type Group Id AlarmId InpGrpId Index Task Name Description 0 54 10 26 2048 ktd tty7 Door Forced Ammun Rm 1 0 243 876 294 1 ktd tty7 Barrack 2 Door Held Open 0 8 2 17 23 ktd tty7 Invalid Badge Front Gate Rdr 0 8 9 94 25 ktd tty7 Unknown Badge Rdr 4 0 102 21 45 123 ktd tty5 Boiler Room Thermostat DI 0 65 3 76 345 ktd tty5 0 85 34 38 406 ktd tty5 Duress Alarm Rdr 9 Exiting the program If you have made any changes to the mapping file while running package prefix cctv map and you select X to exit you will be asked if you want to inform the rest of the system of your changes e If you select y then the system is informed of your mapping file changes The system will re read the mapping file and use it to determine which alarms will be routed to the CCTV controller Any existing active alarms will not be re run through the mapping file only newly occurring alarms e Ifyou are not finished making your changes but are leaving the package prefix cctv map program temporarily you can enter n This will not inform the Picture Perfec
5. Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface C C Vif Y a b gt X i UI U ue GU wy U we 8 U WS tw 5 Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use Copyright O 2006 GE Security Inc All rights reserved This document may not be copied or otherwise reproduced in whole or in part except as specifically permitted under US and international copyright law without the prior written consent from GE Document number 460581004A March 2006 THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE GE ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR INACCURACIES OR OMISSIONS AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITIES LOSSES OR RISKS PERSONAL OR OTHERWISE INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY OF THE USE OR APPLICATION OF ANY OF THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT FOR THE LATEST DOCUMENTATION CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SUPPLIER OR VISIT US ONLINE AT WWW GESECURITY COM This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are registered trademarks of General Electric Picture Perfect product and logo are trademarks of GE Security Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product only
6. GLOBAL x ES ra Priority 1 Route Definition Yes 1 Inhibit Schedule Changes 50 Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY df Color Picker O No Color Picker J Color Sample No Background Foreground Yes i Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Results 0 records Duration Reset Outputs Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 DA codes ul Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 357 358 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output i e door strikes lights or sirens when Universal Intrusion panel messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the Universal Intrusion message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options
7. Note Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including e Black Box Converter RS 422 to RS 232 Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 Interface Software package Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon 9600 communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 122 Figure 122 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect Splitter System Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port to the Stentofon Intercom System Black Box Converter Refer to Figure 123
8. One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Central Station communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the Central Station port See Figure 35 Figure 35 Cable Pinouts Picture Perfect host to Central Station system DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Central System Station Port DB25F DB9M TX 2 2 Tx Rx 3 3 Rx SGND 7 5 SGND 4 DTR 6 DSR 8 CTS Note This cable configuration is for a PC based version of the Central Station system using the COM1 or COM2 serial port for communications Refer to your Central Station system documentation for cable specifications Figure 36 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Central Station interface 73 74 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Configuration The Picture Perfect Central Station interface allows forwarding of alarm events to the Central Station system for handling by the Central Station operator Before this can happen Picture Perfect must be informed of which alarm events are to be forwarded and how to identify them in a manner recognizable by the Central Station system An alarm event is a collection of information which includes an Input Group ID an Alarm ID and an Input ID These ID values identify specific records in the Picture Perfect d
9. e Custom cable to connect from the EIA 232 master splitter port to the AFP 400 TBI printer port The required pin connections for this cable are shown in the AFP 400 Analog Fire Panel Installation Manual Chapter 2 Installation in the section Remote Printers and CRTs subsection Connecting a PRN 4 Remote Printer Document 50253 01 05 96 Rev A P N50253 A1 ECN 96 002 The pin out description and figure describes the wiring that must be done except the 25 pin printer port will be replaced with the 25 pin master splitter port Refer to Figure 70 Figure 70 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AFP 400 25 pin to TB1 Splitter Master AFP 400 Port 25 pin TB1 TX2 2 TB1 2 RX3 1 TB1 1 REF 7 3 TB1 3 Figure 71 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter Redundant Host DB25F To Primary Host DB25F DB9M To Notifier DB25M To DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 199 200 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 72 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface CZYN uon 5301060028 201 Configuration The Notifier interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The message types and formats used by the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 interface were derived from the EIA 232D P
10. ttt 55 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CCTV interface tts 55 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm esiste ttttttttttttttttttttttttnnnnnnnnnnntnttnttton 61 Exarmple oftdeleting aKalatel CCTV alart e a ai e te ttes baee O Gack 63 Example of printing a Kalatel CCTV alarm fil sssini 65 Example printed report sorted by Kalatel site number or command string index 66 Example of exitinig the Progr aMi eeens telle nen o tte e lle educar 67 Cable Pinouts Picture Perfect host to Central Station system DB25F to DB9M s 73 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Central Station interface tts 73 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to DB9M s 94 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Commend interface ttes 95 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M es 96 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface 96 Sdmipleinp bt9roups SCFeG sce rtt ert eec tete blah e ierit caute 110 Sarmple alatimisekeens acie deiode te tenu boe dd te te ah 112 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 ure 50 ure 51 Figure 52 ure 53 ure 54 ure 55 ure 56 ure 57 ure 58 Figure 59 ure 60 ure 61 ure 62 ure 63 ure 64 ure 65 ure 66 ure 67 ure 68 ure 69 ure 70 ure 71 ure 72 ure 73 ure 74 ure 75 ure 76 ure 77 ure 78 ure 79 ure 80 ure
11. 322 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 123 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25M to DB25F Figure 124 Overview of the redundan Splitter Stentofon 9600 Intercom Master Port System Black Box Converter DB25M DB25F GND 7 7 GND Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 TX Picture Perfect and intercom interface Osp 5301320044 323 Configuration The Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The messages used by the Stentofon 9600 interface were derived from the Stentofon 9600 protocol as described in Message types on page 342 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the stngen9600 data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the stngen9600 command line tool Using stngen9600 exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 335 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface
12. InpGrpPrefix FIRESINE The Alarm IdLen parameter is used to determine the length of the Firesine alarm id The original requirement was 6 but it is now 3 The Id is used as part of the input group description 192 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual AlarmIdLen 3 Icanon 2 The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty2 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity StopBits Xon Xoff MumB bHd Appendix H Configuring a Notifier interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Notifier interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Notifier Interface Panel AM2020 AFP1010 or AFP 400 and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix Pr vU PEERS 194 SOlthware FOGUITENIONIS oc cee baa Mia ean Ue xar CARA ee RR e 195 Hardware requirements 00 cece eee e 196 CORT porno TT 201 Device Ypes PPP 228 Sen he MENE e eioi ec er Roe e re doe abe ES 4 229 Advanced configuration oo i scele ee ee rer y y 230 Interface data file backup and restore 2l lees 232 194 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Notifier interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Notifier Interface Panel AM2020 AFP1010 or AFP 400 and recognizes only the predefined messages types built
13. No matter how the lost connection alarm was issued when one occurs it reports with the input state set to alarm The lost connection alarm can be equated to an input point alarm It has two states ALARM and RESET The RESET condition occurs when the connection to the remote system is established Based on the requirements at your site it is possible to enforce that the lost connection alarm must be in a RESET state communications with the remote system are OK before the alarm can be cleared from the activity monitors This behavior is controlled through the RemoteConnResetRegd variable If RemoteConnResetReqd is set to Yes then the alarm must be reset before it can be cleared Remember that the Remove button can be used to remove all alarms regardless of their state However if the Remove Alarm Only If Reset option is selected on the Setup Parameter window only alarms in reset state may be removed What Happens When the Connection is Lost The moment that communications are disrupted the alarm that the RAN system might have been trying to send to the remote system is saved in memory If new alarms are received by RAN to be sent on to the remote system they are buffered onto the hard disk As soon as communications with the remote system are restored the first alarm sent is the alarm in memory that RAN was trying to send when the connection went down After that alarm is sent RAN goes to the hard disk and sends all the alarms on a first in
14. When completed save the alarm by clicking Save Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when Commend messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual AII fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Commend Intercom system and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional If the cmdgen tool is used to uninstall database records any outputs and output groups that you defined will be lost Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Commend interface The Commend messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the From To station and action from the reported alarm The operator will be able to respond and remo
15. backup1 The Kalatel CCTV Interface package has been successfully removed The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n y Enter y the default value to reboot the system or press n if you do not want to reboot at this time A CAUTION If the interface package was running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment then you MUST synchronize the database on the backup host with the primary host by performing Database Recovery on the backup host prior to starting redundant Picture Perfect on the backup host Refer to the Picture Perfect 4 0 Redundant Edition User Manual for details Appendix A Configuring an AlphaCom interface This appendix provides information on configuring the interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect which provides the capability to automatically generate AlphaCom alarms in response to Picture Perfect alarms In this appendix Pp ANM UD 24 SOltWwd re requirements csere iririra ci otise nisd tra die Ck Lg xn 24 Hardware r gatrementy oce edeu eire dee eed ee e E dna s 25 COn ONTON OR occire eiea rr eges DECIR GE RR Ge A EEA ees 29 Advanced configuration sioe losses rere bee Uer OR 39 Interface data file backup and restore 00 c cece 44 24 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect provides the capability to auto
16. 5 eis cis wee neret tiles hada saa de CE YRECHE IURE RR E ERR ETE 94 Standsalone System 55sssvsceoi ti tee eH PO ether e iba rerAPP E TEMERE RM Edda 94 Red rndantSystetriu iie scre passe Deb kd bI ppp cs YR hA ean tto Rad HERE ERRAT 95 COnfiGUEGTION ERR E ETT 97 USING CMAQ SN Re P n 97 Cmdgen ERU era ito rM 106 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Commend interface 00 cece cc cece cece nee 108 Commend Intercom System Message Structure 2 2 0 cece ccc cnet beeen e ene e eens 115 Configuring a DMP SCS Interface ii re E RAREERRARA RE ECRRNQA T EEEAEYA 117 Introd ctioh 2c metre waders REDDE son EV dace is dr HER E EIER CDU KITE RYE 118 ReduridantSysteris i ccaacsnaascdedein bb Eb Hebe ERE Em et premi Ueber 118 Software requirements 2 o a ver av erp e re ara e riva ve ere ve PERETE KEELED ks 119 StariadsalonesystelTi usitas ttu topo e abeo eee tian dabat ote cepe toties ixa ls eo mace LLG Red ndctit SVStetn zussda due cote eod HEURES eH CM ambe e edad udaer beu ewe LL Hardware requirements 1 sce a Rer ev eek rer ree RE HI NE I YO Er E ve 120 Starnid alone Systetri wis cesare tLibbesd ben ERROR Weed Dass terr pida n A Ce E UMEERRXFE RA 120 Redundant system 2553 eaae ceEEREYGR RID ENRARPNTPRERENY e WR POPCRIUULENERDIdddd avena 121 Configuring DMP SGS 1 e ntuseesee em ade Lar eU UPS pA Ree tema Se O erede e etre perge 124 Using the scsgen Data Generator Tool 2 0 sse ne een 124 Using Picture Perfect t
17. Figure 42 g g g g g g g igure 10 gure 11 igure 12 gure 13 igure 14 gure 15 gure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 ure 19 igure 20 igure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 YYPE SCEE Pt 11 Parent adapt r SCrEE Niii nesaki hi de eb cet tede i 12 Adaa eree Meia aE ME 12 Product installation options eessesesssssssesssssescccccceccesssssssssnsssusssnussssssssssesseseeseeeeeeesssssssusessssseseeseeseceeeeeeeseeeeessssenssssssssassse 15 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AlphaCom exchange DB25F to DB25F 25 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Intercom interface nnns 26 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M ts 27 Cable pinouts splitter to AlghaCom Exchange DB25F to DB25F ttes 27 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitte eerte 28 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and Intercom interface es 28 Example of adding an AlphaCom alarm tette ettet eset aaia i 34 Example of deleting an AlphaCom alarm essent ttttttttttttttttttetttttennnennntentnttnttoos 36 Example of printing an AlphaCom alarm File ccccccccsssscssscsssssssssssvssssssssssscecssccsssescssacsassacsansusssuasesssesseceseccecssassecieacencosseseltbens 37 Example printed report sorted by input group Id sssssssssssssssssssssssssecceccccessecssssssssssssnsnssnsussssssecseeeeeeeeeesesssessssesssnnsssses 38 Example or exitirigthie
18. If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package Picture Perfect Commend interface commend package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e Picture Perfect Commend interface commend package 2 x m c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Commend Intercom controller provided by the manufacturer Refer to your intercom manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be use
19. Introduction When the RAN package is installed alarms from the Picture Perfect system can be routed to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system The Picture Perfect and remote systems are connected using an Ethernet network Both systems use the TCP IP protocol to communicate with each other This method of communication guarantees accurate transmission of all data and instant notification of a system that is no longer connected to the network Note RAN only provides the alarm data which can be forwarded to the remote system You are responsible for the software on the remote system which processes the incoming alarms Refer to Advanced configuration on page 267 for the format of the message provided by Picture Perfect and the format of the message from the remote system for which Picture Perfect is looking RAN works with the Picture Perfect stand alone networked or redundant versions The basic workings of the systems are similar Refer to Figure 99 Overview of a standalone Picture Perfect and a RAN interface on page 262 and Figure 100 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a RAN interface on page 262 for a pictorial overview of the systems that are explained in the following paragraphs Standalone In the Picture Perfect stand alone version an alarm occurs and is sent to the Picture Perfect system If the alarm received has a priority that is equal to or hig
20. Note Adding outputs and output groups must be done manually using Picture Perfect Using stngen9600 The command line data generator tool stngen9600 can be used to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System alarm interface It is part of the Stentofon 9600 alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is available when that package has been installed The Stentofon 9600 Intercom System is capable of producing a large number of messages for all of the pagers and exchanges that may be installed For Picture Perfect to monitor the numerous message combinations would require a large number of input group and alarm database records to be entered on the system To add to the complexity there may be more than one Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interface running on a Picture Perfect system The stngen9600 tool will aid in the maintenance aspect when there are multiple Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interfaces installed and running When a Stentofon 9600 intercom is added or removed the tool can be used to quickly install or uninstall those database records associated with a particular interface This is possible by carefully segregating the input group and alarm database records for each Stentofon 9600 interface running on the Picture Perfect system The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See stngen9600 uninstall on page 333 for an explanation of the uninstall por
21. Type nfrgen The following message appears on the screen Notifier Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to un install the Notifier database records This is the first 3 to 4 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Notifier interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix ceret Enter the input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it 216 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The input group prefix you entered wag NFR1 Is this correct y n yl 7 Tocontinue press y Tostop press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar t
22. Yes Alarm SIMPLEX ALARM lt GLOBAL gt w S P Delay Time 0 CE Results 1 records Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 In the Description field of the Input Groups form enter lt eight digit ID gt as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm If you want to see a unique Picture Perfect alarm displayed for each Simplex alarm define a separate alarm for each Simplex alarm and assign it to a corresponding input group If you choose not to define a unique alarm description for each alarm define just one Picture Perfect alarm as shown in Figure 1 0 This choice is strictly at the discretion of the operator You must define an alarm and input group for every point that is detected by the Simplex system When alarms and resets are received they are transmitted to the Picture Perfect system for processing Each alarm will be routed to the Alarm Monitor and history 283 Alarms are handled as logical alarms so they can be responded to and removed without being physically reset The Description field of the Alarms screen simply displays to the Picture Perfect system that a Simplex alarm has been triggered and identifies the priority of the alarm Fo
23. ke ke amp A Add an AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection a Adding an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Location ID 1 99999 45 Outgoing AlphaCom alarm number 1 9999 15 You may now enter an optional alarm description to identify this mapping entry For example the Picture Perfect alarm description may be used Do you wish to enter an alarm description y n yl y The alarm description must fit on one line Enter the alarm description then hit ENTER 00 1 00 Door Forced Open Adding Picture Perfect input group 102 alarm 21 location 45 Alphacom alarm 15 Alarm Description 00 1 00 Door Forced Open Is this OK y n yl y Adding an alarm to AlphaCom map entry The following AlphaCom Node Numbers were configured at installation time for the Specified ports Node Number Port 1 dev tty1l 2 dev tty4 10 dev tty2 20 dev tty3 Enter the AlphaCom Node Numbers from the above list for which alarm 15 will be mapped The Node Numbers should be separated by a space or tab Node numbers 1 10 You have specified to map Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number 15 to AlphaCom Nodes 1 10 Is this corr
24. ktd comm tty4 cfg 1 5 4 28 02 Interface unit MonitorId 00 FunctionCodeOn FunctionCodeOff X The following values are set based on your installation responses PortName dev tty4 PortBaud 9600 Single device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to only one switcher device in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event usethe msan set single utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below If multiple switcher devices are installed and Picture Perfect is configured for single device support a CCTV command is sent to only one of the installed switcher devices in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event You may want to configure the system in this manner if each alarm event is to be routed to only one CCTV switcher and you require maximum interface performance A slight performance gain occurs since the switcher device mapping tables do not need to be searched for all matching entries As soon as the first match is found the search terminates To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to single perform the following steps 1 Login to the system as root 2 Enter the command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set single The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemo
25. univ_intr redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 2000 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved univ_intr redundant cfg 1 6 02 17 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Universal Intrusion interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primary1 backup1 Interface data file backup and restore The Universal Intrusion interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 24 Universal Intrusion Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Universal Intrusion software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Universal Intrusion interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 24 Universal Intrusion Interface Data Files Data file name Description cas db text univ intr cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 forAIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text univ intr redundant cfg Universal Intrusion redundant configuration fil
26. 10 To continue press y To stop press n 11 335 If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following The input group prefix being used is STNO1 Making alarm id checks Deleting input group and alarm records The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp stn inpgrp del log tmp stn alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device kalatel map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n yl If this script was called from the removal script then select n to notinform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system is running select y if you want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty4 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Adding or modifying input groups for the 3 possible message types for each paging station to be monitored Adding or modifying a
27. A log of this run was saved in file cstgen log 81 82 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual In the previous example one error was detected and flagged by the asterisk character when attempting to route the Badge History Overflow alarm for Micro ID number 1 to the Central Station system A more detailed error message is contained in the cstgen 1og log file indicating the database record or field that is incorrect or missing For this particular error no input group was assigned for the Badge History Overflow alarm event type for the specified micro The Picture Perfect database should be corrected to include this definition and the cstgen tool should then be re executed See the discussion earlier in this chapter on using SQL reports to identify missing database information Advanced configuration The Central Station interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text cstation comm ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the name of the tty port specified for the interface The file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is the contents
28. Ademco or Radionix panel Note Any panel that connects to the OH2000E Receiver must transmit using one of the following protocols in order to be recognized by Picture Perfect e SIA e CID Radionics Modem 6112 Radionics Modem 8112 Radionics Modem 7112 Radionics Modem 9112 e Radionics Modem 7212 2 De E x 239 For the Picture Perfect system e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the OH Receiver communication program is started e A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter port Refer to Figure 83 Figure 84 or Figure 85 as appropriate Figure 83 Picture Perfect AIX system to splitter Picture Perfect AIX Splitter System CD GD DB25F Straight Serial Cable DB25M Figure 84 Picture Perfect Linux system with a Digi Port expander to splitter Picture Perfect Linux Splitter System o Poa D ILI g EE DB25F
29. Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms form enter a search criteria using a key word and the wild card character for example SIMPLEX 3 Click Find The desired alarm or multiple matches will appear Locate the correct alarm on the grid 4 Editthe desired information When completed save the alarm by clicking Save Monitoring alarms The Alarm Monitor screen displays incoming alarms and their priority count and status Alarms display on the Alarm Monitor in order of their priority When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window to notify the operator A System Reset Complete message is generated when all the Simplex alarms have been reset This message will be treated as an alarm and routed to Monitor History Click on the Monitor Alarm Monitor icon to bring up the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen Figure 111 shows a sample list of alarms their location and the date and time of occurrence Figure 111 The Alarm Monitor screen ih Alarm Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor il a x iem New Alarms 3 Total Alarms 3 Display is now active Highest Priority 15 M f e R 01 0 Condition p Device Date Device Time Alarm N A 01 06 200 0 10 SENT Alarm 10 10 38 MAIN ENTRANCE STAIR 01010201 Alarm 01 06 2005 10 10 55 01 06 2005
30. All have default parameters that were setup during installation You can run the RAN system with these defaults or you can change them 3 Change the alarm descriptions that are displayed when connection is lost with the remote system See Remote Connection Lost Alarm on page 264 4 Change the length of time the system waits for a connection between the Picture Perfect and remote systems before reporting a connection lost alarm See How long to wait for a connection on page 269 5 Change the location and the number of alarms that will be buffered while communications are down between Picture Perfect and the remote system See What Happens When the Connection is Lost on page 269 Configuring alarm routing criteria Completion of this section is mandatory You need to set an upper range for alarm priority For any alarms with a priority equal to or higher than the alarm priority set here this would be a numerical value equal to or less than this number a countdown then begins from the number you set as the alarm delay time If the alarm has not been responded to and the delay time has elapsed the alarm is sent to the remote system Follow these steps to configure alarm priority and delay time 1 Select Setup then Parameters The Parameters form displays 2 Enterthe Alarm Delay time This is the number of seconds which must elapse before an unresponded to alarm is sent to the remote system 3 Enter the Alarm Priority This is the prio
31. Device Types on page 228 e LDD is the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0210 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example a PAGE device located at LDD 105 for the two available status types would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 ACTIVE PAGE 105 NFR1 CLR ACT PAGE 105 The example above assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation All Systems Normal Message Type To recognize All Systems Normal messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL is a fixed field For example NFR1 ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Signal Silence Message Type To recognize Signal Silence messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED is a fixed field For example NFR1 SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED 222 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation System Reset Message To recognize System Reset messages use the following format in the i
32. OT AMM sciet t EA AERO tte tti betae 39 American Dynamics cable pinouts terminal block to DB25F and terminal bIOCIetO DBI anane EA ME ME EE NE 49 Burle Allegiant cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to switcher DB25F tO BOM t HH M 49 Grundig cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Grundig Matrix VAZ300 controller DB25F tO BOM m UAE 50 Javelin cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to javelin controller DB25F to DB9F 50 Kalatel cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to converter box DB25F to DB9M s 50 MaxPro cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 controller IDB25F to DB25M etit eite etse Lit ctve e toe RUE cfe ettet utut 51 Panasonic 550 cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Panasonic 550 IDB25F to DB25M tert tdt eee etin eq RE etetei iuit 51 Panasonic Proteus Pelco Pelcob cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Bridge PC Panasonic Proteus Pelco or Pelcob CM9750 DT DB25F to DB9F tts 52 Pelco cable pinouts pelco only Bridge PC to controller DB9F to DB9F es 52 Vicon Viper cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to switcher DB25F to DB9M 52 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface ssssnnntnnttnttrttttttttttttttttnttes 53 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M tts 54 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter
33. Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that used the input group prefix CMD07 and has appropriate input group and alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the Commend system Below is an explanation of the information shown by the display The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the cmdgen tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the cmdgen tool Line 2 The Commend system has received either a call request 21 or 22 for Block FF23 Station FF13 Line 3 The Commend system has received either an acknowledge 12 or 31 for Block FF23 Station FF13 Line 4 The Commend system has received either a clear 10 or 30 for Block FF23 Station FF13 Line 5 The Commend system has received a door release OA for Block FF23 Station 13 Line 6 The Commend system has received a duress code 1D for Block FF23 Testing the Interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor
34. Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Stentofon interface st entofon package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Stentofon interface st entofon package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including e PMF R processor board with Security Software Package 64401 Note Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon Interface Software package e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS
35. RAN is unable to create the alarm pipe file This is typically the result of an invalid PipeName variable Error retrieving an alarm from the pipe errno xx An error occurred while trying to retrieve an alarm from the hard disk to send to the remote system Check the file system sizes failed to register with the frontend errno xx An internal component of RAN is missing Shutdown and restart the Picture Perfect system Failed fetching alarm from frontend errno xx An error was encountered while trying to get an alarm from the system to send to the remote system The alarm was not sent to the remote system only received xx of yy RAN received only xx bytes out the yy bytes that it expected to receive The remote system should re send any message that caused this error If these messages persist there may be a problem with the network RAN backend is already installed The installation has failed and installed two RANSs If the problem remains after restarting Picture Perfect remove and then re install the RAN package recv error errno xx An error was encountered while receiving a response to an alarm from the remote system The remote system should re send any message that caused this error If these messages persist there may be a problem with the network select error errno xx 273 An error occurred while attempting to configure the network connection to the remote system Server send error errno xx An err
36. RAN utilizes two ports for the redundant networks The default port number for the redundant network port assigned at time of installation is 9012 Message format from Picture Perfect Version 1 55 or higher The following is the format of the enhanced RAN message sent from Picture Perfect to the remote system Version 1 5 5 or higher typedef struct ecad send pkt int host id int input id int alarm id int ingrp id char host origin 28 Date happened short priority char padding 3 char alarm description 31 char input description 31 int process state char logical state 15 char physical state 15 ECadSendPkt Message format from the remote system The following is the format of the enhanced RAN message Picture Perfect needs to receive from the remote system typedef struct ecad receive pkt ECadSendPkt alarm info char remote sys info 256 ECadReceivePkt Error messages The following are the possible error messages that can be posted in the log mmdd files inthe cas log directory followed by a brief explanation of the possible problem that caused this message The procedure for handling all these messages is the same If the solution listed in the description does not eliminate further reporting of the error you should note the exact text of the error and contact GE Security Customer Support for further assistance Under normal conditions you should not see these messages abnormal
37. Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual AlphaCom Exchange System Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the AlphaCom communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 7 Figure 7 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F o Uu PB UM Ww HG Splitter Port DB25M Oo Uu BR UM Fn H G e Cable to connect from the splitter master port to the AlphaCom Exchange See figure below Figure 8 Cable pinouts splitter to AlphaCom Exchange DB25F to DB25F DB25F Shield 1 Rxd 2 Txd 3 SG 7 Splitter Master AlphaCom Port Receiver DB25F Shield Rxd Txd RTS CTS DCD SG Om 5 UM NN HL
38. Refer to the Picture Perfect User Manual for more information on monitoring and responding to alarms 285 Extended configuration The Simplex interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text simplex cfg cas db text simplex redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text simplex cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Simplex device attached to the specified port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Simplex interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Simplex device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text simplex cfg simplex cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script simplex inst 1 5 06 10 03 This file contains the configuration information for the SIMPLEX alarm interface Each interface
39. USER 545 ADDED NUMBER 460 SCS1 55566 CODE ADDED 545 460 Alarm i 15 51 50 DEVICE 2121 MISSING SCS1 94923 DEVICE RESTORED 212 Alarm i 15 52 48 USER 777 PERIM LATE TO CLOSESCS1 22331 LATE CLOSE 777 01 Alarm 15 53 21 USER 565 INTERIOR ARMED SCS1 98706 ARMED 565 02 Alarm i 15 54 44 LOOP 221 IS IN BYPASS SCS166666 221 999 BYPASS Alarm 15 56 12 1 10001 N20990800840012 SCS1 1 10001 N20990800840012 Alarm 15 57 42 1 35353 S56 SCS1 35353 56 Alarm 1 06 2005 16 01 12 Line 9 Line 10 The preceding figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible set of alarms for an interface using the SCS 1 Input Group Prefix As previously mentioned in the manual known account numbers of known message types will generate the Alarm Description to which the Input Group Description maps For this interface the Location column on the Alarm Monitor contains Input Group Descriptions Known alarms will contain for this particular Alarm Monitor screen SCS1 description in the Location column that is the Input Prefix followed by specific information extracted from message received 159 from the SCS 1 receiver Line 2 from the Alarm Monitor above is an example of an S alarm for a known account number For Unknown alarms of a known message type for which an account number user number etc entry was not generated by scsgen or manually the Location column will contain the Input Group Prefix followed by three asterisks and whatever information w
40. User Manual 10 11 If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 3 to 4 characters with the last character s numeric For example NFR1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix ses l Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was NFR1 Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Enter Enter n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will display regarding the selection of a default facility for the Notifier interface k k k k Default Notifier Facility assignment portion k k k k When the input_group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input_group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from t
41. When monitoring this message type with the TESTXX status you must consult the Notifier panel or printer for the test count which will be shown in place of the XX Module Activation Message Type To recognize Module Activation message types use the following format in the input group description IGP STATUS DEV TYPE lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS can be one of the following ACTIVE or CLEAR e DEV TYPE is one ofthe non Alarm Monitor module or control module device types listed in Device types on page 228 e LDDis the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0210 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 221 For example to configure a SPEAKER device located at LDD 105 for the two available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 ACTIVE SPEAKER 105 NFR1 CLEAR SPEAKER 105 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Supervisory Activation Message Type To recognize Supervisory Activation message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt STATUS gt lt DEV TYPE gt lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters STATUS can be one of the following ACTIVE or CLR ACT DEV TYPE is one of the non Alarm Monitor module or control module device types listed in Table 13
42. and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be tied to an input group This is the standard method for setting up other hardware on a Picture Perfect system The details of setting up the appropriate database records will be covered in more detail in Configuration on page 323 The communication from the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System to the host is unidirectional No handshaking is required for the interface The protocol of the interface is the serial transfer of information one line at a time Redundant systems The Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Stentofon Intercom Black Box Converter Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Stentofon intercom This allows the physical connection of the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Stentofon Intercom However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface
43. igd STN01 F401 Disconnect cctvName kalatel cctv 2 kalatel 1550 520 1550 2 ktd tty2 igd STN01 F110 Request cctvName allplex cctv 1 allplex 1551 521 1551 1 allp tty3 Creating CCTV device allplex map addition file tmp stn allplex deltaigd STNO1 F110 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 2 allplex 1552 522 1552 2 allp tty3 igd STNO1 F110 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 3 allplex 1553 523 1553 3 allp tty3 igd STN0O1 FFF3 Request cctvName allplex cctv 4 allplex 1554 524 1554 4 allp tty3 igd STN0O1 FFF3 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 5 allplex 1555 525 1555 5 allp tty3 igd STN0O1 FFF3 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 6 allplex 1556 526 1556 6 allp tty3 igd STN0O1 FFFO Request cctvName kalatel cctv 1 kalatel 1557 527 1557 1 ktd tty2 igd STNO1 FFF0 Connect cctvName kalatel cctv 2 kalatel 1558 528 1558 2 ktd tty2 igd STN0O1 FFFO Disconnect cctvName kalatel cctv 3 kalatel 1559 529 1559 3 ktd_tty2 Generated 6 new entries for CCTV switcher device kalatel map table Generated 6 new entries for CCTV switcher device allplex map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device kalatel map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device allplex map table Installation complete You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y Enter a y to inform the system or ann to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent
44. iterrierits 5 niet ERR bb edd eidesetdete ber eppe pP teas 252 Hardware reguiremiehls 4 iru tee ret hpSbUpDbDp pov V d ad EA ATTANS ak 253 Extended configuration seisce teera sais oe re bres Re E ER Iu UR Sereni ne ie iege dote en 257 Icas db text cbas ttUN GRQ 35s boo obe oC tent xr RR PPM Edere bbb erbe bib be PER 257 cas db text cbas redundant cfg ssssssssssssssssssssssss e e ees 258 Interface data file backup and restore cece ccc cee een teen enn 258 Configuring a Remote Alarm Notification interface ee eee 259 hiis TI 260 SINIO E yingi PH nnn 260 NUES 260 iiem TS 261 Software requirerents ssia cs cada cde he ERE e RAI oie D Ree eer APR en d a REIR 261 Stand alone systelrii ss szcious esee e Ek rd ER OMM PN RBE RINT V E RR PPP USO ENDS 261 Red nidarit SVSteQm e erret EU et eee ehe b RE en eerte presa e aed 261 Hardware overview oes krex rr ter Ehe Hp R Rete ae EUER RR ERCEE P REUFERECENFERERNE UE ES 262 Config tation coe esoni aE E P REOR EISPMNUPE Ee E ieNVEF S E E tise ceiete edd EEEE 263 Configuring alarm routing Criterid 2 0 I mee 263 Remote Connection Lost Alarm 0 2 2 cece net eee e mee 264 Advanced configuration ccccsssadiacce re re dine bobod ee En ERA E E ee te RAE S EM dad EE n 267 How long to wadit ford CONMECHION s eoeerec tb eEIDIDDUROl VE eR Ye RE E eek Eada ee aes 269 Options for CONN lost alarms isssssssssssssssssss I m e eee 269 Wh
45. lt MessageType gt lt IGP gt The 4 to 5 character input group prefix described on page 296 lt PagingStation gt This is the 4 character Paging Station identifier valid values are FFFO through 9999 as described in Message types on page 311 lt MessageType gt Identifies the type of message and is one of Request Connect or Disconnect corresponding to the five Exchange protocol messages as defined in Message types on page 311 There must be a single period between the parts of the input group record description and spaces are not allowed anywhere within the description This structure must be followed in defining input group records so that the Stentofon interface software can look for matches in the database using input group descriptions constructed from protocol messages received from the Exchange For each paging station that is to be monitored you should define an input group record for each message type An example of the input group record descriptions to monitor paging station FFF7 for a Stentofon interface using input group prefix STNO1 is STNO1 FFF7 Request STNO1 FFF7 Connect STNO1 FFF7 Disconnect See Figure 117 for an input group record containing a valid input group description The procedure for adding or modifying input groups is described below Note that alarm records must be created prior to input group records as you must specify the alarm when defining the input group record A description of the procedure f
46. unique panel device ID must have been previously been set up in Picture Perfect If the panel device ID was found along with the alarm an alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect Further information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the EST panel Firesine The Firesine System interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Firesine System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line Once an alarm is detected the Firesine interface extracts the ID for the specific type of message F lt id gt Fire A lt id gt Alert Pre Alarm D lt id gt Fault Detected R system reset message we use the configured message from the firesine configuration file The ID or reset message must have been previously set up in Picture Perfect If it was the associated alarm reset is generated Time Date Zonal and General Fault messages are ignored Further information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device that is the Firesine panel Notifier This interface acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Notifier AFP400 AFP1010 and AM2020 firepanel and recognizes only the predefined messages built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It may be used to monitor messages from the Notifier panel For
47. xx The cas db text rantcpip cfg iseither missing or has the wrong permissions If this problem persists re install RAN Unable to store HOSTaa INPUTbb ALARMcc INPUT GROUPdd errno xx This message indicates that an error was encountered while attempting to save an alarm on the hard disk The host input alarm and input group IDs are all displayed Check the file system sizes Unable to store HOSTaa INPUTbb ALARMcc INPUT GROUPdd pipe full This message indicates that RAN tried to save more alarms to the hard disk than it was configured for The alarm causing this message does not send to the remote system but is shown in the log If this is a common problem try increasing the PipeSize variable 274 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix L Configuring a Simplex interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system which allows Picture Perfect to act as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex fire and other life safety alarms In this appendix po 0077 ised casi cae hina EEE A E L aaa D Mand 278 SOMME F quirementg cicelosnienlesdewbeladonre bipes eae cows 279 HardWare r guiremeniy oreore rrer dre BAERS ORE RUE ques 280 COn 40 1 MEM 283 Extended configuration cece be ese lee te e b me 287 Interface data file backup and restore 2 llle 288 276 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Picture Perfect host access con
48. 0 to 999 e LOOP TYPE isatwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as OZBL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 e STATUS isa three character string AZALM Trouble T Message Type To recognize Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt 149 150 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual where IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 1 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isatwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as OZBL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS is a three character string T TBL Restore R Message Type To recognize Restore message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE is atwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as OZBL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU
49. 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 84 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Single device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to only one switcher device in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event usethe msan set single utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note that if multiple switcher devices are installed and Picture Perfect is configured for single device support a CCTV command will be sent to only one of the installed switcher devices in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event You may want to configure the system in this manner if each alarm event is to be routed to only one CCTV switcher and you require maximum interface performance A slight performance gain occurs since the switcher device mapping tables do not need to be searched for all matching entries As soon as the first match is found the search terminates To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to single perform the following steps 1 2 3 Log on to the system as root Enter the command cas bin profile Enter the command cas bin msan set single The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemon
50. 145 Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke scsgen and use the new input file Method 2 1 Use scsgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix except for the entries reserved for dynamic generated alarms Note Any input group and its associated alarm using the input group prefix targeted for un installation that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed This means it will be permanently lost if it s data was not originally part of the input file To avoid this situation for any input groups and associated alarms created manually a corresponding entry should be added to the input file so that ALL of the SCS data may be automatically recreated at a later date 2 Add the new device data to the input file 3 Invoke scsgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records 145 Using scsgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation If you need to add additional message types or change the defined data for an existing SCS 1 interface you should do the following 1 Use scsgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix except for
51. 17 19 13 PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR NFR1 CLR AL SMOKE PHOTO 102 Alarm 17 30 40 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESSAlarm 17 56 02 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 DETECTOR TEST ALL OK Alarm 17 58 27 18 08 44 01 06 2005 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence In this scenario a system uses the input group prefix of NFR1 and has appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the panel The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the nfrgen tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the nfrgen tool Device types This table lists the valid device types that can be monitored and is provided as a convenience It is not necessarily a complete list of all available device types If you have a device type that needs to be monitored and it is not listed here you can enter a new device type up to 12 characters in length Table 13 Device Types Detectors Monitor Modules Control Modules Zones 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 SMOKE PHOTO MONITOR CONTROL FORWARD ZONE SMOKE ION PULL STATION TELEPHONE REVERSE ZONE HEAT ANALOG WATER FLOW FORM C RELAY FIXED HEAT D SMOKE CONV POWER CONV FIXED PHOT D SPRNKLR MNTR ALARMS PEND ION DUCT DET TRBL
52. 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COMO are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intercom console port Refer to Figure 112 290 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 112 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to Port C Picture Perfect Host Computer DB25F GND 7 Rx 3 Stentofon TouchLine Intercom System Port C Pin 80B GND Pin 82B Tx Pin 83B CTS Pin 84B RTS Figure 113 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Intercom interface 530132005 gt x E c x 291 Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including e PMF R processor board with Security Software Package 64401 Note Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instructions on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon Interface Software package e A standard splitter box e Serial ports One RS 232 C ser
53. 27 28 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 9 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitte DB25F To AlphaCom Exchange To Primary Host DB25F To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 10 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and Intercom interface 29 Configuration The Picture Perfect interface to the AlphaCom system allows alarms that are detected by the Picture Perfect system to trigger predefined events on the AlphaCom system Before this can happen Picture Perfect must be informed of which alarms should be sent to the Alphacom system and how that Picture Perfect alarm is mapped to an AlphaCom system alarm number Picture Perfect treats alarms as a collection of information which includes e Input group e Location Host number The AlphaCom system distinguishes alarms by a unique four digit identifier per alarm location and condition Once you have set up the alarms on Picture Perfect you need to set up the mapping of alarms to the AlphaCom system This procedure is accomplished by executing a script which requires operator input Note The AlphaCom interface uses the Picture Perfect CCTV backend process as it is an output interface As such CCTV reports will be used for determining locations For a successful configuration follow th
54. 3 or 6 digit id A text string is used for the System Reset default FIRESINE RESET instead of the 3 or 6 digit id The cas db text firesine cfg file contains the length of the numeric id in the AlarmIdLen variable The default is 3 The cas db text firesine cfg file also contains the prefix string and the reset message string definitions in the respective InGrpPrefix and ResetMsg variables These may be changed but must match the description in the input group description These strings must contain no blanks If the strings are to be changed it is strongly suggested that they be changed before the first input group records are created because if they are changed afterwards all of the already created records will need to have their description altered Sample input group descriptions would be FIRESINE F123Input group description for a 3 digit id FIRESINE F123456Input group description for a 6 digit id FIRESINE FIRESINE RESETThe reset message input group description Adding or modifying an input group Each Firesine alarm must have an individual input group assigned which includes the command type and a three digit or six digit identifier The description field in the Input Group screen which allows for 60 alphanumeric characters as shown in Figure 64 must be such that it is meaningful and must match the three digit or six digit identifier number as part of its description Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Conf
55. 345 Interface data file backup and restore The Stentofon 9600 interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 22 Stentofon 9600 Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Stentofon 9600 software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list flle cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Stentofon 9600 interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 22 Stentofon 9600 Interface Data Files Data file name Description cas db text TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for stn9600 cfg example ttyl forAIX ttyDOO1 for Linux cas db text Stentofon 9600 redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant stentofon9600 redundant c configuration Contains the host names fg 346 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix O Configuring a Universal Intrusion interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Universal Intrusion interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for an external device In this appendix po MMC 352 Soltwd re requirements
56. 78654 123 EM ALM ALM EMERGENCY SITUATION 15 30 allplex 77 tty3 0 23456 333 01 USER 333 PERIMETER DISARMED 15 30 allplex 78 tty3 C 34521 444 02 USER 444 INTERIOR ARMED 35 L 23411 333 01 USER 333 PERIM LATE TO CLOSE 23 20 allplex 99 tty3 P 34567 123 456 USER 123 ADDED NUMBER 456 1 12 p 44335 444 555 USER 444 DELETED 1 12 U 11221 888 999 USER 888 CHANGED TO 999 1 12 s 10001 J 30122 200 8 USR 200 GRNTD DOOR ACCS DEV 12 N 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED PERM SCHEDULE I 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED TEMP SCHEDULE n 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED PRI SCHEDULE i 30122 200 USR 200 CHANGED SEC SCHEDULE v 30122 33 VAR MSG TEXT MSG MSG TYPE 33 VAR MSG TEXT The first data line after the Picture Perfect version line is an example of an alarm message type that triggers a CCTV response The input group records created are unique for each line in the input file The line in the file for an S message will generate 76 input records for the specified account number An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section Input Group and Alarm Records Generated by scsgen on page 138 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file around for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you
57. 81 ure 82 ure 83 ure 84 ure 85 ure 86 ure 87 ure 88 ure 89 ure 90 ure 91 ure 92 ure 93 ure 94 Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Sample alarmornitet SCEE Mpina tette osten etica dee bed pere tette 113 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to SCS 1 receiver DB25F to DB25F s 120 Overview of a Picture Perfect system and an intrusion interface eee 121 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M e 122 Cable pinouts Splitter to SCS 1 receiver DB25F to DB25F ttes 122 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 123 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intrusion interface ee 123 Sample Input Groups SCTeeli cote tiere nnne d Retorno RR Reed 155 Sample Alarm SCreeblasu tite ie eet lei elected etit poesi eee ecd cette pedet 157 Saraple Alatm MORIEORSCFeSIn iue itta enm rto ton e T i a 158 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 168 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M e 169 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 169 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 169 Sample input groups screen t
58. AFP400 system e Notifier AFP400 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System panel e Custom cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system EIA 232 port to the AFP 400 TBI printer port The required pin connections for this cable are shown in the AFP 400 Analog Fire Panel Installation Manual Chapter 2 Installation in the Section Remote Printers and CRTs Subsection Connecting a PRN 4 Remote Printer Document 50253 01 05 96 Rev A P N50253 A1 ECN 96 002 The pinouts description and figure describes the wiring that must be done except the 25 pin printer port will be replaced with the Picture Perfect system s EIA 232 port on the adapter Figure 67 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AFP 400 System 25 pin to TB1 Picture Perfect AFP 400 System 25 pin TB1 TX2 2 TB1 2 RX3 1 TB1 1 REF 7 3 TB1 3 Figure 68 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Notifier interface ASC FOOLS QR LOK S SSSNSSSSNS 197 2 x Lr c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual For the Picture Perfect system e Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be us
59. Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the firepanel The EST interface acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line When an alarm condition has been detected the EST interface picks up a unique panel device id contained in one of the message lines from the serial port This unique panel device id must have been previously set up through the Input Group form in Picture Perfect along with an associated alarm from the Alarm form If there is a match meaning that the panel device id was found along with an alarm an alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect and displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor will display the Input Group Prefix for the specific instance of the EST interface the unique panel device id and a user defined alarm description Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the EST panel Communication from the EST firepanel to the Picture Perfect host is accomplished using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the firepanel and does not send anything back The serial line used by this interface will be through the EST panel printer ports Messages or alarms recognized by the EST interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the app
60. During installation you are prompted to choose whether you want the system to automatically assign default records or if you want to manually create them If you choose the default which is automatic the system will create generic alarm records to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type and they will be linked to the corresponding input group records If you choose to manually create them each OH Receiver input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the OH Receiver interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor For example a PANIC ALARM might appear on the Alarm Monitor as follows The alarm record description field can be used to further identify or describe the OH Receiver input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example to a generic PANIC ALARM It may be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record s that has the same line description and account The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the uniqu
61. EXHAUST HOOD Each of the four input group records would be linked to this alarm These four input group records allow the interface to monitor the various status conditions for each message as they arrive for that device and loop detector or zone number The n rgen tool knows the status conditions for each message type and will generate the appropriate input group records There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group BLANK Output Group BLANK Facility Value specified in input file or default value The default values for the alarm records are Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority Default value selected when prompted for by nfrgen Facility Default value selected when prompted for by nfrgen 209 Using nfrgen install Before you start You must have root permission to run the n rgen tool The database must be running nfrgen will check this when the tool is invoked If it is not running it will attempt to start it A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture
62. Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save 155 156 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying an alarm Each DMP SCS 1 input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the DMP SCS 1 interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the DMP SCS 1 input group to which it is going to be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record that has the same device and location The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized For example if you are going to be monitoring alarm messages and the four possible status conditions for a detector you wou
63. FFF1 Connect Facility GLOBAL itl tha Input Group State Disabled Enabled Open Condition Ignored O Detected Boolean Type OR Any AND All 9 Individual Short Condition Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Station 401 Connect lt GLOBA v E Delay Time o Results 1records 307 Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying alarms Each Stentofon input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the Alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Stentofon interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe
64. Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file ALARM PRIORITY The sixth column is optional and contains the priority of the alarm record that will be created for the Alarm Description field It is an integer value in the range 1 500 If this field is not present the default alarm priority specified during the running of nfrgen will be used Column Descriptions for Annunciator Trouble Types Except Annunciator Trouble Column 1 Column 2 Column 5 Column 4 Column 5 MSG TYPE ANNUNCIATOR NUMBER ALARM DESCRIPTION FACILITY ALARM PRIORITY MSG TYPE This column is always N for Annunciator messages ANNUNCIATOR NUMBER Column two must contain the two digit annunciator number 01 32 For numbers less than ten add a leading zero ALARM DESCRIPTION The third column is used as the basis for the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This column should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector It can be up to 59 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and
65. Group Prefix followed by three asterisks See the section Identifying the input group prefix on page 145 for more information The Alarm Description field will contain as much of the message received from the SCS 1 receiver as possible up to a maximum of 60 characters Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the DMP SCS 1 receiver and its associated printer Communication from the DMP SCS 1 system to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is bidirectional The interface will receive messages and send ACK NAK and other special case messages back to the SCS 1 system Messages or alarms recognized by the DMP SCS 1 interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group For messages not in the Picture Perfect database a dynamic entry will be created in the input group and alarm database tables These entries use the 20 to 200 database slots in the Picture Perfect Informix input group and alarm tables that are reserved at installation time These represent the number of unknown SCS 1 messages that can be simultaneously displayed on the Alarm Monitor When the reserved slots are depleted the next unique unknown message will overwr
66. Input Group State Enabled Open Condition gnored Short Condition gnored Broadcast State Changes o Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be lt BLANK gt 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another Input Group Figure 50 Sample Input Groups Screen B Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones D Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Q 4 eal Exo 4 x amp Q Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description Bcst 00042 CODE CHANGE 666 555 Facility GLOBAL asia t a Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition OR Any AND AI Individual amp Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No ves Alarm USER 666 CHANGED TO 555 w geo Y Delay Time 0 Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4
67. Interface data file backup and restore The AlphaCom interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 2 below Normal use of the interface software may cause changes to one or more of these files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The AlphaCom software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the AlphaCom interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 2 AlphaCom interface data files Data file name Description cas db text alphacomm cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files isthe port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text alphacomm redundant cfg AlphaCom redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names cas db text alphacomm map Alarm map file that maps Picture Perfect alarm events to AlphaCom alarm numbers as described in Configuration on page 29 cas db text alphacomm ata map Alarm map file that maps the AlphaCom alarm to the AlphaCom nodes to which it is to be sent as described in Configuration on page 29
68. Monitor The input group and alarm descriptions are generated dynamically from the information extracted from the Facility Integrator s message When the number of reserved slots are used up the next unique alarm will overwrite the oldest alarm Redundant systems The CBAS interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Facility Integrator Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Facility Integrator This allows the physical connection of the Facility Integrator to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the CBAS interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Facility Integrator However only the interface software executing on the primary host updates the Picture Perfect database Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are kept track of but do not update the Picture Perfect database In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then update the database when the alarms are processed Software requirements The software requirements for the Seibe C
69. OH 2000 System ID DB9F Straight Serial Cable For the Picture Perfect system e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the OH Receiver communication program is started 238 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 82 Overview of the stand alone Picture Perfect and OH Receiver interface OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect Server running one or more instances of the oh receiver interface Local or Wide Area Network Ethernet TCP IP NX 8E with an NX 590E network module nma N 00000000000000 i 0000000000001 OH2000E NX 8E Ademco Radionix Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual For the OH Receiver system OH Network system OH Network Receiver e NX 8E panel e OH Dial up system e OH2000E Receiver e NX 8E
70. Pin 3 Pin 6 Pin 2 9 9 Pin 7 Shield GND e e GND Pin 1 e e Pin 8 8 Pin Modular Terminal Block Terminal Picture Perfect System Terminal Block Block 8 Pin DB25F 8 Pin Shield 2 Shield 2 Rx 4 2 Tx Rx 4 Tx5 3 Rx Tx5 GND 7 7 GND GND 7 4 5 6 8 20 American Dynamics Switcher DB9F ON DF ONY W 22x oO Figure 17 Burle Allegiant cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to switcher DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect System DB25F Tx Rx CTS SGND DCD DSR DTR 20 co ON OW PP Switcher DB9M Rx Tx RTS FN OW n CTS SGND 49 50 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 18 Grundig cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Grundig Matrix VAZ300 controller DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Host DB25F Tx 2 3 Rx 2 GND 5 DSR DCD DTR 20 oan t Grundig Matrix VAZ300 Controller DB9M Rx Tx GND Figure 19 Javelin cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to javelin controller DB25F to DB9F Picture Perfect Javelin JO325HI System Controller DB25F DB9F Rx TX GND Tx 2 3 Rx 3 2 GND 7 5 Figure 20 Kalatel cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to converter box DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Converter System Box DB25F DB9M Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx RTS 4 7 RTS CTS 5 8 CTS GND 7 5 GND Figure 21 MaxPro cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 controller DB25F to DB25M MAXPRO Matrix Pictu
71. Straight Serial Cable DB25M Figure 85 Picture Perfect Linux system to splitter Picture Perfect Linux Splitter System coa emm DB9F Straight Serial Cable DB25M e Serial Line cable to connect the splitter to the OH Receiver Figure 86 Cable pinouts Splitter to OH Network Receiver Splitter OH Network Receiver a DB25F Null Modem Cable DB9F 240 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 87 Cable pinouts Splitter to OH 2000E Splitter OH 2000E DB25F Straight Serial Cable Figure 88 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter Figure 89 TB1 To OH Receiver panel To Primary Host To Redundant Host DB25M DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and OH Receiver interface OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect Primary Host Local or Wide Area Network Ethernet TCP IP NX 8E with an RS 232 NX 590E network module Splitter RS 232 LLL Jg 00000000000000 Picture Perfect Secondary Host 00000000000000 OH2000E NX 8E Ademco Radionix 241 Configuration The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The message types and formats used by the OH Receiver interface
72. Table 16 CBAS interface data files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The CBAS software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the CBAS interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 16 CBAS interface data files Data file name Description cas db text cbas cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text cbas redundant cfg CBAS redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix K Configuring a Remote Alarm Notification interface This appendix provides information on configuring the RAN package which allows alarms from the Picture Perfect system to be routed to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system In this appendix p ssl o ETC 262 SOFDGT TEGUIFEMICHIT Lio nosse deb deed e eda 263 Hardware OVErVIEW osse ese Ces Ceo HR ER CY a eH a AUR 264 EeosI II P Pm 265 Adyauced Con AE OTON icu eiue Ree cron eoe act n eae Ned 269 ETOT iD 0 DEPT 273 260 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual
73. The Event Code is the part of the message that is used to uniquely identify the alarm that comes in Essentially it is the alarm id as defined by the external Universal Intrusion panel and is unique for each ALARM or DEVICE FAIL alarm that comes in A SYSTEM RESET message is the reset for the matching ALARM message and the DEVICE RESET message is the reset for the matching DEVICE FAIL message The complementary pairs should have the same Event Code as that is what will be used to correlate the reset to the initial alarm 354 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Within the Picture Perfect paradigm the ALARM and DEVICE FAIL messages generate Picture Perfect alarms and the SYSTEM RESET and DEVICE RESET messages generate respective alarm resets Using Picture Perfect to configure the Universal Intrusion interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Add or modify input groups 2 Add or modify alarms 3 Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired 4 Monitor alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific Universal Intrusion panel messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific panel The Event Code field described in the section Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface on page 353 must be entered in t
74. Universal Intrusion interface univ intr package D gt x lt r zi x 349 Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Universal Intrusion interface univ intr package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Universal Intrusion system receiver provided by the manufacturer e Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Universal Intrusion communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intrusion system console port Refer to Figure 128 Fi
75. an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the acility idthat will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a 136 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column descriptions for v Variable Length Message Message Type Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Msg Type Msg Text Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 2 digits 1 to 16 chars 1 to 60 chars1 to 10 digits T to 3 digits v 1 to 99 l Or 1 50
76. an alarm on page 32 e Deleting an alarm on page 35 e Changing an alarm on page 36 e Printing the map file on page 36 e Exiting the program on page 38 Torun the alphacom map program you will need to be logged onto the server as root To run the alphacom map program type at the command prompt alphacom map 32 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding an alarm This section describes how to add a new AlphaCom controlled alarm Refer to Example of adding an AlphaCom alarm on page 34 to see the messages and prompts that display when adding an alarm Follow these steps to add an AlphaCom alarm 1 At the Selection prompt type a to add a new AlphaCom controlled alarm A message displays to confirm a new alarm is being added and you will be prompted for the Input Group Id of the alarm to be added Enter the Input Group Id The Input Group Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 30 Once a valid Input Group Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Alarm Id Enter the associated Alarm Id from the same report entry as used for the Input Group Id Once a valid Alarm Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Location Id Enter the associated Location Id from the same report entry as used for the Input Group and Alarm IDs Once a valid Location Id has been entered you will be prompted for the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number to which the Picture Perfect alarm y
77. appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the type of device status and loop number and detector module number of the reported alarm The complete message of the alarm should be read from the Notifier panel or from a printer connected to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Notifier panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Notifier interface will show a condition of Alarm and an Input State of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times The only way to remove Notifier alarms from the Alarm Monitor is to use the remove button to remove all alarms or to respond and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect maintains and not the time from the Notifier panel Monitoring alarms during notifier reporting The Notifier panel is capable of producing a variety of reports about the system and points that have been installed Reports generated to the Notifier printer are normally interrupted by the panel when a pending condition Alarm Tro
78. are discussed in the following section These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system For a successful configuration follow these steps which will be detailed in the sections that follow 1 Add or modify input group records 2 Add or modify alarm records 3 Add or modify output group records and output records if desired 4 Monitor alarms Note Ifthe OH Receiver package is installed in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment all operations should be performed on the current primary machine The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep any database changes made over to the backup machine Input group records The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific OH Receiver messages There are two methods of adding input group records automatic or manual During installation you are prompted to choose whether you want the system to automatically assign default records or if you want to manually create them If you choose the default which is automatic the system will create generic input group records to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type If you choose to manually create them a specific format must be followed for the description due to the numerous device types statuses and possible locations The specific format allows the interface to look for matches in the database using the input group description field The format
79. between the Picture Perfect database tables which define the various alarm event types can be quite complex All fields must be appropriately defined before alarm event forwarding can occur SQL reports are provided with the Central Station interface software to assist in the verification of the database population and to provide the information required for the cstgen tool input file These reports were added to the Picture Perfect database during installation of the software There are a total of twenty SQL reports fifteen reports to identify Record ID numbers for use with the cstgen tool input file and five reports for assessing missing information in the database tables When using a report to determine valid Record ID numbers for the input file use the numbers in the first left most column If an entry is missing from the report for example if three micros are defined but only two are listed it is due to a missing database table field that is required for proper identification of the alarm event Use one or more of the five debugging reports to determine which field is missing One of these five reports may also be used to determine the Micro ID values for populating the accounts table file described earlier Running the reports Follow these steps with the Picture Perfect user interface to run the reports 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pan
80. break in main loop An internal error has occurred If it persists restart the Picture Perfect system AcceptConnection failed There was an error encountered while trying to establish a connection with the remote system Check the connection to the remote system and the files etc services and etc hosts on Picture Perfect caught signal xx This message indicates that the RAN system has caught an unknown signal and is continuing on caught SIGTERM shutting down 272 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual This message indicates that the RAN system was asked to terminate client connection lost This is a normal message that confirms that the connection between the RAN and remote systems has been broken The lost connection alarm generated after the appropriate timer expires during which the connection was not re established Configuration file is missing variable name parameter A mandatory variable is missing from the cas db text rantcpip cfg file If you are unable to replace the variable in the file then re install the RAN package could not PP smalloc an Alarm message could not PP smalloc TPMessage could not PP smalloc TPAlarmStateChangeData could not PP smalloc remote TPMessage could not PP smalloc remote TPAlarmStateChangeData All these errors indicate an internal system resource has been exceeded The only way to correct this is to restart the Picture Perfect system Could not open pipe filename error xx
81. each Commend interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefixand want tocontinue y n yl To continue press y Tostop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix Enter the input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was CMD07 Is this correct y n yl 108 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following Making alarm id checks Deleting input group and alarm records The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp cmd inpgrp del log tmp cmd alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device grundig map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system is running select y if you want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If
82. each intercom station that is to be monitored you should define an input group record for each message type An example of the input group record descriptions to monitor intercom station 7 for a Stentofon 9600 interface using input group prefix STNO3 is STNO3 01 Request STN03 01 Connect STNO3 01 Busy STN03 01 Disconnect See Figure 125 for an input group record containing a valid input group description The procedure for adding or modifying input groups is described below Note that alarm records must be created prior to input group records as you must specify the alarm when defining the input group record A description of the procedure for defining alarm records may be found in Adding or modifying alarms on page 337 Note Input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the stngen9600 tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows e Delay Time 0 e Boolean Type Individual e Input Group State Enabled e Open Condition Ignored e Short Condition Ignored e Broadcast State Changes No e Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 125 Sample
83. ese ERR 267 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 278 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M ee 279 Cable pinouts splitter to switcher DB25M to DB9M ttt ttt ttttttent 279 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 280 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 280 The input group screen e esseseetntttnttttttttttttts 282 The alarms screen 283 The Alarm Monitor screen ntt tttrcttecocons 284 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to Port C 290 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Intercom interface ttt tttttttttcecnns 290 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M ens 291 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25M to Port C 292 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface 292 Sample input groups screen ttti tttttttttttnnntett titt ntn ttttt ttt ttt ttti ttt ernetan eranan asanes 306 Samiple alarmiscreeb utro endete ette nt entiers p Doe diet hice 308 Samiuple AlarmiMoniterscreeh sedes trente elders aiiin nahin 310 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to DB25M s 320 Overview of the Picture Perfect and intercom interface ttt tttttttttectcnnt 320 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M ens 321 Cable pinouts Pictu
84. first out FIFO order to the remote system 270 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The RAN system may also be configured at installation time to safeguard against alarm loss If the AlarmLossChk configuration parameter is set to Yes as alarms are processed new alarms will not be forwarded to the remote system until a response is received for the alarm that was just sent The new alarms will be buffered onto the hard disk into the PipeName file for a maximum of PipeSize alarms The PipeSize variable sets the maximum number of alarms that can be stored on the hard disk The default number of alarms that the file can hold is 100 alarms The location of the file used on the hard disk is controlled by the PipeName variable This variable contains the exact name of the file that is used for buffering the alarms and must be a complete file name with a path The default value is tmp CAD pipe lfyou need to increase the number of alarms you may need to increase the size of tmp Contact GE Security Customer Support for assistance Alarm response states When the remote system responds to the alarms sent by RAN these responses are recorded into alarm history The response from the remote system is treated in the same way as a response from an operator sitting at a Picture Perfect terminal The response text is provided by the remote system The process state of the alarm is controlled by the AlarmDisposition variable The following are po
85. for more information Follow these steps to use the cmdgen tool to install database records 1 2 Loginas root Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the cmdgen tool and the database tools it uses Type cmdgen Messages similar to the following appear Commend Data Generator 2 0 If the Commend package was configured for operation in a redundant Picture Perfect environment you will also see messages similar to the following Redundant commend interface configuration detected This host primaryl Other host backupi Redundant commend operation is ENABLED The commend interface changes will be reflected on the other host Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file 10 103 The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered cmd inp as the input file name Is this correct y n y Entera y toacceptoran n to change the name If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 4 to 5 characters
86. for the purpose it was designed for refer to the data sheet and user documentation For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com Contents Chapter 1 db cse E xii Preface ice cT XV Conventions used in this docuUMeNt iiie eeren ccc nee nen e e een XV Safety terms and symbols isssssssssssssssssssssssssssss ee e e e he e e eee XV Interface overview aloes 1E bi ER d dama eoa Ra RE bd dd d OE AR d 1 riders ied m 2 CCTV control systems supported by Picture Perfect 0 cece cece ene eee e ence eh 3 American DYNAMICS ncccccegscweeavyevrsadaasawanmenan ER EEEE EGEE E E EEE RAA PPS 3 BUS AEG ION ersinnen ARAE E IERA aE ETS E AAAY 3 310 32 41 oo suia naana e E E E Ta a eB ENRE EEE EEE R a TAEAE VERAN 3 GIUNGIO EEE TE EEEE AEE EEA 3 No hec iii e ene hoa Gas en pices E E AER E AEE E O E EE eee oa 3 Melee EAA A E I A EE E E OONO 3 MAA RO v 3 Panasonic PEOLeUs scere eega E E EAE EA E ONCOGENE EENIAS 4 xo tfe teres E RH 4 HJ 4 VICOIMIDG terror te Meneses nun once teense anata Mont Lt cta iereda E IURE ERIS 4 Firepanel systems supported by Picture Perfect 0 cece ccc cece eee eee e nnne 5 ESTA uu REEL pae ieee e a a a a P E NAM E ue E E EE E RE RE NN RE dS 5 BRIT ETE I 5 Menace E MM 5 SIMPE m 5 Intrusion detection systems supported by Picture Perfec
87. into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the Notifier panel For detector and module monitoring the information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the device type status loop and detector module number and a user defined description field Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Notifier panel and its associated printer The interface can monitor system type messages coming from the firepanel which do not have an associated device type A list of the fixed message types the interface can monitor can be found in Fixed messages types on page 206 Communication from the Notifier Fire Alarm System to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the Notifier panel and does not send anything back The serial line utilized by this interface will be through the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 Panel printer connection on the appropriate serial interface board SIB or the TB1 printer connection on the Notifier AFP 400 panel s CPU 400 control panel Messages or alarms recognized by the Notifier interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated
88. is as follows OH R Receiver L Line P Partition Account Event Zone User For example the following input group description defines an event message on Receiver 01 Line 01 for Account 001000 indicating a Panic Alarm by User 000 OH RO1 L01 P01 001000 PAOO0 Receiver 01 Line 01 Partition 01 Account 001000 Panic Alarm User 000 242 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group Note The Input Group description must follow the format described in Input group records on page 241 If you want the alarm message to be more easily identifiable such as by location a unique alarm record may be defined for each input group and the alarm record description may be modified to include more descriptive data See Alarm records on page 244 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Click Save Click New to add another input group Figure 90 Sample input groups screen B Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones D Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Out
89. messages that are received over the serial line The messages used by the Stentofon interface were derived from the Stentofon TouchLine Exchange protocol as described in Message types on page 311 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the stngen data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the stngen command line tool Using stngen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 304 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface Note Adding outputs and output groups must be done manually using Picture Perfect Using stngen The command line data generator tool stngen can be used to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the Stentofon Intercom System alarm interface It is part of the Stentofon alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is available when that package has been installed The Stentofon Intercom System is capable of producing a large number of messages for all of the pagers an
90. must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be SCS1 and the next interface that is installed could be SCSI2 The following values are unique to the SCS interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI Icanon n NumberOfDatabaseSlots 20 FirstInputGroupNumber 1067 FirstAlarmNumber 116 The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix SCS1 PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity n StopBits 1 Xon n Xoff n UserNumberLen 3 162 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg or cas db text scs signals cfg This file contains signals that are to be ignored by the SCS interface The cas db text scs signals cfg file is the default signal configuration file This file is provided when the interface is installed as a signal configuration file is required for the interface to run successfully If only the default signal configuration file is present all of the SCS interfaces configured on the host will use the same file and all will ignore the signals specified in the file If one of the interfaces requires a specific set of signals to be ignored then the cas db text scs signals cfg file should be copied to cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg where ttyN is the port to which that copy of the interface is attached The signals to be ignored by that copy of the interface should then
91. n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected will be displayed and the input data will be checked If there were errors they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors and begin the process again If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Default Facility chosen is Stentofon 9600 Facility Woo oc depo ze ue S ad pies Inia Bing ree one RE So endo xo UEDE E S NUNDMCE S MS SoS eels tbe eS x OR we el ee End of Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion k kk Checking input group file data Checking alarm file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAD J328673 Table input_group had 12 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 12 row s loaded into it statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE input_group statement processed OK igd STN01 01 Request cctvName allegiant cctv 0 allegiant 1548 518 1548 0 alle tty2 Creating CCTV device allegiant map addition file tmp stn allegiant deltaigd STN01 01 Connect cctvName allegiant cctv 1 allegiant 1549 519 1549 1 alle tty2 igd STNO1 01 Busy cctvName allegiant cctv 1 allegiant 1550 520 1550 1 alle tty2 igd STN01 01 Disconnect
92. of the extended configuration file cas db text cstation comm tty2 cfg Copyright C 1996 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved cstation inst 1 0 06 03 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Central Station interface These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines TE cb mE Gb HE Gb Gb db db db RemoteConnAlarm 439 RemoteConnInGrp 348 The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty2 PortBaud 1200 CharacterSize 7 Parity o StopBits 2 XonXoff y ReceiverId 01 LineId 01 MaxRetries 3 RetryWait 5 83 Multiple device support issues The original design of the switcher interfaces supported only a single CCTV switcher device and allowed only one CCTV command to be sent to a switcher in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event With the introduction of enhanced switcher interfaces the design has been extended to support multiple CCTV switcher devices connected to a single Picture Perfect host system In addition any Picture Perfect alarm event can cause output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices Two utilities are provided to turn the multiple device feature on or off These are described below For compatibility with existing systems the default mode during CCTV switcher interface software installation or upgrade is single device support You must shut down and restart Picture Perfect for the ch
93. one alarm record for each input group record s that have the same device and location The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized For example if you are going to be monitoring alarm messages and the four possible status conditions for a detector you would have four input groups that could point to one alarm record The alarm record could further describe the location of the detector An example of this alarm record is shown in Figure 74 For message types that are of a fixed nature as described in the sections Fixed messages types on page 206 and Adding or modifying input groups on page 217 the description field could be filled in with information on the Notifier panel With this concept in mind only one alarm record would have to be created to handle those types The input groups for those fixed message type would all be linked to the same alarm record which may have a description like Notifier Panel 1 Bldg 7 The alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select NONE from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to ad
94. page 61 to see the messages and prompts that display when adding an alarm Follow these steps to add a CCTV alarm l At the Selection prompt type a to add a new CCTV controlled alarm A message displays to confirm a new alarm is being added Enter the Alarm Id The Alarm Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 58 Enter the Input Group Id The Input Group Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 58 Enter the Location Id The Location Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports listed on page 58 If you have only a single instance of the CCTV interface package installed then you will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number The CCTV alarm number is actually the number of a camera attached to the CCTV system that will perform the CCTV actions that you want for this event The range of numbers 0 to 511 can be used for CCTV alarm numbers or 2048 to 1 if using a Kalatel command string mapping Skip to step 6 If you have installed multiple CCTV interfaces then a list of the ports that have been configured for the CCTV devices will be displayed select the one to which this alarm is to be forwarded Enter the name of the port for example tty1 You will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number Enter the CCTV alarm number The CCTV alarm number is actually the number of a camera attached to the CCTV system that performs the CCTV actions that you want for this event The range of numbers 0 t
95. port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Firesine communication program is started 182 be r c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 60 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Firesine 4100 panel A three wire full duplex serial data link that operates at 1200 baud 8 data bits even parity and one stop bit Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any o
96. receive data to from Picture Perfect The following port settings should be configured e Baud rate e Parity e Character size e Stop bits e Xon xoff control Refer to the specific manufacturer s documentation for more information Installation of an interface for Picture Perfect involves these basic steps 1 Defining a port 2 Installing the Picture Perfect base software if necessary 3 Installing the Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs software if necessary If it is necessary to install the pprs software it should be installed and configured on the primary and backup systems prior to the interface installation 4 Installing the Picture Perfect interface software These steps are described in this chapter using a Kalatel CCTV interface as an example Because each interface differs slightly please observe the screen prompts during the installation and answer the questions appropriately Chapter 2 11 Installing and removing Defining a port Linux When you install the software driver for the Digi board the serial ports will automatically become available Refer to your Picture Perfect 4 0 Installation Manual for information about adding Digi board drivers Note Once the serial port is available do not define the port in the Picture Perfect Devices Ports window AIX The Picture Perfect serial ports used to communicate with the interface system will be configured and reserved using the IBM AIX System Managemen
97. should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated 133 Facility The sixth column is used to specify the acility idthat will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the De
98. similar to the following will display Product installation options The following Interface product s are available Name and Descriptions allegiant Burle Allegiant CCTV Interface allplex Burle Allplex CCTV Interface alphacom Stentofon AlphaCom Intercom Interface amdyn American Dynamics CCTV Interface cbas Siebe Environmental Control Interface commend Commend Intercom Interface cstation Central Station Interface est EST Fire Alarm Interface firesine Firesine Fire Alarm Interface gallo Picture Perfect Gallo Wines Import Export Interface grundig Grundig VAZ300 CCTV Interface javelin Javelin J0326HI CCTV Interface kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 CCTV Interface maxpro Maxpro MAX1000 CCTV Interface notifier Notifier Fire Alarm Interface oh_receiver Osbourne Hoffman Receiver Interface panasonic Panasonic Proteus 500 PFW Interface banasonic550 Panasonic WJ SX550A Interface Press RETURN for more pelco Pelco CM9750 CCTV Interface pelcob New Pelco CM9750 CCTV Interface ran Remote Alarm Notification System scs DMP SCS 1 Alarm Interface simplex Simplex System Interface stentofon Stentofon TouchLine Intercom Interface stentofon9600 Stentofon P 9600 Intercom Interface stentofon mch Stentofon Multiple Call Handler Intercom Interface ucs ADT Universal Communication Server Interface univ intr Universal Intrusion Interface viper Vicon Viper VPS13xx Interface o 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 O GO Reno o
99. software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Stentofon Intercom gt x c x 319 Software requirements The software requirements for the Stentofon interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 interface stent ofon9600 package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 interface stent o on9600 package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone System If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Stentofon Intercom system provided by the manufacturer including e Black Box Converter RS 422 to RS 232 Note Refer to the Stentofon Technical Documentation included with the Security Software Package 64401 for instruction
100. specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 126 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored A Alarm Message T Trouble Message R Restore Message B Force Arm Message W Fault Message Account The account number is a five digit string with a range of 00000 99999 Loop The loop number is a three digit string with a range of 000 999 Loop Type The loop type is a two character alpha numeric string that corresponds to an SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 interpreted as follows 0 BL BLANK 1 FA FIRE 2 BA BURGLARY 3 SU SUPERVISORY 4 HU PANIC 5 EM EMERGENCY 6 A1 AUXILIARY 1 7 A2 AUXILIARY 2 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe mor
101. splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 54 Figure 54 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F On Uu PB UM Ww HG Splitter Port DB25M o U 5 UM Ww HG Figure 55 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter Figure 56 To Redundant Host DB25F To Primary Host DB25F DB9M To Firepanel DB25M DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface o 2 WART QA 530113002B 169 170 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Configuration The EST interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line These messages types and formats used by the EST interface are discussed in the following section These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system Alarms recognized by the EST interface The particular alarms that have been predefined into the EST interface are as follows 0 FIRE ALARM SUPERVISORY SHORT 2 SUPERVISORY OPEN 4 RESTORE Fire Alarm Supervisory Short or Open The where is the alarm type is always located at the beginning of an alarm line that is retrieved f
102. stentofon redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved stentofon redundant cfg 1 5 7 6 01 This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON TOUCHLINE INTERCOM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines THeocHk cb od db d db db HHH d RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backup1 316 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and restore The Stentofon interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 20 Stentofon Interface Data Files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Stentofon software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Stentofon interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 20 Stentofon Interface Data Files Data File Name Description cas db text stn_ cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text stentofon redundant cfg Stentofon redundant configurati
103. that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting The following values are unique to the SIMPLEX interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines HHEH Hb dk db GE db GE b db Hb db db HH HH db db db HH ResetConnAlarm 92 ResetConnInGrp 120 PositionTimeAlarm 3 PositionAmPmAlarm 12 PositionMonthAlarm 23 PositionYearAlarm 27 PositionDateAlarm 20 286 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 1200 cas db text simplex redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Simplex redundant configuration file cas db text simplex redundant cfg t simplex redundant cfg 1 4 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved simplex inst 1 5 06 10 03 This file contains the configuration information for the SIMPLEX SYSTEM interface for redundant operations These v
104. the interface can look for matches in the database using the input group description field These rules will vary depending on the message type to be monitored Message types that have device and or status variability are as follows e Alarm e Trouble e Zone Disable e System Trouble e Annunciator Trouble e Walk Test e Module Activation e Supervisory Activation Message types that do not have a device type or status are considered fixed messages and will have a simpler set of rules for setting up the input group A complete list of the fixed message types that the Notifier panel will recognize is listed in Fixed messages types on page 206 The following message types are considered fixed message types e All Systems Normal e Signal Silence e System Reset e System Test Lamp Test e Block Acknowledge It is crucial to understand the format for each message type when setting up an input group since this is the key to monitoring messages from the Notifier panel The input group description field is limited to 60 characters which will be fully used in many cases to uniquely identify a specific message type and status for a particular device Each message type will always use the input group prefix as the first part of the description See Input group prefix on page 206 for more information If you are going to add a number of input group records for the Notifier interface it is suggested that you use the n rgen data generator tool
105. the Stentofon input group to which it will be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example one alarm per paging station but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The alarm description field has no restrictions other than a maximum length of 60 characters or required format since all of the unique information for an Exchange protocol message is located in the input group description However each alarm description in the database must be unique The recommended format for alarm descriptions is to identify the paging station and the type of action that occurred For the example input group descriptions given previously the corresponding alarm descriptions might be as follows Station FFF7 Request Station FFF7 Connect Station FFF7 Disconnect An example of a valid alarm record is shown in Figure 118 Sample alarm screen on page 308 Alternatively a single alarm could be defined for all three actions as follows Paging Station FFF7 The Alarm Routing should be set to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist 308 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Onl
106. the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that nfrgen checks before any data is generated FACILITY The fourth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the n rgen program you will be prompted to select a Default Notifier Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in 205 the input file then the Default Notifier Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SOL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file ALARM PRIORITY The fifth column is optional and contains the priority of the alarm record that will be created for the Alarm Description field It is an integer value in the range 1 500 If this field is not present the default alarm priority specified during the running of n rgen will be used Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 0 system 4 0 A SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 10 T SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 W SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 A SMOK
107. the entries reserved for dynamically generated alarms Note Any input group and its associated alarm using the input group prefix targeted for un installation that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed This means it will be permanently lost if it s data was not originally part of the input file To avoid this situation for any input groups and associated alarms created manually a corresponding entry should be added to the input file so that ALL of the SCS data may be automatically recreated at a later date 2 Change or add the message types in the original input file Records added manually should have been added to the file by the person who created them See note on page 124 3 Invoke scsgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records scsgen removal This portion of scsgen removes the database records associated with a specific DMP SCS 1 interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note It is a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the scsgen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Identifying the input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 3 to 4 characters will be removed from the database except for the entries reserved for dynamically gener
108. the following files cas db text cbas ttyN cfg cas db text cbas redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text cbas ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the CBAS device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The CBAS interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a CBAS device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text cbas ttyb5 cfg cbas_tty5 cfg Copyright C 1996 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script cbas inst 1 5 05 28 03 This file contains the configuration information for the CBAS Alarm Interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to
109. the input group and alarm definitions will be added dynamically to the Picture Perfect database as needed by the interface software Advanced configuration CCTV systems support an extended configuration that allows you to alter their behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text package comm lt ttyN gt cfg file where package is the prefix of the interface package as specified in Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 and t tyN is the name of the tty port specified for the interface The extended configuration information for the video loss interface is kept in the cas db text package video loss ttyM ctg file where package is the prefix of the interface package and ttyM is the name of the tty port specified for the video loss interface These files consist of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change these files unless absolutely necessary If you need to change these files you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance 67 68 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The following is a sample extended configuration file ktd_comm_tty4 cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1996 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved This file contains the configuration information for the KALATEL CCTV interface via a KTD 312 Computer
110. the notifier XX cfg configuration file Actual device testing should be performed for those devices that are going to be monitored If the Walk Test messages are being monitored for each device then a Walk Test could be performed to test the devices without actually triggering an actual alarm condition If there is a printer hooked up to the Notifier panel then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 230 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Advanced configuration The Notifier interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text notifier ttyN cfg cas db text notifier redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text notifier ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Notifier device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Notifier interface reads t
111. then diagnostics Should be turned on on the PP host and the smx MMDD log file checked to see what is being expected versus the actual reality of what is being transmitted from the EST If it should be 8 and 12 then this configuration file should be updated and the interface re started to enable it to read and use the new values The following values are unique to the EST interface Do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI StdAlarmLF 4 FireAlarmLF 6 Icanon y The following values are set up based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix ESTO1 PortName dev tty2 PortBaud 1200 CharacterSize 8 Parity e StopBits 1 Xon n Xoff n 178 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix G Configuring a Firesine interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Firesine interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the firepanel and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix DOOM a ik Claw show ais blade ata pisei Eius 180 SOtWr Fegutvemenig coce ra aE deben ae als 181 Hardware reguirements casice ciertoa esu ede Sea Parra 181 COn EPAD cooler cepere eiu Ide GEHE ds 185 Advanced Cam SUFIDE icu Rie Rebel et e See 191 180 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Firesine interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system
112. then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Make sure the Alarm Description does not match an existing alarm record This is an illegal condition that nf rgen checks before any data is generated Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the nf rgen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Notifier interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established during installation of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Notifier interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the nf rgen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text notifier XXX cfg file where XXX is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by
113. to automatically generate AlphaCom alarms in response to Picture Perfect alarms for Picture Perfect alarms that have been mapped to the AlphaCom alarms The AlphaCom Exchange alarm will initiate an action such as a pre recorded audio message The interface between the Stentofon Alphacom Exchange and Picture Perfect is bi directional with the option to configure the AlphaCom interface to resend messages if communication is lost Commend The Commend interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Commend Intercom System and recognizes only the pre defined intercom message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the Commend Intercom System to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection with XON XOFF enabled ACK NAKs will also be transmitted between the systems No handshaking is required for the interface Stentofon Stentofon MCH The Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Touchline Intercom System Exchange Models 52 8 and 120 12 and recognizes only the predefined intercom messages built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the Stentofon Intercom System to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection An additional Stentofon interface the Stentofon_MCH that is designed to sup
114. to bring up Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen Figure 66 shows a sample list of alarms their location and the date and time of occurrence Figure 66 The alarm monitor screen ill a E x ey New Alarms 5 Total Alarms 5 Display is now active Highest Priority 25 01 Alarm Description Location O2 GENERATOR OVERHEATING FIRESINE FIRESINE RESET I T 12 50 35 FIRESINE DN 101 FIRESINE A001 ALERT Pre ALARM 12 49 33 FIRESINE DN 201 FIRESINE D002 FAULT 12 50 55 FIRESINE DN 101 FIRESINE F001 FIRE 12 51 50 FIRESINE DN 201 FIRESINE F002 ALERT 01 06 2005 12 52 48 Refer to the Picture Perfect User Manual for more information on monitoring and responding to alarms 191 Advanced configuration The Firesine system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text firesine cfg file This file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Firesine interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change this file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is a sample firesine cfg file THE ck od db o GE db b Hb db Hb GE db GE b b Hb de db H To
115. to inform the system of these changes y n yl If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system is running select y if you want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty5 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Adding or modifying input groups for the 3 possible message types for each paging station to be monitored Adding or modifying alarms Adding or modifying output groups and outputs if desired Monitoring alarms 305 Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description is the key to identifying specific Stentofon Touchline Exchange protocol messages The format of the description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the Exchange for each paging station as identified in the Exchange protocol as described in Message types on page 311 The following is the structure of an input group record description lt IGP gt lt PagingStation gt
116. to turn on or off Before this can happen Picture Perfect must be informed of which alarms should be sent to the CCTV system and how that Picture Perfect alarm is mapped to a CCTV system alarm number Picture Perfect treats alarms as a collection of information which includes Input group e Areas Host number The CCTV system distinguishes alarms by a unique three digit identifier per alarm location and condition Once you have set up the alarms on Picture Perfect you will need to set up the mapping of alarms to the CCTV system This procedure is accomplished by executing a script which requires operator input Note There is a one way communication between the Picture Perfect system and the CCTV switcher regarding alarms Alarms will only be sent from Picture Perfect to the CCTV switcher There will be no alarms sent from the CCTV controller to the Picture Perfect system The CCTV system will not send Video Loss or Sync Loss alarms back to Picture Perfect A successful system configuration of a CCTV interface for Picture Perfect involves the following steps e Defining input groups on page 56 e Identifying location types on page 57 e Using SQL reports on page 58 e Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 e Configuring and monitoring alarms in Picture Perfect on page 67 Defining input groups In the Picture Perfect system there are many possible sources of alarms The fundamental concept is that alarms are triggered through in
117. unique combination that is going to be monitored The format of a data record is as follows Station CommActivity AlarmDesc Facility cC TVDeviceName CCTVNumber Port Station This is the 4 character pager station identification number lt CommActivity gt This is the type of communication activity Request Connect Disconnect as described in Message types on page 311 lt AlarmDesc gt This is the unique alarm message text to be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen and or logged to the history file lt Facility gt This id of the facility that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the stngen program you will be prompted to select a default Stentofon facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a facility value is not specified in the input file then the default Stentofon facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file CCTVDeviceName CCTVNumber and Port fields These fields are optional but if present identify a CCTV switcher which camera is to be controlled when the alarm occurs and which port CCTVDeviceName Valid values for the field are defined in column 1 of Table 19 Supported CCTV sw
118. which is capable of quickly producing input group and associated alarm records automatically given a formatted input file See the section entitled Using nfrgen on page 201 for more information on using this tool The input group prefix used in any of the listed message types must match the one established in the appropriate configuration file See Input group prefix on page 206 for more information When establishing an input group record the description field must follow the format for the appropriate message type Exactly one space must be used between the columns for each of the message types described in the following sections For messages types that have a DEV TYPE column the spacing within the column must be the same as is listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 228 218 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Note Be aware that input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the nfrgen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Database records added manually using Picture Perfect should be added to a nfrgen input file so they may later be recreated if necessary in the event nfrgen uninstall option is used Alarm Message Type To recognize Alarm Message types use the following format in the input group description IGP STATUS DEV TYPE lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS is one of
119. with the Commend interface This value will be used whencreating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Commend Facility Is this ok y n yl 12 Entera y toconfirm oran n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a v the facility you selected and its id will be displayed and the script will proceed to check the input data If there are errors with the input data they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors then re run the cmdgen script again to process the corrected input file 105 If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Default Facility chosen is Commend Facility id 35 LI AP ccr P olio End of Default Commend Facility assignment portion k k kk Checking input group file data Checking alarm file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc m 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAD J328673 Table input group had 11 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 11 row s loaded into it Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE inp
120. with the last character s numeric For example CMD0O7 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was CMDO1 Is this correct y n y Entera y toconfirmoran n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the Commend interface k k k k Default Commend Facility assignment portion k k k k When the input_group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input_group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Commend input_groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y to exit the scriptoran n to en
121. you must consult the Notifier panel or printer for the system trouble index and description of the system trouble For example to configure for System Trouble messages for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 TROUBL SYSTEM TROUBLE NFR1 ACK TB SYSTEM TROUBLE NFR1 CLR TB SYSTEM TROUBLE NFR1 ACL TB SYSTEM TROUBLE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Annunciator Trouble Message Type To recognize Annunciator Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt STATUS gt lt ANNUNCIATOR gt lt XX gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS can be one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB or ACL TB e ANNUNCIATOR is a fixed field e XX is the two digit annunciator number 01 32 For numbers less than ten add a leading zero Note When monitoring this message type you must consult the Notifier panel for the Annunciator Trouble index 220 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual For example to configure annunciator number 25 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 TROUBL ANNUNCIATOR 25 NFR1 ACK TB ANNUNCIATOR 25 NFR1 CLR TB ANNUNCIATOR 25 NFR1 ACL TB ANNUNCIATOR 25 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 whi
122. 0 digits 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type Column one is always v for variable length messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Msg Type Column three is used to specify the type of custom text There are currently no types defined It is a two character field with a range of 01 99 Msg Text Column four is used to specify up to the first 16 characters of the custom text It is a one to sixteen character field with a range of 0 9 A Z etc Alarm Desc Column five is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input field data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facili
123. 0 is used by the console if itis an ASCII terminal If a graphical console is present one of the serial ports may also be used for the interface if available The interface line will be connected to a multiport adapter which must be installed and connected to the RISC System 6000 in order to appear on this list Since your system may have one or more multiport adapters sa2 sa3 sa4 etc select the one you will be using for this communication line 5 Select the parent adapter and press Enter Figure 3 displays next Figure 3 AddaTTY screen Add a TTY ct values in entry fields g all desir Entry Fields tty 29 PI synchronous Terminal disable 3600 STTY attributes for RUN time MORE 14 F3 Cancel F Edit Enter Do 6 Move the cursor to the PORT Number field a Press to display the list of ports The ports are numbered sequentially and should be labeled on the RS 232 connector b Highlight the port to which the interface line will be connected c Press and the port you selected should be displayed in the PORT Number field Chapter 2 13 Installing and removing 7 Verify the parameters have the values you configured on the interface device s port for example BAUD rate 1200 PARITY none BITS per character 8 Number of STOP BITS 1 XON XOFF FLOW CONTROL none If the parameters are not correct move the cursor by using the up and down arrow keys and change the entry by typing over the exist
124. 0 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying an alarm If you want to see a unique Picture Perfect alarm displayed for each Firesine alarm define a separate alarm for each Firesine alarm and assign it to a corresponding input group You must define an alarm and input group for every point that is detected by the Firesine system When alarms and resets are received they are transmitted to the Picture Perfect system for processing Each alarm will be routed to the Alarm Monitor and History Alarms are handled as logical alarms so they can be responded to and removed without being physically reset The description field of the Alarms screen simply displays to the Picture Perfect system that a Firesine alarm has been triggered and identifies the priority of the alarm The description can be anything that is meaningful Follow these steps to add a Firesine alarm 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form Make sure that e Alarm Routing is set for at least Monitor but preferably Monitor AND History Online Inhibit Schedule Changes and Immediate Reset Input is set to Yes Reset Outputs is set to Auto Reset Outputs so the alarm can be removed from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor without being reset 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 65 The alarms screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors Al
125. 01 09 09 Main Water Flow Located in Room 012 M Xckkckckckckckck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck kck kck ck kok ck ko kk 11 24 1993 09 09 46 SUPERVISORY SHORT 0303 09 09 Remote Drill Switch A Ck ck ckckck ck ck ck ck ck ke ke kk kk kc kckckckckckckckckckckckckck kc kok kk kk 11 24 1993 09 09 53 Supervised Short Restored 0303 09 09 Remote Drill Switch 171 Using Picture Perfect to configure the EST interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Add or modify input groups 2 Add or modify alarms 3 Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired 4 Monitor alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific EST panel messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type The panel device id field described in the section Alarms recognized by the EST interface on page 170 must be entered in the description field One unique panel device id per input group record will be required It is the panel device field in combination with the Input Group Prefix discussed in the following section that the EST interface will look up in the input group along with the associated alarm to determine if the alarm should be sent to Picture Perfect This combination id must be the first item entered in the description field Other inf
126. 18 03 This file contains the configuration information for the NOTIFIER FIRE ALARM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backup1 231 232 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and restore The Notifier interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 14 Notifier interface data files on page 232 Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Notifier software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Notifier interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 14 Notifier interface data files Data File Name Description cas db text notifier cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text notifier redundant cfg Notifier redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix Configuring an OH Rec
127. 48 Stand alone Systetm csse eL Dose te ext QU tarda Owe dado pod dd tem NEM ME RN 348 Red rndant systemic ts ea er IU EU MLLUUPC PPM Edda d d e P AP 349 Hardware requiremefits siisieisc cited sidan expe EI nre xe eme bir irre imePIge EE URP EDU dies 349 Stand alone Systeme se aiibiihietiip42liei de 4e bbb n MERKEN PER eene Vy ec ERI 349 Redundatit systetric ever ees eevtor E eere REPE EEKAN bed LI Te RARE E P Ee 350 Configuration 4222050 n y hike err E REENTROERDRURUN RI RK RIE E Rada Ra eI REPEAT SPA EE Rex 353 Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface lssssiisssesse esses 353 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Universal Intrusion interface 0 6 ccc cece eee eee 354 Extended configuration 5 5 haere a RR ERR ARRIERE E EE ORIS ED RUE RUE UAE 359 cas db text niv intr ttyN Gefoor eerie o er Ele E PE b bb Ye e Rn E PEE DO ERE RR eds 359 cas db text univ_intr redundant cfg sisissssssssssssssssssssssssss e eee 362 Interface data file backup and restore cece ccc cence nee e enhn 362 xi xii Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figures gure 1 gure 2 ure 3 ure 4 ure 5 ure 6 ure 7 ure 8 ure 9 cmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmm Q Q Q Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41
128. 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string R RST Force Arm B Message Type To recognize System Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE is atwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string B FRA Fault W Message Type To recognize Fault message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt LOOP NUMBER gt lt LOOP TYPE gt lt STATUS gt 151 where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE is the two character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as O BL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 STATUS isa three character string W FLT s System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message Type To recognize s System Alarm Trouble Supervisory message types use the following format in the input g
129. 5 bi nadia btbh b eU Ub UHR Pb BM M eee bel UPPER UESVERHEREN ER 291 Gorifiguration 25 oic e p RE e Er reve xr ree PRTEERER E P Vets POMPE YR 293 WSING SUAGE Mink sso ehe eR RR E EIE bbbbedeerptirkbbe Mn gut dle water aet t dat pe RENTA 293 singen uninstall 5x tt rns eanan quip pasrarimmmee eee ale slaty dy SE d dde d RN ERE EEKEUE 302 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface 00 cece cence ences 304 Testing tHe Interface us nee S ee pv oou UD TERRARUM d blond Bode etes dein 311 Messuge types erreri terior i ea Canine a be voe velie e bx hib Ve ee ne Ves e Fev e RR rey 311 Extended Configuration 55 ce ener re epe hebetes e erre ER a regne Faience hin 314 Icas db text Stti tty NIE fQ sse tende 4 re E Re reed eT erc Uy rbd Census eame be SEEEN 314 cas db text stentofon r dundantctg oo eooip er Y pr pde uae mee EEEO ORE Rud 315 Interface data file backup and restore eee eee eee e eee nee eee eee nen 316 Appendix N Appendix O Configuring a Stentofon 9600 interface cece cece ee eee eee eee 317 Introduction o ob ERES Y RERO les amens ue CVRENERESTRRERUDR NRDREE PLC REUVERE HEAT TERRE ERRARE 318 Redundant systems ines Gis e e abeo c e ree HR VR RERRLLEMEROOC RR LOL de ET Ide 318 Software requireiients 4 oe Lor cage ced detuned x HEREPRCPERUERERU NR RE NL ee e Ree ees 319 Stand alotie Systeti c sss RERUM e mca aa Settee epi E dde ri ODDS UU UE 319 Red n
130. Actual device testing should be performed for those devices that are going to be monitored If there is a printer hooked up to the DMP SCS 1 receiver then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call GE Security Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 160 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Advanced configuration The DMP SCS 1 interface software supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text scs ttyN cfg cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg or cas db text scs signals cfg cas db text scs redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the tty port specified for the interface cas db text scs ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the DMP SCS 1 device attached to the ttyN port Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following
131. BAS system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Siebe Environmental Control Interface cbas package gt x E x 253 Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Siebe Environmental Control Interface cbas package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Facility Integrator system provided by Siebe CBAS Refer to your CBAS manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of t
132. Com 1 RemoteConnInGrp1 AlphaComNodeNum1 MyDevicelId1 PortNamel PortBaud1l AlphaCom 2 RemoteConnInGrp2 AlphaComNodeNum2 MyDeviceId2 PortName2 PortBaud2 AlphaCom 3 RemoteConnInGrp3 AlphaComNodeNum3 MyDeviceId3 PortName3 PortBaud3 AlphaCom 4 RemoteConnInGrp4 293 tmp SANbe pipe alphacomm comm 100 e B orbe set up based on your 1 1 10 dev tty1 9600 1 2 14 dev tty4 9600 1 10 12 dev tty2 9600 41 42 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual AlphaComNodeNum4 20 MyDeviceld4 13 PortName4 dev tty3 PortBaud4 9600 NumOfAlphaCom 4 Single device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support the sending of commands to only one output device in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event usethe msan set single utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note that if multiple output devices are installed and Picture Perfect is configured for single device support a command will be sent to only one of the installed output devices in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event You may wish to configure the system in this manner if each alarm event is to be routed to only one output and your require maximum interface performance A slight performance gain occurs since the output device mapping tables do not need to be searched for all matching entries As soon as the first match is found the search terminates To change the Pi
133. Database Recovery on the backup host prior to starting redundant Picture Perfect on the backup host Refer to the Picture Perfect 4 0 Redundant Edition User Manual for details Chapter 2 21 Installing and removing Removal The removal script will automatically detect whether or not you are running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment If you are running in a redundant environment additional messages will appear during the removal process Note Picture Perfect must be stopped prior to package removal If running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment Picture Perfect on the redundant host must also be stopped prior to package removal Follow these steps to remove the Picture Perfect Interface Server package 1 2 Log in to the system as root and open a terminal window Type cd Start the removal program by typing ppr Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Picture Perfect Package Removal custom pp bin ppr 2 0 02 12 03 Copyright C 1992 2003 GE Interlogix Inc WARNING THIS PROGRAM WILL COMPLETELY REMOVE PICTURE PERFECT PACKAGES AND ANY DATABASES USED BY THE PACKAGE SELECTING base OR all WILL REMOVE PICTURE PERFECT ENTIRELY ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO PROCEED Type yes and press the lt Enter gt key to proceed To continue type yes If you entered yes a list of the Picture Perfect packages currently installed will be displayed You will then be asked which package you would li
134. Datal gt _ lt Data2 gt _ lt Data3 gt _ lt CR gt lt LF gt lt Station gt This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of Os lt DataN gt Information that is not important to the Stentofon interface This message type defines a pager request to connect to the Stentofon Intercom System master exchange from a remote location Message Type 0304 Local Call Connect The following is the structure of a Type 0304 message line Sync 0304 Call Handler gt _ lt Station gt _ lt CR gt lt LF gt Call Handler This is the 4 character Stentofon call handler accepting the local call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s Station This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of Os This message type defines a successful connection of the local pager to the Stentofon Intercom System Note that many type 0307 messages for a station can occur before the connection is established However once the connection is established no further requests will be honored until the pager station has been disconnected 313 Message Type 0504 Remote Call Connect The following is the structure of a Type 0504 message line Sync 0504 Call Handler Station Datal Data2 CR LF Call Handler Th
135. DeN CU E RE RI QU REP Neb E Ede rM URP RET 281 Reset message iisseses c ee hue pue opd tei she Meese resin e qase ele P RU acea ERR de eR RR HUE 281 Adding or modifying an input group isssssssssssssssssssssss se e e ese en 281 Adding or modifying an alarm 2 0 0 6 cece te nen e e e e eee 282 Monitoring dlartris asi ior tette p bode teret eet bd etel opes ea el praet 284 Extended configuration 2 2 eese slice o er vere e a a ave erra y rv IP Ir E ve 285 Icas db text simiplexcfg vus ebtertbr re KARAS eo P P DI DU RAR EEE DR meee 285 cas db text simplex redundant cfg isssssssssssssssssssssssse e e ens 286 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece eee eee e nee ene hh nen 286 Configuring a Stentofon Touchline interface ccc cee eee ee ees 287 INTFODUCHON nods scccgasitiendedeaGadethagnsa EDRCCU RR ULRUKP I engine Th RR e reo e TR e ere 288 Redundant SYSTEMS sresti ri ecc oos pet bpeber e ana NE PON OP OVI dd MIN ESSE NN NES 288 Software requiremerits 1 4 5 b Php Rey REGERE TREE KEIN RUE RE RR R ORTU ER AG UU RR 289 Stand alone system ireeretitrbadee t DUM Pee vea E PETI O OO E Edere Adr rrr 289 Redundant SVSEeIm 2 hci ae ou Sendai ua P ODDNNNRNEEOUN SE TO SM D UP NENNEN END DUDDES 289 Hardware requirements zone rer Re pEREITG xe perte VIRA OA HIR Dac ebV eee e nd 289 Stand alone System zu sua a sete pondo OR Perd Decade tdg uve rade eot e hdd DE ed iM aas 289 Redu rdarntsystetri q 52
136. E ION 104 BLDG 3 ROOM 8 LABORATORY 25 T SMOKE ION 104 BLDG 3 ROOM 8 LABORATORY W SMOKE ION 104 BLDG 3 ROOM 8 LABORATORY Z FORWARD ZONE Z001 BLDG 3 ROOMS 1 8 45 N 01 SECURITY STATION LOBBY 1 The first six data lines after the Picture Perfect version line define several alarm and trouble message types to be monitored for some smoke detectors The last two lines describe a zone disable and annunciator message type An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section Input group and alarm records generated by nfrgen on page 207 Input file recommendations Setting up the input file requires knowledge of the system that is going to be monitored There are numerous message types that can be monitored for a device Making the monitoring decisions seems complicated but careful use and understanding of the input file will result in ease of use and maintenance The following recommendations should help in setting up the input file It is recommended that the same Alarm Description be used across different message types where the device type and LDD combinations are the same This is shown in the example input file in the previous section Note Since the same alarm description is used in the example input file for different message types they are all using the same alarm record As a result only the first occurrence of the alarm priority need be included as the
137. E EE RI Ep epe ed 170 Alarms recognized by the EST interface 2 0 ccc nnn ee een 170 Using Picture Perfect to configure the EST interface 0 cece cece cence nee esee 171 ACGING ONMINDUEQFOUD s omeosci due eee ee E anna ERR I RARE ER ceddakesae bance 171 Modifying an input group se enenesonser i cr settee nx ERE RE P ke rec RRHRHPeUUDEODHEEIP DU EEG Rd 173 Adding or modifying an alarm n a esnan ccc enn e e e e een 173 Adding or modifying output groups and outputs 20 cence een 175 EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor 0 00 cece cece cence bene ence eens 176 Advanced configuration seres encre here sere edie menm rera e eb xr Rr Bate EE ave Oe OEE eRe te ete are 176 Configuring a Firesine interface cece eee cece cette eens 179 IntrodUctioni ssvssv orte reo detub deep ER EEUU RERCOORURC Ed tad sa TA d ne VR canted 180 Red ndatitsystetms i e eh v Ce Eco Ud FD Hei MIS onn IN d DESEE NE 180 Software requirements ssn cernar mer e ERREUR RR Re CE dade ahead atedese AFER DR ARES 181 Starnid alone systetrmi 35 2 2 a aceon er ena IPHOO eT REGE NI END Ere eens P PU eid dees Nudus 181 Redundatit systetricu eoe oo T ep LebU RE RN PODES aead UPC panni dea a S A 181 Hardware requirements 2 nee rex eR ER EUEOLPERA de RS PH DET PE I N E UE be ands EE 181 Standsalornie Systelri eei rures remo OIqdqem equ RIA ER UMP IDPSEN DERE DU ME 181 Redundaiit system i1 soon toate bh ernn i ERE e edpse yep pU EU
138. ER RR 182 tee ien 185 Firesiriemessage SIP Cctdl 8 css ree ai Mattel KEY Y EE A odes 185 Picture perfect input group description ssssssssssssssssssssss e 186 Adding or modifying dn Input group 22 suuses see esencis e tex exem eee cored eda IS T RR REC Rhee 186 Adding or modifying an alarm 0 0 cece nen nen e e e nen 188 Monitoring ald MS cre ereppr ss pre habete ee ERRERRHAPPERRARE REM ARRA RR ENODUREERA DEL 190 Advanced configuration ii cc cesse cesses rer terr rt hmmeret eer rrr mehr mec bme des x en 191 vii viii Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix H Appendix I Configuring a Notifier interface ccc cee cece eee eee eee eeenees 193 Introduction ones x te ESSE ROO ERE ER OVE PERRA A eas REDE Reroute mamas 194 Redundant systems iis rerai iiag e rs eter VEI REY ERE ee ek dae Maas ad ei Saat 194 Software requiremerits 2 52 seas decide re er Ete Ee ORA OP ERU ROCA EG S e AIRE trie e e Pob eR a o eas 195 Stand alone systems ds ure Ret et aoia ea EA AES ded eobbadiddnr ees eate re LOS Redundant systetmi 2s ss ge ces ov vv tts iss Hber te das asus Mobi DI g ars mU Hardware requirements iia sce os err urne RE sada aad eren REY IO ION ERREUR RU ER NUR die 196 Stand alone System isssvusceoiti tee eee eei be iba TarAAP E TERER CER TR ERR 196 Red rndantSystetriu uiis ccre aseo bb RIDE Dessen TERM A Re REID C CPC td ERR TEENS 198 Configurations ossi 405 34nd pr bea E E URD
139. I or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Simplex communication program is started e A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 105 Figure 105 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F On Un PB UM Ww HG Splitter Port DB25M o U 5 UM Nw HG e Cable to connect the splitter master port to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 106 Figure 106 Cable pinouts splitter to switcher DB25M to DB9M Splitter Master Port DB25M Tx Rx CTS SGND DCD DSR DTR 20 Oc ON OW PY Switcher DB9M FN OW n Rx Tx RTS SGND CTS 279 280 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 107 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter To Primary Host DB25F DB9M To Firepanel Q To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 108 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface Configuration Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex fire and other life safety alarms The Picture Perfect Simplex Interface processes only Alarm and System Reset Complete messages from the
140. ICROl1ila 2 1 9 7 8 12 13 3 MICRO2i1a 3 2 2 9 ex zu Jr From the output you see that in the definition of the third micro the badge history overflow input group was improperly defined as it had a value of 1 Record ID numbers must be greater than zero This problem should be corrected by following the procedures to define or update micro records in the database as described in the Picture Perfect User Manual Note The alarm history overflow input group was also not properly defined and must be corrected The CSTATION Micros report can be used to provide information to populate the accounts table The third column of the report MICRO ID identifies the Micro ID values for which corresponding Central Station account numbers should be defined There should be an entry in the accounts table for every Micro ID value listed in the report Suppose that when looking at the micros report all of the Input Group ID numbers as indicated by the fields whose label ends with INGRP were properly defined This indicates that one or more of the input groups does not have an alarm defined To determine which input group has the problem do the following 3 Runthe CSTATION Alarms report The following report is displayed CSTATION Alarms INPUT GROUP ID NPUT GROUP DESC ALARM ID 1 DOOR HELD OPEN 1 2 DOOR FORCED OPEN 2 3 NVALID BADGE 3 4 LOST BADGE 4 5 SUSPENDED BADGE 5 6 UNKNOWN BADGE 6 7 HOST TO MICRO COMM FAIL 7 8 BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW 8 9 DOWNS
141. IT utility appears in a list similar to the following dev tty10 dev tty11 dev tty12 For Linux A list similar to the following displays dev ttyD001 dev ttyD002 dev ttyD003 The following prompt displays Please select a tty port Enter a port from the list exactly as it appears for example For RS 6000 dev tty10 For Linux dev ttyD001 If you entered a valid tty port from the list the following message will appear Please enter the baud rate for the selected port 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 1200 If you entered a tty port that is not in the list displayed you will be asked to re enter the tty port Enter the baud rate of the interface console port The selected baud displays and you will be asked to confirm the setting Selected baud rate is 9600 Is this baud rate correct y n y Press or y to accept or press n to change the number If you selected n you will be asked to re enter the baud rate If you selected y messages similar to the following will appear 18 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Installing CCTV SQL Reports Loaded report CCTV Alarms Loaded report CCTV Areas Loaded report CCTV Doors Loaded report CCTV Hosts Loaded report CCTV Inputs Loaded report CCTV Micros CommFailure Loaded report CCTV Micros Overflow Loaded report CCTV Micros ReaderFailure Loaded report CCTV Readers Installing on a Redundant syste
142. Input Group Prefix the 7 character id and a user defined alarm description Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Firesine panel Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Messages or alarms recognized by the firepanel interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant systems The Firesine interface to Picture Perfect also supports operations in a Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs environment where two hosts connect to a single Firesine system Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Firesine system This allows the physical connection of the Firesine system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Firesine system interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarm and forwards it to the Alarm Monitor Normal pprs processing will result in the alarm appearing on the backup host s Alarm Monitor Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determi
143. Input Group State Disabled o Enabled Open Condition o Ignored Detected Boolean Type OR Any AND All Short Condition i Ignored o Individual Detected Broadcast State Changes o No Sce Alarm Delay Time Q Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm Each notifier input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Notifier interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Notifier input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up
144. Input Groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events LU ipti Or lescription L Q amp x a x B 4 a Se 2 Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description STNO3 FFF1 Connect Facility GLOBAL nim Ls Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition O OR Any AND All amp Individual Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Station 01 Connect GLOB amp Delay Time 9 iz Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying alarms Each Stentofon 9600 input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded in Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has be
145. Intercom System master exchange from a local location Message Type B Connect Busy This message type defines a connection of the local substation to the Stentofon 9600 Intercom system Note that many type B messages for a station can occur before the connection is established However once the connection is established no further requests will be honored until the intercom station has been disconnected Message TypeC Disconnect This message type defines disconnection of a pager from the Stentofon 9600 Intercom System 343 Extended configuration The Stentofon 9600 interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text stn9600 ttyN cfg cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text stn9600 ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Stentofon 9600 device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Lines beginning with a number sign are comments The Stentofon 9600 interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text edit
146. MONITOR TRBLS PEND NON ALM MON GENERAL PEND MON NORM CLD CMX CONTROL MON PULL STA CMX FORM C MONITOR PAGE SPEAKER 229 Table 13 Device Types continued Detectors Monitor Modules Control Modules Zones 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 123456789012 NON ALARM N ALARM EVC N ALARM N ALRM FORC N WATER FLW N TRBL FORC G G G G G G N WAT FORC GN SPSU FORC TROUBLE TROUBLE FORC PAGE FORMC MANUAL Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface If the fixed message types see page 206 have been installed the simplest way to begin testing is to generate some messages from the Notifier panel by clicking the Signal Silence System Reset System Test or Lamp Test buttons on the panel The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groupssection of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group Prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in
147. Msg Type Account User Area Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 2 digits 1 to 60 characters 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits 0 C orb 0 999 0 99 1 or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce O Disarmed C Armed L Late to Arm Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Area The area number is a two digit string with a range of 00 99 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the a
148. P TEST TYPE is one of two fixed fields LAMP TEST ACTIVATED or LAMP TEST COMPLETE For example to configure for the two Lamp Test messages you would configure the following input group descriptions NFR1 LAMP TEST ACTIVATED NFR1 LAMP TEST COMPLETE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation 223 Block Acknowledge To recognize Block Acknowledge messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE is a fixed field For example NFR1 BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Alarm Silenced To recognize the Alarm Silenced messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ALARM SILENCED gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e ALARM SILENCED isa fixed field For example NFR1 ALARM SILENCED The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Acknowledge To recognize the Acknowledge messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACKNOWLEDGE gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e ACKNOWLEDGE is a fixed field For example NFR1 ACKNOWLEDGE The above example assumes you are using an input group
149. Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect EST firepanel interface est package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package Picture Perfect EST firepanel interface est package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e EST panel with available printer port connection provided by the manufacturer e Serial line cable to connect to the Picture Perfect system This cable should be a standard RS 232 serial cable that would normally work with a serial printer connected to the EST panel e Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any seria
150. Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Notifier interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section Input group prefix on page 206 for more information If in a redundant Picture Perfect environment ensure you are on the current primary host or if the system is down the host that will be started as primary when the system is brought back up Follow these steps to use the nfrgen tool to install database records 1 2 3 Log in as root Change to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct path environment variable that will give you access to the nfrgen tool and the database tools it uses Type nfrgen The following message appears on the screen Notifier Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name panel inp Is this correct y n yl To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Enter Enter n to change the name 210 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface
151. S ra Priority j 50 1 Route Definition uim V Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY EA j No i Yes iit Schedule Changes No Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Color Picker Color Picker J Color Sample Background Foreground Immediate Dial Required No Yes i Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab Click Find Edit the desired information DA codes ul When completed save the alarm by clicking Save In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 245 246 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Output group and output records If you would like to trigger an output i e door strikes lights or sirens when OH Receiver messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the OH Receiver message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a
152. Short Condition Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Delay Time 0 Perimeter A Zone 1 Alarm GL v df v 1 4 l Results 1 records 355 356 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an Input Group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria Click Find The desired input group should appear Edit the desired information Ov m e x T9 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm Each Universal Intrusion input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Universal Intrusion interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Universal Intrusion input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be pr
153. Simplex panel All other Simplex messages such as Trouble Abnormal Acknowledge Alarm Silence etc will be ignored In addition it should be noted that because the communications link between Picture Perfect and the Simplex panel is uni directional the Picture Perfect system cannot determine if there is a communications break in the line Therefore no alarm is reported in this situation Prior to defining alarms and input groups on the Picture Perfect system the Simplex system must be already configured Alarm points must have an eight digit identifier as part of their description on the Simplex system Reset message Simplex alarms and System Reset Complete will be displayed on Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor and routed to history It is not necessary for the System Administrator to configure the System Reset message It is automatically inserted into the alarm and input group tables with the appropriate descriptions These descriptions must not be changed The Simplex panel does not send resets individually A System Reset Complete message generated when all the Simplex alarms have been reset is treated as an alarm and routed to Alarm Monitor and History A reset message appears in the following format SIMPLEX SYSTEM RESET COMPLETE NO ALARMS PRESENT The reset from the Simplex system will be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor using the RS 6000 or Linux server s date time stamp for the reset messages Adding or modifying an
154. TEM RETURNS THE ALARM AND A RESPONSE TO THE PICTURE PERFECT SYSTEM Figure 100 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a RAN interface TIS 3B ES A F4 C re 25s BACKUP lt j NET 1 ye N Ng w ri NON k rd p pe 263 Configuration RAN configuration is composed of many parts due to the nature of the application and network communications Some considerations for the configuration of the alarms e What alarms based on priority should be routed to the remote system e What length of time should elapse before unresponded to alarms should be routed to the remote system Thefile cas db text rantcpip cfg contains the configuration parameters These parameters are set during installation and do not need to be changed by the system administrator For more information refer to Advanced configuration on page 267 Once the RAN package is installed you need to configure the system Only the following are mandatory 1 Configure the alarm routing criteria For an alarm to be routed to a remote system the alarm routing must include routing to the monitor Use the Configuration Alarms form to set up the alarm routing 2 Enter a priority and time delay for alarms sent to a remote system See Configuring alarm routing criteria on page 263 The steps listed below are optional
155. TREAM MICRO COMM FAIL 9 10 MO READER COMM FAIL 10 11 APB BADGE VIOLATION 1 12 ALARM HISTORY OVERFLOW 12 13 M1 READER COMM FAIL 13 From the output you see two of the input groups 8 and 11 do not have valid Alarm IDs which means that the alarms were not properly defined This problem should be corrected by following the procedures to define or updateinput group and alarm records in the database as described in the Picture Perfect User Manual To determine which debugging report to use for a specific alarm event type refer to Table 6 on page 77 For each alarm event type given in the first column labelled Alarm Event Description the third column labelled Database Table identifies the corresponding debugging report For database table door use report CSTATION Doors For database table reader use report CSTATION Readers For database table micro use report CSTATION Micros Finally for database table inputs use report CS TATION Inputs The debugging report CSTATION Alarms is used to check the input groups for all alarm event types Running the cstgen tool The following conditions must be true in order to run the cstgen tool e The Picture Perfect database must be operational e A valid account table file must have been created to map Picture Perfect Micro ID numbers to Central Station system account numbers e An input file must have been created containing event names and database Record ID s defining the alarms that are to b
156. Type QOR Any AND All Individual amp No Yes Alarm Broadcast State Changes 2 asl ed Open Condition Ignored Detected Short Condition Ignored Detected Delay Time BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge se 10 a l Results 1 records 111 Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups tab 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the input group by pressing Save Adding or modifying alarms Each Commend input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by Alarm History The linking is done through the Input Group form after the Alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Commend interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Commend input group to which it will be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same a
157. Updating redundant Picture Perfect backup configuration Picture Perfect backup configuration update completed Reflecting the KALATEL INST installation onto the redundant host backupl Chapter 2 19 Installing and removing Configuring additional interfaces This section describes how to configure additional interface devices The instructions are listed below The installation of the current copy of the interface is complete as indicated and you will be asked if you want to install another copy of the interface The messages will be similar to the following The ktd tty2 installation has completed successfully Do you wish to configure another Kalatel CCTV Device y n n Enter y to configure another interface device or n the default value to complete the installation process If you entered y you will return to step 3 in the section Configuring ports on page 16 Some of the steps will be omitted for example you will not be asked if this is a redundant configuration as either all of the interfaces are running in a redundant environment or none of the interfaces are redundant If you entered n you will receive messages similar to the following as the installation process completes The KALATEL INST installation has completed successfully Checking if need to update nls files Picture Perfect NLS Check 1 7 1 19 03 Copyright C 1997 2003 GE Interlogix Inc Fri Apr 8 17 38 49 EDT 2003 No nls files for kalatel p
158. User Monitor Performance Monitor I a m x s New Alarms 6 Total Alarms 6 Display is now active Highest Priority 50 Priori Alarm Description Location Condition p Device Date Device Time 0 Station 1 Request STN01 01 Request PNET A 06 2005 10 17 09 Station 1 Connect STN01 01 Connect Alarm 10 17 22 Station 1 Disconnect STN01 01 Disconnect Alarm 10 17 51 Station 10 Request STNO1 10 Request Alarm 07 04 50 Station 10 Connect STNO1 10 Connect Alarm 07 03 48 Station 3 Request STNO1 3 Request Alarm 01 06 2005 07 02 21 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that used the input group prefix STNO1 and has appropriate input group and alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the Stentofon 9600 intercom Below is an explanation of the information shown by the display 341 The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the stngen9600 tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the stngen9600 tool Lines 1 3 Paging Station 1 completed a communication sequence with the Stentofon 9600 It issued a request for communication received a connection and then terminated the connection Lines 4 5 Paging Station 10 is in the process of communicating w
159. a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect Notifier interface notifier package For the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 System e The panel must be configured with the pager option enabled This option is available on Notifier systems equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on enabling this option e The panel must be configured with the Auxiliary Printer Monitoring option disabled See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on disabling this option Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e Picture Perfect Notifier interface notifier package For the Notifier AFP1010 AM2020 System e The panel must be configured with the pager option enabled This option is available on Notifier systems equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on enabling this option e The panel must be configured with the Auxiliary Printer Monitoring option disabled See the AM2020 AFP1010 manual for instructions on disabling this option 2 x E E x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system ar
160. ace scs package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package Picture Perfect DMP SCS 1 interface scs package 119 2 x E c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e DMP SCS 1 receiver provided by the manufacturer e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the DMP SCS 1 communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intrusion system console port Refer to Figure 44 Figure 44 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect sy
161. ackage Running cas bin fixperm on tmp kalatel perm file No errors detected cas bin fixperm finished Installing Interface product s was successful The INSTALLation has completed The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n yl 2 Press to reboot the system A CAUTION If the interface package was running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment then you MUST synchronize the database on the backup host with the primary host by performing Database Recovery on the backup host prior to starting redundant Picture Perfect on the backup host Refer to the Picture Perfect 4 0 Redundant Edition User Manual for details 20 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Verifying the installation This section describes how to verify the installation process The instructions are listed below 1 When the system is back up log in as root and verify that the interface is running by typing at the prompt ps ef grep msan You should get output similar to the following root 12579 17148 0 10 19 36 pts 0 0 00 msan 2 For further verification type at the prompt ps ef grep ktd The output should be similar to the following root 16164 17148 0 10 19 36 pts 0 0 00 ktd tty2 root 16169 17148 0 10 19 37 pts 00 00 ktd tty3 The second output line will only appear if more than one device was configured If you have performed a redundant installation you must perform
162. al line from an external device Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface The particular alarms events that are supported by the Universal Intrusion interface are ALARM SYSTEM RESET DEVICE FAIL DEVICE RESET The incoming message which is a maximum length of 256 characters is composed of fields that start in specific configurable columns and MUST be of the form Event Type Event DateEvent Time cPrefixEvent Code DescriptionEOM Where Table 23 Incoming message columns Field name Start postition default pos Length Format Type or description Event_Type 1 21 char ALARM SYSTEM RESET DEVICE FAIL DEVICE RESET Event_Date 23 this position is 8 YYYYMMDD Date Event Occurred configurable Event_Time 31 this position is 6 HHMMSS Time Event Occurred configurable 24 hr lt 37 1 lt char The less than character Prefix 38 3 4 A Z 0 9 Prefix e g UIO1 UIO2 Must start with a letter and end with a number This is used to differentiate messages to different instances of the interface Event Code After Prefix Configurable 0 9 The alarm number sent in by the external Default 7 device and used to identify this alarm in the input_group description gt 37 1 gt char The greater than character Description After Event_Code 0 50 String Alarm Description Not used by the interface but may be used for debugging EOM EndOfMsg 1 Ox0A Hex newline char
163. alarm is created only once and only the first priority specified will be used for that alarm record It is recommended that all the possible message types that apply to similar Device Type LDD combination with the same Alarm Description be declared initially so they can be generated when using the installation portion of the tool This is shown in the input file example for the two smoke detectors which each have a separate line entry for the A T and W message types The three lines declared for the same smoke detector will generate 12 input group records that point to one alarm record If particular statuses for a message type need to be disabled or deemed unimportant they can be disabled individually through the Input Group form of Picture Perfect 206 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Always keep the input file around for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface Do not use an Alarm Description that matches an existing alarm record This is an illegal condition that nfrgen checks before any data is generated Do not re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Un installs are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not un installed using nfrgen
164. alues are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines HHHHHH HH HH db RedundantOper RedundantHosts primaryl backup1 Interface data file backup and restore The Simplex interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 18 Simplex interface data file Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Simplex software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Simplex interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 18 Simplex interface data file Data file name Description cas db text simplex cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text simplex redundant cfg Simplex redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix M Configuring a Stentofon Touchline interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon TouchLine Intercom System In this a
165. ame is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen9600 tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen9600 Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UNINSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to uninstall the Stentofon database records This is the first 5 to 5 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Stentofon interface should have a different input group prefix that is used Specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix Enter the input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n yl
166. amper Sht Gnd Supervisory Open Tamper Sht Gnd Restore Fire Alarm Supervisory Short or Open Reset Closed Advanced configuration The EST system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text est tty cfg file where tty is the name of the port to which the instance of the EST interface is connected This file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The EST interface reads this file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change this file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is a sample est cfg file est tty2 cfg 1 23 Copyright C 1994 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script Tb db cb db db HH H 4 est inst 1 8 05 29 03 This file contains the configuration information for the EST FIRE ALARM interface Each interface that is running on a Picture THE ck dE GE b Hb mH db GE Gk HHH 177 Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a requir
167. ample Alarm Monitor screen aAlarmMonitorr 0 0 0000 T zu a Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor i Alarm Monitor il a E X p m New Alarms 5 Total Alarms 5 Display is now active Highest Priority 20 Priori Alarm Description Location Condition p Device Time 20 Perimeter A Zone 1 Alarm Ul02 01010111 Perimeter A Reset EN o1 005 15 43 35 Perimeter B Zone 1 Alarm UI03 01010111 Perimeter B Alarm Perimeter B Zone 2 Alarm UI03 01010112 Perimeter B Alarm BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge CMDO7 FF23 FF13 12 31 Alarm DOOR HELD OPEN DOOR HELD OPEN Alarm The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system with two Universal Intrusion interfaces that use the input group prefixes UI02 and UI03 and have appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the panels Below is a line by line explanation 359 The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate Alarm record that was created The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record Line 1 A Perimeter A Zone 1 alarm condition was reset at device UIO2 01010111 Line 2 A Perimeter B Zone 1 alarm condition was completed but not yet reset at device UI03 01010111 Line 3 A Perimeter B Zone 2 alarm condition was received at devi
168. an be CODE ADDED CODE DELETED or CODE CHANGED USER NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 NUMBER ADDED isa three digit string 0 to 999 Permanent Schedule N Temporary Schedule D Primary Schedule n Secondary Schedule i Message Types To recognize Permanent Temporary Primary and Secondary Schedule message types use the following format in the input group description IGP ACCOUNT NUMBER MSG DESC USER NUMBER where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 00 to 99999 MSG DESC is the description of the type of the message and must be one of the following strings 153 PERM SCHD CHG TEMP SCHD CHG PRI SCHD CHG SEC SCHD CHG USER NUMBER is atwo to four digit string 00 to 9999 The length of this field is based on SCS 1 programming and is specified for this interface during installation Variable Length Message with Type v To recognize variable length message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt MSG TYPE gt lt MSG TEXT gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 00 to 99999 MSG TYPE is the type for custom text and is a two digit string 01 to 99 MSG TEXT is up to the first 16 characters of the custom text Door Access Granted J Message Type To recognize door access granted message types use the
169. an be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Input group and alarm records generated by stngen The input file processed by stngen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix pager identification number and communication activity information into the description field of an input group record If optional CCTV information is specified a new entry will be created and appended to the mapping table file for the specified CCTV switcher interface program For example let s examine the second line of data in the example input file described earlier and assume an input group prefix of STNO1 F110 Request Station F110 Request 1 kalatel 1 tty3 This line would generate one input group record with the following description field STNO1 F110 Request One alarm record would be generated with the following description field Station F110 Request The input group record would be linked to this alarm Since CCTV information has been provided a new entry will be added to the Kalatel interface program mapping table file to enable control of Kalatel ca
170. ange to take effect Note If anew CCTV switcher interface is installed or you are upgrading an existing CCTV switcher interface and you were previously using the multiple device support feature you must re activate the multiple device support feature after installation Multiple device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use the msan set multiple utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note You should configure the Picture Perfect software for multiple device support only if CCTV commands are to be routed to more than one switcher device for an alarm event There is a slight performance penalty for this configuration as the switcher device mapping tables must be fully searched to find all matches indicating the routing of a CCTV command for the specific alarm event To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to multiple perform the following steps 1 Log on to the system as root 2 Enterthe command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set multiple The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan m modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK
171. appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 135 Column descriptions for i Secondary Schedule Changed I Temporary Schedule Changed n Primary Schedule Changed and N Permanent Schedule Changed Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Msg Type Account Us
172. are requirements for the Remote Alarm Notification interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Remote Alarm Notification interface ran package Note Atypical site requires a minimum of 5MB free disk space to install the Picture Perfect RAN software on the IBM RISC System 6000 For specific configuration details contact your GE Security Sales Representative Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Remote Alarm Notification interface ran package Note Atypical site requires a minimum of 5MB free disk space to install the Picture Perfect RAN software on the IBM RISC System 6000 For specific configuration details contact your GE Security Sales Representative Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface 262 User Manual Hardware overview Figure 99 Overview of a standalone Picture Perfect and a RAN interface IF THE PRIORITY IS IN THE DESIRED RANGE AND THE ALARM IS NOT RESPONDED TO WITHIN THE SPECIFIED TIME FRAME IT IS SENT TO THE REMOTE SYSTEM REMOTE ALARM POINT PICTURE PERFECT AN ALARM OCCURS STANDALONE SYSTEM IT IS ROUTED TO THE PICTURE PERFECT SYSTEM THE REMOTE SYS
173. arm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor Recognized alarms get recorded to the alarm history database table providing a permanent record of the alarm event For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove the alarm conditions from the monitor Certain Alarm Monitor fields that are displayed may not apply to SCS 1 alarms depending on the mapping that is designed for the interface The information of most use to an operator will be the Alarm Description and Location columns which correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell what type of device status and location of the reported alarm The complete message of the condition should be read from the SCS 1 system or from a printer hooked up to that system Figure 52 Sample Alarm Monitor Screen Line 2 A Alarm Monitor Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor l I a Ej e New Alarms Total Alarms Display is now active Highest Priority 50 arm Description Location iti D Device Date Device Time 1 3523 A2343Supervisory SCS1 35235 234 SU ALM l 1 06 2005 15 48 22 SCS1 WRN Alrm bell silen SCS1 10010 34 15 48 33 FIRE ALARM SCS1 90123 321 FA ALM i 15 49 55
174. armEvents AlarmMessages AlarmResponses Description Q x x iE KA d E e i Alarm Description Instructions Description Faciity i 50 Route Definition Alarm Routing Online E Color Picker O No Color Picker 9 We Color Sample inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground e Yes Immediate Reset Input j No f e j Yes Immediate Dial Required No e Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs e Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify the alarm 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 In the description field of the Alarms form enter the description from the alarm text area on the associated input group record as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired alarm should appear 4 Edit the desired information When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 189 190 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Monitoring alarms The Alarm Monitor screen displays incoming alarms and their priority count and status Alarms display on the Alarm Monitor in order of their priority When an alarm occurs the system beeps and displays a pop up window to notify the operator Click on the Monitor Alarm Monitor icon
175. arms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groupssection of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the stn ttyN cfg configuration file Also check the alarm routing field of the corresponding alarm record to make sure that the routing includes Monitor If there is a printer hooked up to the Stentofon Exchange then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem Message types All message types that will be recognized by the Stentofon interface software follow a uniform structure This structure consists of a line containing a varying number of fixed sized 4 character fields with a blank space between the fields as a separator A message line is preceded by a NUL 00 character synchronization marker and is followed by a carriage return CR 0D hex character and line feed LF 0A hex charac
176. as bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the scsgen tool and the database tools it uses Type scsgen Messages similar to the following appear on the screen SCS 1 Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records i u i To use the install option press or type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name ee ee ee eee Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name scs inp Is this correct y n yl To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Ewer Enter n to change the name If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will be displayed Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 3 to 4 characters with the last character s numeric For example SCS1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix ocd es e Rc RE Sod eG Some e ed ad 10 141 Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed an
177. at Happens When the Connection is Lost 2 00 cece eee ete eet e ene e teen een eeees 269 Alarmi response states coset inna iepuex renes ied E PPP A naegngs abeemercwonbopwaddaracaaaema s 270 TGP IPconfigUrdtiGR t tecieL bbb itio terrm teet Po Eo deb aaa ve POPE e dg 270 Message format from Picture Perfect Version 1 55 or higher ssisisssssssssssssssssese 271 Message format from the remote system iisssssssssssssssssssssssssse ee een 271 Error messages ees eee chad se danse ael RA dete FUENTES HR ONS a Re Reed su OT e URP RR Re 271 x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix L Appendix M Configuring a Simplex interface ccc ccc ec cence cece eee ee 275 Introd ctioh oec te ERE a a EROR E ER EVE POR DENN E eels ee ERE eked cate rep 276 Redundant systems vie dan eooecop e rs esee Peer VEO RYE ERE ee dae Baal Asan 276 Software rEquIFEMENKS 2 304 406 esie tk re er Heated Ee ORI dou ned wea RR AIR trien e Ra ea Cb deos 277 Stand alone systemes eve EE Ret err ROPDSUDDUDUPEC PIE ART tee edenda e ae 277 Redundant SVSLeETi x2 isr pe cc ovv beetdsa b beides tam da aea pt pb pte etti dd det 277 Hardware requirements iia sev ees cis Rr nre RE sada aad te bane YI MEN RUE RU ER UR rds 278 Stand alone System isssvsceoiti tere ORO eei be iba Tac AAP E TERR CER TER e 278 Red rdantSystetmis uiis core asse bb bI ppc TE A eae Ns C PLE t EEREEEENT 279 Configurationis ese Reip pel presa dep Ee UR
178. atabase describing the alarm The Central Station system requires an account number designation for all inputs This information must be provided to Picture Perfect so it can correctly identify events for the Central Station system After the Picture Perfect database has been populated you can identify the alarms events to be forwarded to the Central Station system through the use of the cstgen tool described below For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Create alarms in Picture Perfect for any alarm events that may occur 2 Create a valid account table file to map Picture Perfect Micro ID numbers to Central Station system account numbers 3 Create input files to describe the alarm notification events to be forwarded to the Central Station system 4 Runthe cstgen tool to validate the input file and to create a map file for the Picture Perfect Central Station interface that defines the alarm events to be forwarded to the Central Station system Creating Picture Perfect alarms The Picture Perfect software uses a comprehensive set of database tables to define the objects and relationships between them which implement the customer s specific security solution The cstgen tool accesses a subset of this information as defined in Table 5 Database table objects are identified and related to one another through the use of Record ID numbers Each database table record has a Record ID number unique to that specific table type but not u
179. atch the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed 4 characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be NFR1 and the next interface that is installed could be NFR2 NOTE In using the Notifier INA only 1 per system is permitted so HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHH HHH H the input group prefix will always be NFR The following values are unique to the Notifier interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI Icanon n The following values are setup based on your installation responses NotifierType Notifier AM2020 AFP1010 InpGrpPrefix NFR1 PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 2400 CharacterSize 8 Parity e StopBits 1 Xon 24 Xoff Y cas db text notifier redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Notifier redundant configuration file cas db text notifier redundant cfg notifier redundant cfg 1 11 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved notifier redundant cfg 1 12 06
180. ated alarms The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the alarm record is associated to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the scsgen tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the scsgen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it is does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records that other input group records are linked Note Any input group and its associated alarm using the input group prefix targeted for un installation that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed This means it will be permanently lost if it s data was not originally part of the input file To avoid this situation for any input groups and associated alarms created manually a corresponding entry should be added to the input file so that ALL of the SCS data may be automatically recreated at a later date 146 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Removing scsgen Before you start You musthave root permission to run the scsgen tool The database must be running When the tool is invoked scsgen will check this You must know the input group prefix used by t
181. ation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the nf rgen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it is does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records that other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 215 Using nfrgen uninstall Before you start You must have root permission to run the nfrgen tool The database must be running nf rgen will check this when the tool is invoked and attempt to start the database if it is not running You must know the input group prefix used by the Notifier interface that is being targeted for un installation If in a redundant Picture Perfect environment ensure you are on the current primary host or if the system is down the host that will be started as primary when Picture Perfect is re started Follow these steps to use the nfrgen tool to un install database records l 2 Log in as root Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct path environment variable that will give you access to the nfrgen tool and the database tools it uses
182. ation file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 7 Parity StopBits Xon Xoff Icanon CreateAlarm ReceiverNumber pow ow HBPBS cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the OH Receiver redundant configuration file cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg TE cb cb Gb cb Gb db GO HHH d oh receiver redundant cfg 1 4 Copyright C 2002 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved oh receiver redundant cfg 1 4 06 09 03 This file contains the configuration information for the OH Receiver interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backup1 Interface data file backup and restore The OH Receiver interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 15 OH Receiver Interface Data Files Backups sh
183. ation reader Relay Open Alarm TA amp amp aaaa NpidadRO DI Point alarm input Other Messages Log Threshold JL aaaa NpidddJL Badge history overflow micro Log Overflow JO amp amp aaaa NpidddJO Alarm history overflow micro Line Trouble LT aaaa NpidddLT Upstream comm fail micro Remote call failed RA aaaa NpidddRA Downstream comm fail micro Remote prog fail RU amp amp aaaa NpidddRU Reader comm fail reader Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Table 8 SIA messages event codes corresponding message formats and Picture Perfect alarms continued Message Event code Data field portion of SIA message PP alarm device type Comm fail YC aaaa NpidddYC Host host comm fail host Restoral Messages Door Restoral DR amp aaaa NpidddDR Door closed door Relay Closed RC amp amp aaaa NpidddRC DI Point alarm input Note aaaa represents the communicator s account number and ddd represents the three character device number such as door area host input or Micro ID Several sources of information were investigated and their data has been incorporated into this specification These include SIA Digital Communication Standard February 1993 SIA Computer Interface Standard June 1990 Radionics D6500 Security Receiver 6500 MPU 07 00 Program Entry Guide 1993 Radionics D6500 Security Receiver Computer Interface Installation Manual 1993 Radionics Technogram Non
184. be added to the file The cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg file takes precedence over the cas db text scs signals cfg default file The following are the contents of the default signal configuration file cas db text scs signals cfg provided at installation sccs signals cfg 1 1 05 14 01 Description This file contains a list of signals which the application will ignore and just send back an acknowledgement that it was received File Layout One signal per line Signal name will start in column 1 A maximum of 32 signals can be entered into this file to be ignored Comments must be on a separate line and start with a pound sign in colum 1 Comments must be less than 255 characters in length The following are examples where the S07 S88 and S99 signals would be ignored if they weren t preceded by a comment symbol S07 S88 S99 To have all copies of the interface ignore signals S07 S88 and S99 except the interfaces for which there is a specific cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg file remove the comment at the beginning of the lines Any other signals to be ignored should be added to the file starting in column 1 163 cas db text scs redundant cfg This presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run r
185. bination with the DEV TYPEand LDD or ZXXX or FFF described below to create unique input group records DEV TYPE The device type column is the actual device type to be monitored The valid device types that can be monitored are listed in Device types on page 228 The spelling and spacing of the device type must be exactly the same as is listed in this document since this is part of the actual message that the Notifier panel produces This column must be in uppercase and no more than 12 characters in length LDD or ZXXX or FFF The third column is used forthe LDD or ZXXX or FFF number which describes the loop detector loop module or zone number of the device type in the case of Zone Disable messages The LDD FFF format should be used in this column unless it is a Zone Disable used for the Notifier AM2020 AFP1010 message type The LDD format is a three digit combination of the loop number and detector or module number where L equates to the loop number 1 9 0210 and DD equates to the detector or module number 01 99 Leading zeroes are significant in this column and should be used For example if you have a device on loop 2 detector number 9 then the LDD number would be 209 The FFF format used for the Notifier 400 is a three digit number that may include decimal points The format for Zone Disable is ZXXX where Z is fixed character and XXX is the zone number making this a four character field for these message types The zone numb
186. camera to turn on because you know at what reader the lost badge is being used See Table 1 for location types and alarm conditions Detailed information may be found in the Picture Perfect User Manual 30 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Table 1 Where input groups are used Location type Alarm condition Area Invalid Badge expired or no category match Suspended Badge Lost Badge Unknown Badge Anti Passback Duress Door Forced Open Held Open Pre alarm Reader Valid Badge exit button tamper only nvalid Badge all badge errors except Unknown Input Point Alarm Micro Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Micro Communications Failure Downstream Micro Communications Failure Reader Communications Failure Host Host to Host Communications Failure Network Database Communications Failure Using SQL reports During the installation process nine SQL reports are installed The reports are CCTV Areas CCTV Micros ReaderFailure CCTV Doors CCTV Readers CCTV Inputs CCTV Hosts CCTV Micros CommFailure CCTV Alarms CCTV Micros Overflow These reports provide you with the information that you will need to know about mapping alarms to the AlphaCom system To add or delete an alarm from the CCTV system you must know the Alarm Id Input Group Id and Location Id 31 These reports detail the alarm conditions d
187. cation forthe grundig switcher connected to port dev tty3 After CCTV switcher mapping table files are updated signals may be sent to the CCTV switcher interface tasks to force a reload of the mapping files to make CCTV control for the Commend active There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Trigger on Input Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be lt BLANK gt 102 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The default values for the alarm records are Controls Alarm Online Controls Auto Reset Output Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority 50 Using cmdgen install Before you start You must have root permission to run the cmdgen tool The database must be running The tool will check this when cmdgen is invoked A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Commend interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section Input group prefix on page 100
188. cctvName allplex cctv 1 allplex 1552 522 1552 1 allp tty3 Creating CCTV device allplex map addition file tmp stn allplex deltaigd STNO1 10 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 2 allplex 1553 523 1553 2 allp tty3 igd STN01 10 Busy cctvName allplex cctv 2 allplex 1554 524 1554 2 allp tty3 igd STNO1 10 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 3 allplex 1555 525 1555 3 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Request cctvName allplex cctv 4 allplex 1555 526 1556 4 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Connect cctvName allplex cctv 5 allplex 1557 527 1557 5 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Busy cctvName allplex cctv 5 332 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 15 allplex 1558 528 1558 5 allp tty3 igd STN01 03 Disconnect cctvName allplex cctv 6 allplex 1559 529 1559 6 allp tty3 igd STN01 05 Request cctvName kalatel cctv 1 kalatel 1560 530 1560 1 ktd tty4 igd STNO1 05 Connect cctvName kalatel cctv 2 kalatel 1561 531 1561 2 ktd tty4 igd STN01 05 Busy cctvName kalatel cctv 2 kalatel 1562 532 1562 2 ktd tty4 igd STN01 05 Disconnect cctvName kalatel cctv 3 kalatel 1563 533 1563 3 ktd tty4 Generated 4 new entries for CCTV switcher device allegiant map table Generated 8 new entries for CCTV switcher device allplex map table Generated 4 new entries for CCTV switcher device kalatel map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device allegiant map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device allplex map table Successfully appended
189. ce UIO3 01010112 Extended configuration The Universal Intrusion interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text univ intr ttyN cfg cas db text univ intr redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text univ intr ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Universal Intrusion device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Lines beginning with a number sign are comments The Universal Intrusion interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Universal Intrusion device attached to port dev tty1 cas db text univ intr ttyl cfg univ intr ttyl cfg Copyright C 2000 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script univ intr inst 1 6 02 17 03 his file contains the configuration information for he Universal Intr
190. ce to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Facility Integrator and recognizes only alarm and dismissed message types sent from the Facility Integrator All other messages are ignored The Facility Integrator computer is a PC based platform Communication with the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection using the PC s serial port The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the Facility Integrator and does not send anything back This interface is available for standalone or redundant systems Remote Alarm Notification The Picture Perfect Remote Alarm Notification RAN package enables alarms from the Picture Perfect system to be routed to a remote non Picture Perfect system The alarms can then be processed by and responded to from the remote system Both systems use the TCP IP protocol to communicate with each other This method of communication guarantees accurate transmission of all data and instant notification of a system that is no longer connected to the network The RAN interface is available for standalone enterprise or redundant systems OH Receiver The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel and recognizes predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the OH Receiver System Network or D
191. ch is established at installation Walk Test Message Type To recognize Walk Test message types use the following format in the input group description Walk Test messages are received when the Notifier panel is under Walk Test mode Messages with the status of UNPROG UNINST and UNTEST are recognized when those types of reports are generated through the panel Messages with the TESTXX status are recognized as they occur and are ignored during a Tested Devices Report See your Notifier Operation manual for information on Walk Tests lt IGP gt STATUS DEV TYPE lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS can be one of the following UNPROG UNINST TESTXX UNTEST e DEV TYPE is one of the device types from the detector monitor module or control module device types listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 228 For unprogrammed devices DETECTOR or MODULE e LDDis the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0210 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example to configure a SPRNKLR MNTR detector located at LDD 405 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 UNPROG SPRNKLR MNTR 405 NFR1 UNINST SPRNKLR MNTR 405 NFR1 TESTXX SPRNKLR MNTR 405 NFR1 UNTEST SPRNKLR MNTR 405 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Note
192. cio elosnieolesderwpblad crani E vx claws 352 Hardware r gairementy occ scese sordo eed ee Se ua dee 353 d o0 40 1 MEM 357 Extended configuration i cece be ese lere te e bee 363 Interface data file backup and restore iles 366 348 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Universal Intrusion interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for an external device It is a general interface for processing alarm and device failure messages that satisfy a defined format and are received over a serial line from an external device The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the intrusion receiver The information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the event type event date and time input group prefix and a user defined description field of message types known to the interface Communication from the Universal Intrusion system to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is bi directional The interface will receive messages and send ACK NAK and other special case messages back to the intrusion system Messages or alarms recognized by the intrusion interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input g
193. ckup should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time that the Picture Perfect database is backed up The CCTV software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the CCTV interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table4 CCTV interface data files Data file name Description cas db text package comm cfg TTY port extended configuration definition file is the port name suchas tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text package video loss cfg Video loss tty port extended configuration definition file isthe port name suchas tty2 forAIX ttyD002 for Linux cas db text package redundant cfg CCTV redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names cas db text package map Alarm map file that maps Picture Perfect alarm events to CCTV alarm numbers as described in Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 Appendix C Configuring a Central Station interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Central Station interface which provides a communication mechanism between Picture Perfect and central monitoring systems that allows control of activities for multiple systems and both
194. clared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be STNO1 and the next interface that is installed could be STNO2 344 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The following values are unique to the STN interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI Icanon y The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix STNO1 PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity n StopBits 1 Xon y Xoff y cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Stentofon 9600 redundant configuration file cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg stentofon9600 redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved stentofon redundant cfg 1 7 05 14 03 This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON 9600 INTERCOM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines dE db db HEE HEE HE RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backup1
195. compliance with SIA Standards March 1994 Appendix D Configuring a Commend interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Commend interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intercom system and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix Ino ORO eoi E Re REESE ET Obr Re DER aba Di T ET 92 Software Requirements ocolos deo e eee ende ks 93 Hardware Requirements csse he 94 Configuration 92 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Commend interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intercom system and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Commend Intercom system communicates with the Picture Perfect host through a serial line connection Messages or alarms recognized by the intercom interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the input group table Picture Perfect will have to be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be tied to an input group This is the standard method for setting up other hardware on a Picture Perfect system The details of setting up the appropriate database records will be covered in more detail in the section Configuration on page 97 The c
196. controlled alarms F F X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk iy Salieron E Refer to Figure 14 Example printed report sorted by input group id on page 38 for a sample of a printed report 38 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 14 Example printed report sorted by input group id Picture Perfect to AlphaCom mapped alarms Input LocId AlphaCom Alarm Type Group Id AlarmId InpType Alarm Task Name Description 0 28 10 17 25 alphacom comm 00 1 00 Door Held Open 0 102 21 45 15 alphacom comm 00 1 00 Door Forced Open 0 39 201 51 202 alphacom comm RDR 00 1 00 Invalid Badge AlphaCom Alarm Number to AlphaCom Node Numbers mappings AlphaCom AlphaCom Alarm Node Numbers 15 1 25 2 20 202 1 2 10 Exiting the program If you have made any changes to the mapping file while running a1phacom map and you select X to exit you will be asked if you want to inform the rest of the system of your changes If you select y then the system is informed of your mapping file changes The system will re read the mapping file and use it to determine which alarms will be routed to the AlphaCom Exchange controller Any existing active alarms will not be re run through the mapping file only newly occurring alarms If you are not finished making your changes but are leaving the alphacom map program temporarily you can enter n This will not inform the Picture Perfect syste
197. cord that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the pr
198. cture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M ON Uc P UM mw PB ON Uc AUNE 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port to the CCTV switcher console port Refer to Figure 16 on page 49 through Figure 25 on page 52 as appropriate for your CCTV interface The Splitter Master Port pinout will correspond to the Picture Perfect System pinouts in the diagrams Video loss monitoring and reporting If you are using a controller that provides video loss monitoring and alarm reporting you will also need the items listed below A second RS 232 C serial port for each host A second splitter box Another pair of pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to splitter box wired as described in Figure 28 A second cable to connect the splitter master port to the CCTV switcher printer port as shown in Figure 28 Figure 28 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB9M ToCCTV DB25M To Primary Host DB25F To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 29 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CCTV interface 55 56 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Configuration The Picture Perfect interface to a CCTV control system allows alarms that are detected by the Picture Perfect system to trigger CCTV cameras
199. cture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Simplex System However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Simplex System Software requirements The software requirements for the firepanel system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect Simplex interface simplex package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Simplex interface simplex package 277 2 x E c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system t
200. cture Perfect output device support option to single perform the following steps 1 Login to the system as root 2 Enterthe command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set single The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 Multiple device support issues The original design of the output interfaces supported only a single output device and allowed only one command to be sent in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event With the introduction of enhanced output interfaces the design was extended to support multiple devices connected to a single Picture Perfect host system In addition any Picture Perfect alarm event can cause output of commands to multiple devices Two utilities are provided to turn the multiple device feature on or off These are described below For compatibility with existing systems the default mode during output interface software installation or upgrade is single device support You must shut down and restart Picture Perfect for the change to take effect Note Ifa new output is installed or you are upgrading an existing output interface and you w
201. d This configuration is done automatically when the Commend communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the Commend console port Refer to Figure 36 Figure 37 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect Intercom System Host Computer DB25F DB9M Tx2 3 Rxd Rx 3 2 Txd GND 7 5 GND 2 x c x Figure 38 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Commend interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Commend Intercom controller provided by the manufacturer Refer to your intercom manual for dip switch settings They should be set to the default Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Commend communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass throug
202. d exchanges that may be installed For Picture Perfect to monitor the numerous message combinations would require a large number of input group and alarm database records to be entered on the system To add to the complexity there may be more than one Stentofon Intercom System interface running on a Picture Perfect system The stngen tool will aid in the maintenance aspect when there are multiple Stentofon Intercom System interfaces installed and running When a Stentofon intercom is added or removed the tool can be used to quickly install or uninstall those database records associated with a particular interface This is possible by carefully segregating the input group and alarm database records for each Stentofon interface running on the Picture Perfect system The install portion of this tool is explained in the section stngen uninstall on page 302 stngen Install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the paging stations that are going to be monitored This kind of report can be obtained from the Stentofon system 294 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Input file An input file is required when using the install portion of the stngen tool It describes the types of messages and pager locations to be monitored by the Stentofon alarm interface The i
203. d alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk selection J 62 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Deleting an alarm This section describes how to delete an existing CCTV controlled alarm Refer to Figure 31 Example of deleting a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 63 to see the messages and prompts that display when deleting an alarm When you delete an alarm from the mapping file the Picture Perfect alarm no longer triggers a CCTV action Follow these steps to delete a CCTV alarm l At the Selection prompt type d to delete a CCTV controlled alarm A message displays to confirm an alarm is being deleted Enter the Alarm Id The Alarm Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports Enter the Input Group Id The Input Group Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports Enter the Location Id The Location Id can be found on one of the CCTV SQL reports If you have only a single instance of the CCTV interface installed then you will be prompted for the CCTV alarm number Skip to step 6 If you have installed multiple CCTV interfaces then a list of the ports that have been configured for the CCTV devices will be displayed and you need to select the one to which this alarm is to be forwarded Enter the name of the port for example tty1 You will be pro
204. d alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Output and output group information is lost whenever the stngen9600 tool is used to uninstall database records 2 Modify or add the new paging station data to the input file 3 Invoke stngen9600 and use the modified input file to re create the data records stngen9600 uninstall This portion of stngen9600 removes the database records associated with a specific Stentofon 9600 interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the stngen9600 tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 5 characters will be removed from the database The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the alarm record is associated with any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed no records will be removed and the user will be notified of this condition This situation must be co
205. d an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows e Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs 225 226 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the monitor for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 74 Sample alarm screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description 4 races Description Q lE X oo 4 xXx 2s Alarm Description Instructions Description FIRE ALARM PULLED Facility GLOBAL mm L4 Priority 50 1 Route Definition Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY of Online Color Picker O No Color Picker foires Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes mediate Reset Input No j Yes 1 Immediate Dial Required 9 No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm descri
206. d you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered wag SCS1 Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Ever Enter n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the SCS interface D mre k Default SCS Facility assignment portion de e humos eem er Em mcm ee mm e em m esum cm m EV Eie em cpu N m prm eS eS k When the input group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility Specifically for the SCS input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Enter a y to exit the script or ann to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the SCS interface if you so desire then re run the script If you
207. dart systetm coro puo pre xv vb PU EH EE Maan RENE rOeDSPPPMIE E NIA MR 319 Hardware requiremerits rec rl eI xRE IR er Re E cadena E HEATER CARA Seton aee RR GUERRE 319 Stand alone System sos svesscoiti ere E ARD ki Aaa ce corres UM PEE 319 Red ndarnt system ose teer ganai ai uv RIPE AER a Eee UR ed 321 Configurations sessie ay En dels prb ERR Rudd ER ROM eT RR ads les wy RITpnp UT 323 Using stngen9600 ee Ue e pur PoPrQecqUD NIE Gare n IT enUhboreg ug a ED LN ERN 323 strigen9600 uninstall enemies pud ue audi esaaendond bie weed AANE AS AAA Naet 333 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Stentofon interface 0 ccc cece cence eee ence 335 Testing the IMtOMM ACS iecore eh tE EEE EEE a HERE and 341 Message types 4 ovde pep EErEE EEEE EEEREN EEE GeV EE S a e e aN 342 Extended configuration 2 5 pere hr LER RR E IR EET Ru EPEKEEL TQUE EIU cee 343 cas db text stn9600 ttyN cfg i esses eee 444 RRRA E E EAE EEEENM E EE reet 343 cas db text stentofon9600 redundant cfg iiis eee 344 Interface data file backup and restore ccc ccc cee nec eee nett een nh 345 Configuring a Universal Intrusion interface cece eee eee eee 347 urere ONE a acs fees cars ase Setar 348 Red undarit systems sese ddnnnngd cove udddtananpeklddddd e a uu ee ER DRE ad 348 Software requirements l eolit rey a ag Mee ade edge Vane da ver wvsre e ver a RR e ps 3
208. database a dynamic entry will be created in the input group and alarm database tables This system can exist in a stand alone redundant or enterprise environment Universal Intrusion The Universal Intrusion interface acts as a secondary monitoring system for external devices that send data in a specific configurable format to the interface It is a serial line interface designed to annunciate alarms and their resets that have been entered into the Picture Perfect database to the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor This interface supports operations in a stand alone redundant or enterprise environment Chapter 1 Interface overview Intercom systems supported by Picture Perfect The Picture Perfect intercom interfaces can exist in stand alone redundant two Picture Perfect hosts have connectivity to a single intercom system port by means of a splitter and enterprise environments An instance of an intercom interface has a one to one correspondence between Picture Perfect and the serial line port connecting it to the intercom hardware The interface will generate alarms when user configurable message traffic control messages are received Communication is uni directional unless otherwise indicated using a serial line connection meaning the Picture Perfect interface only receives data from the interface and does not send anything back AlphaCom The interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect provides the capability
209. detector and module monitoring the information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the device type status loop and detector module number and a user defined description field Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Notifier panel and associated printer This interface can monitor system type messages coming from the Notifier panel which do not have an associated device type Simplex The Simplex interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system and only recognizes the specific fire and life safety alarms and resets the interface was developed to handle Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Intrusion detection systems supported by Picture Perfect The intrusion detection interface for Picture Perfect receives alarm input from the intrusion system and recognizes predefined message types built into the interface that are set up through Picture Perfect These messages are mapped to the Picture Perfect database enabling annunciation of the intrusion event DMP SCS The DMP SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the DMP SCS 1 alarm central receiver and recognizes predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect Messages or alarms recognized by the DMP SCS 1 interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database For messages NOT in the Picture Perfect
210. device in Perimeter A you could enter the Input Group Description as UIO2 01010101 Perimeter A The UI02 01010101 portion is the required part where Perimeter A is the descriptive portion The alarm that is linked to this input group could be used to further describe the alarm Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Facility Facility id specified for this input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 134 Sample Input Groups screen B Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description a amp jME XO x g Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Input Group State Description uio2 01010111 Perimeter A Facility GLOBAL L 4 L4 Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type OR Any AND All Individual
211. device to be monitored the device type and one of the following depending on the message type loop detector loop module zone number or annunciator number A report containing the installed devices can be obtained from the Notifier Panel through the point report function Please see your appropriate AFP1010 AM2020 or AFR400 operation manual A brief description that gives more detail about the device This information will be used as the alarm description field for an alarm record The last three bullets comprise the data format portion of the input file With this information the nfrgen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the n rgen toolto determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the nfrgen tool are 1 7 RISC AIX 4 3 3 and Linux 7 2 2 0 RISC AIX 5 1 and Linux 7 3 4 0 RISC AIX 5L Version 5 2 or Red Hat Linux WS ES or AS 4 0 Message types The lines of data that follow the Picture Perfect version number should contain rows of delimited text data that describe the message type device type location and brief description The delimiter character must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each message device type loop detector loop module or zone number that is going to be m
212. dionics D6500 Security Receiver Radionics D6500 Security Receiver 6500 MPU 07 00 Program Entry Guide 1993 This interface will require one serial port from the Picture Perfect system The serial port can be any serial port on a multi port Asynchronous Adapter EIA 232 The interface requires one receiver port be configured on the Central 86 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Station system The line and received ID information for the receiver port and the communication parameter information above are required for installation of the Central Station interface software Interface design and operation Picture Perfect will communicate with the Central Station system whenever an alarm condition has been detected or reset When the Picture Perfect host receives an incoming alarm condition that matches with predefined alarms in the Picture Perfect database the interface will generate an outgoing message for the Central Station system that consists of an account number event code and Device ID This outgoing message will be generated in SIA format Similarly when Picture Perfect detects an alarm reset condition it will generate another outgoing message in SIA format The cstgen utility program described in the section Configuration on page 74 allows the operator to specify which Picture Perfect alarms are to be routed to the Central Station system Picture Perfect will act as a formatting agent of incoming alarm events for transfer t
213. e Background Foreground Immediate Dial Required No Yes i Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab Click Find Edit the desired information DA codes ul When completed save the alarm by clicking Save In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 339 340 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when Stentofon 9600 messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect User Manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Stentofon 9600 and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional If the stngen9600 tool is used to uninstall database records any outputs and output groups that you defined will be lost Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configurat
214. e Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Title of this book Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual My overall rating of this book Excellent Very good Good What liked most about this book Satisfactory Fair Poor What I would change add delete etc in future editions of this book Please return this form to Attn Technical Writing GE Security 791 Park of Commerce Blvd Suite 100 Boca Raton FL 33487 or e mail your comments to bctdocs ge com
215. e information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records can be created for each unique device to be recognized For example if you modify the description in alarm record OH Y PA PANIC ALARM to read OH Y PA Panic Bldg 1 Lobby the display will appear as follows The alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select NONE from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the monitor for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 91 Sample alarm screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors AlarmEvents AlarmMessages AlarmResponses l Alarm Description Instructions mua KW ECT 2 a Description OH Y PA PANIC ALARM 1 Facility GLOBAL x E
216. e listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual For the Picture Perfect system e Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Notifier communication program is started For the Notifier AFP1010 or AM2020 system e Notifier Interface Panel AFP1010 or AM2020 equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs Serial Line Cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system s serial port to the appropriate SIB board on the Notifier panel The Notifier Interface uses the printer connections on the appropriate SIB 232 SIB 2048 or SIB NET boards on the Notifier panel The cable should be wired to use the P3 connector pins 1 4 on the appropriate SIB board Figure 5 5 of Chapter 1 Installation of the AM2020 AFP1010 manual Revision C describes the exact wiring that must be used for this interface For the Notifier
217. e select the category for this report When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane 3 oopen an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane then from the toolbar click Run 4 You can open any of the fifteen reports listed in Table 6 on page 77 or any of these five debugging reports e CSTATION Micros e CSTATION Doors e CSTATION Readers e CSTATION Alarms e CSTATION Inputs 79 Examples of how to use the reports are described below Sample reports For example you want to route badge history overflow alarm events for the three micros installed on the system to the Central Station 1 Run the CSTATION BdgHistOvfl report The following report is displayed 80 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 08 27 96 15 29 CSTATION BdgHistOvfl MICRO REC MICRO ID MICRO DESCRIPTION BDGHIS INGRP ALARM ID INPUT GROUP DESC ALARM DESCRIPTION 1 0 MICRO 0 ila 1 8 11 BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW 2 E MICRO 1 ila 2 8 di BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW BADGE HISTORY OVERFLOW From the output you see only two of the three micros are listed indicating a problem with the definition of that micro 2 Run the CSTATION Micros report The following report is displayed 08 27 96 15 30 CSTATION Micros MICRO REC MICRO DESCRIPTION MICRO ID DNSTRM COMM INGRP UPSTRM COMM INGRP BDGHIS INGRP ALMHIS INGRP READER COMM INGRP 1 MICROOila 1 0 9 T 8 12 10 2 M
218. e 4 character Stentofon call handler accepting the remote call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs are used instead of Os Station This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of Os DataN Information that is not important to the Stentofon interface This message type defines a successful connection of the remote pager to the Stentofon Intercom System Note that many type 0507 messages for a station can occur before the connection is established However once the connection is established no further requests will be honored until the pager station has been disconnected Message Type 0206 Call Disconnect The following is the structure of a Type 0206 message line Sync 0206 Call Handler CR LF Call Handler This is the 4 character Stentofon call handler disconnecting a call with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s This message type defines disconnection of a pager from the Stentofon Intercom System 314 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Extended configuration The Stentofon interface supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text stn ttyN cfg cas db text stentofon redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the inter
219. e Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect OH Receiver oh receiver package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package Picture Perfect OH Receiver oh receiver package 235 236 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual For the OH Receiver system OH Network system OH Network Receiver e NX 8E panel e Serial Line Cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system to the OH Receiver The figures that follow reflect the various cable configurations You can create the necessary cable configuration by adding a null modem adapter a gender changer and or a DB9 DB25 serial port adapter to a straight DB9F to DB9M cable Figure 76 Picture Perfect AIX System to OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect AIX OH Network System Receiver o ER DB25F Null Modem Cable DB9F Figure 77 Picture Perfect Linux System with a Digi Port Expander to OH Network Receiver Pictu
220. e Perfect to configure the Commend interface Note Adding outputs and output groups must be done manually using the Picture Perfect graphical user interface Using cmdgen The command line data generator tool cmdgen can be used to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the Commend Intercom System alarm interface It is part of the Commend alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is available when that package has been installed The Commend intercom system is capable of producing a large number of messages for all of the control panels and doors that may be installed For Picture Perfect to monitor the numerous message combinations would require a large number of input group and alarm database records to be entered on the system To add to the complexity there may be more than one Commend Intercom System interface running on a Picture Perfect system The cmdgen tool will aid in the maintenance aspect when there are multiple Commend Intercom System interfaces installed and running When a Commend interface is added or removed the tool can be used to quickly install or uninstall those database records associated with a particular interface This is possible by carefully segregating the input group and alarm database records for each Commend interface running on the Picture Perfect system The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See Cmdgen uninstall on page 106 for an explanation of the u
221. e Vicon Viper viper 48 5 Lr c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual CCTV controller provided by the CCTV manufacturer Refer to your CCTV manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings CCTV cameras and monitors Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CCTV communication program is started Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the CCTV switcher console port Refer to Figure 16 through Figure 25 as appropriate for your CCTV interface Figure 16 American Dynamics cable pinouts terminal block to DB25F and terminal block to DB9F Pin 4 Pin 5 Rx Tx OQ Ee
222. e database Record ID numbers corresponding to the Picture Perfect database objects for which alarm notifications are to be forwarded to the Central Station system Once an alarm has been forward to and accepted by the Central Station system it will be removed from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen Picture Perfect will then assume that the operator has seen and acknowledged the alarm Only forward those alarm events that are to be handled by the Central Station system Selecting Picture Perfect alarm events for Central Station There are several types of alarm events for which alarm notifications can be forwarded to the Central Station system as described in Table 6 Forwardable alarm notification events The table identifies for each type of alarm event the event name and the Picture Perfect database table whose Record ID number is used in the cstgen tool input file The Record ID numbers of populated database tables can be obtained by executing the SQL report whose name is provided in the right most column of the table under the heading SQL Report Name Table6 Forwardable alarm notification events Alarm Event Description Alarm Event Name Database Table SQL Report Name Door Held Open DoorHeld door CSTATION DoorHeld Door Forced Open DoorForced door CSTATION DoorForced nvalid Badge Read InvBadge reader CSTATION InvBadge Suspended Badge Read SuspBadge reader CSTATION SuspBadge Lost Badge Read LostBadge
223. e database before using the uninstall portion of the cmdgen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the Alarm record is associated with any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed no records will be removed and the user will be notified of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the cmdgen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it is does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records that other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Using cmdgen uninstall Before you start e You must have root permissions to run the cmdgen tool e The database must be running The tool will check this when the cmdgen is invoked e You must know
224. e forwarded to the Central Station Follow these steps to invoke the cstgen tool 1 Loginas root orbecome root byusingthe su root command 2 Change to the directory where the input file is located 3 To establish the proper environment that provides access to the cstgen tool and the Picture Perfect database type cas bin profile 4 Type cstgen A typical execution sequence is as follows cstgen Central Station Data Generator v1 0 Enter name of input file or CR to exit my input Processing summary will be written to file cstgen log Validating input file records completed Extracting Picture Perfect Database Information completed Loading Picture Perfect Database Information completed Processing input file records BdgHistOvfl 1 Error Micro Badge History Overflow input group not defined BdgHistOvfl 2 Good Map entry 0 2 2 99 525021099 cstation comm DoorForced 1 Good Map entry 0 75 20 22 525041022 cstation comm Saving cas db text cstation map as cas db text cstation map old Creating new map file cas db text cstation map Saving cas db text cstation input as cas db text cstation input old Creating new data file cas db text cstation input A new map file cas db text cstation map has been created Do you want to inform the system to use the new file y n y Sending signal USR2 to task msan Invalid records were saved in file cstation input bad Saved input file my input as my input processed
225. e information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the acility idthat will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not speci
226. e input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the scsgen tool to determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the scsgen tool are e 1 7 RISC AIX 4 3 3 and higher and Red Hat Linux 7 2 and higher e 2 0 RISC AIX 5L and higher and Red Hat Linux 7 3 and higher e 4 0 RISC AIX 5L Version 5 2 or Red Hat Linux WS ES or AS 4 0 Input file data format The lines of data that follow the Picture Perfect version number should contain rows of delimited text data that describe the message type device type location and alarm description The delimiter character must be the l symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination of message type message account number loop number loop type loop status user number and area number that is going to be monitored Each of the supported message types require variable columns of data and are illustrated in the following sections Message types Column descriptions for A Alarm T Trouble R Restore B Force Arm and W Fault Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Loop Loop Type Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 2 chars 1to 60 characters 1to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits A T R B or W 0 999 BL FA BA SU lor 1 500 HU EM A1 A2 1 2 147 483 647 Note Three additional optional fields may be
227. e input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 LOOP TYPE isatwo character alphabetic string where an incoming SCS 1 numeric type of 0 7 is interpreted internally by Picture Perfect as OZBL 1 FA 2 BA 3 SU 4 HU 5 EM 6 A1 and 7 A2 LOOP STATUS isa three character string description of the loop where valid statuses are ALM TBL RST FRA FLT BYP and LRS Disarmed O Armed C Late To Arm L Message Type To recognize O C L messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt STATUS gt lt USER NUMBER gt lt AREA NUMBER gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string 0 to 99999 STATUS is up to ten characters and can be DISARMED ARMED or LATE CLOSE USER NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 AREA NUMBER is a two digit string 0 to 99 Code Number Deleted p Code Number Added P Code Number Changed U Message Types To recognize Code Number Deleted Code Number Added and Code Number Changed message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt STATUS gt lt USER NUMBER gt lt NUMBER ADDED gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 STATUS is up to twelve characters and c
228. e normally extract from that type of message for the Input Group Description The Alarm Description column will contain as much of the message that was received from the SCS 1 receiver up to 60 characters Line 10 from the Alarm Monitor in Figure 50 is an example of this an S message type for an unknown account number For Unknown alarms of an unknown message type the Location column will contain the Input Group Prefix followed by three asterisks and the message received from the SCS 1 receiver up to 60 characters The Alarm Description will contain the message received from the SCS 1 receiver up to 60 characters Line 9 from the Alarm Monitor above is an example of this the N type message is unknown Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groups section of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the scs XX cfg configuration file
229. e proceeding with the installation You will need the port name defined in the section Defining a port on page 11 and the baud rate You must stop the Picture Perfect application prior to installation If running in a redundant environment Picture Perfect on the redundant backup host must also be stopped prior to package installation If Picture Perfect is not stopped the interface will not start until the next restart of Picture Perfect Follow these steps to install the interface software 1 Log in to the system as root and open a terminal window 2 Type the following to shut down Picture Perfect cas bin profile rc pperf k If running in a redundant environment type cas bin profile pprsemd stop Insert the Picture Perfect installation CD into the CD ROM drive On a Linux system the CD mounts automatically however on an AIX system if you reboot with the CD in the drive you may need to mount the CD If itis necessary to mount the CD type the following when the light on the CD ROM drive stops blinking mntCD If this command is not found type mount v cdrfs o ro dev cd0 mnt Verify that the CD is mounted by typing df k The CD should show up as an available file system mnt The CD should show up as an available file system media Figure 4 Chapter 2 Installing and removing To display a list of installation options type mnt INSTALL i media cdrom INSTALL i A screen
230. eME E E RED MDRR IC nob E HERD UP EVE 201 USING TINGE E RETI LI 201 PUES SUAS TOI aset eig e NT RA dd NORD 3 4 cr A RO 201 lJsinid ntrgen Install 5 25 ieee nep RD EORUELRL Re RR RE Rene Ne D RR eeudieneehanenhe bea III 209 Using nfrgen to generate new device data after an initial installation 0 cece eee eee 213 Using nfrgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation 213 nigen UMAS i daecancedecenctte et exti BU baba areata appetat EE DROITE EES 214 Using Picture Perfect to configure the Notifier interface 20 0 e cence ees 216 DEVICE ty POS P nF m 228 Testing the interface nie bk ada e rbrbekeneevDRRERT nthe RE DAE P EP FREE DERE RETE 229 Advanced configuration 0 ccc ccc cece een hh nnn 230 cas db text motifier tty NIGTg sx i2 Lieu RR e ett ibid a QUSE PRICE ERN 230 cas db text notifierredundantctg oec erre eth eed ede enEnpE P RR Ra 231 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece cence teen ee eee nee eee eee eeenes 232 Configuring an OH Receiver interface ccc cece cece ee eee eee ees 233 Introduction xe boy ex a ave ee teeta Vedi Xe ek RR e n Re RU b 234 Red ridarit systems eseaeece cvv ex come E eats bue ette M CEREREM RS 234 Software requiremernts 5 niente ee P e pU per EP ERPA P eR IEEE DER bee dacadelsacedesad 235 Stand alone System isset ve RR dee i Ina adds PERRO sabes PE 235 Red ridants
231. ect y n yl kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an ALPHACOM controlled alarm D Delete an ALPHACOM controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 35 Deleting an alarm This section describes how to delete an existing AlphaCom Exchange controlled alarm Refer to Figure 12 Example of deleting an AlphaCom alarm on page 36 to see the messages and prompts that display when deleting an alarm When you delete an alarm from the mapping file the Picture Perfect alarm no longer triggers the AlphaCom event Note When the mapped AlphaCom alarm is deleted the mappings for all of the AlghaCom nodes to which an AlphaCom alarm is sent are also removed It is recommended that prior to beginning the deletion process you follow the instructions for printing the map file as explained in the section Printing the map file on page 36 This way you will have the Picture Perfect Alarm Input Group and Location Id as well as the outgoing AlphaCom alarm number of the alarm you want to delete handy Follow these steps to delete an AlphaCom alarm 1 At the Selection prompt type d to delete an AlphaCom controlled alarm A message displays to confirm an alarm is being deleted and you will be prompted for the Input Group Id of the alarm to be deleted Enter the Input G
232. ector Bldg 2 Lobby EST01 0105 Main Floor Alarm 01 06 2005 12 45 55 Smoke Detector Bldg 2 3rd Flr EST01 0106 Room 306 Alarm 01 06 2005 12 46 50 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that uses the input group prefix of ESTO1 and has appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the panel Below is a line by line explanation The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record 176 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Line 1 An alarm condition was detected at a pull station in Building 2 Line 2 An alarm condition was detected at an electrical panel in Building 2 Line 3 A smoke detector alarm was observed in the lobby of Building 2 Line 4 A smoke detector alarm was observed on the third floor of Building 2 EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor Through the defined Condition and Input State fields of Picture Perfect a mapping was established to identify the different types of EST alarms The following mapping exists between the EST alarm condition and what will be seen on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor Table 12 EST Alarm Mapping Alarm Monitor Fields EST Alarm Type Condition Input State Fire Alarm Alarm Open Supervisory Short T
233. ed If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Notifier communication program is started For each Notifier interface panel e A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 69 Figure 69 Cable Pinouts Picture Perfect System to Splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 e Cable to connect the splitter master port to the Notifier port For the Notifier AFP1010 or AM2020 system e Notifier Interface Panel AFP1010 or AM2020 equipped with revision 6 5 or later EPROMs e The Notifier Interface uses the printer connections on the appropriate SIB 232 SIB 2048 or SIB NET boards on the Notifier panel The cable should be wired to use the P3 connector pins 1 4 on the appropriate SIB board to connect to the 25 pin master splitter port Figure 5 5 of Chapter 1 Installation of the AM2020 AFP1010 Manual Revision C describes the exact wiring that must be used for this interface For the Notifier AFP400 system e Notifier AFP400 Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System panel
234. ed below The last three bullets comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the stngen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Table 19 Supported CCTV switcher products Switcher name Manufacturers product designation allegiant Burle Allegiant TC8x0y allplex Burle Allplex TC8928B amdyn American Dynamics grundig Grundig VAZ300 javelin Javelin JO326HI kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 maxpro MAXPRO RD AT100 panasonic Panasonic PFW Model 500 panasonic550 Panasonic WJ SX550A pelco pelcob Pelco CM9750 viper Vicon Viper VPS1330 and VPS1344 295 Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the stngen tool to determine the database input The current versions that are supported by the stngen tool are e 1 7 RISC AIX 4 3 3 and Red Hat Linux 7 2 2 0 RISC AIX 5 1L and Red Hat Linux 7 3 4 0 RISC AIX 5L Version 5 2 or Red Hat Linux WS ES or AS 4 0 Input file data format The lines of data that follow the version information should contain rows of delimited text data that define the paging station identifier the communication activity and optionally a CCTV device or switcher name and the CCTV alarm number The delimiter character between fields must be the I symbol There should be one line of data for each
235. ed parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed max prefix lgth characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one CHEock dE HHHHHHHHHHHHH HHH db db HH HH interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be ESTO1 and the next interface that is installed could be ESTO2 All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting NOTE THE StdAlarmLF and FireAlarmLF VALUES MAY HAVE TO BE CHANGED Upon installation the StdAlarmLF and FireAlarmLF are configured as 4 and 6 respectively On some EST devices it has been noted that an extra LF is generated for each line so the values actually would need to be changed to StdAlarmLF 8 FireAlarmLF 12 To determine what the actual value is if inputs from the EST device which have been configured with an associated PP Alarm Input Group pair are not being annunciated on the Alarm Monitor
236. edundantly The following are the contents of a sample SCS redundant configuration file 4 scs redundant cfg 1 5 Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved Scs redundant cfg 1 5 05 14 02 This file contains the configuration information for the SCS ALARM interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines Tb db Gb db Gb Gb db HH db db o dt RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backup1 Interface data file backup and restore The DMP SCS 1 interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 11 below Normal use of the interface software may cause changes to one or more of these files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The DMP SCS 1 software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect base backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the DMP SCS 1 interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 11 DMP SCS 1 interface data files Data File Name Description cas db text scs cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files isthe port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyDOO1 fo
237. een validated Remember to remove both the pound sign and the error message before re executing the utility Note that you must have root permission to execute the cstgen Validate Accounts Table utility Creating an input file An input file is required when using the cstgen tool It describes the alarm notification events to be forwarded to the Central Station system as described in Picture Perfect output to the Central Station system on page 85 The input file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the cstgen tool During the Picture Perfect to Central Station interface installation process the protected input file cas db text cstation input iscreated This file should never be edited directly Instead copy it to another directory preferably with a different name and edit the copy to add or remove records as desired During processing of the copied file the cstgen utility will construct and install a new protected copy of the cas db text cstation input input file the previous version will be saved as a backup The format and rules for the structure of the input file are discussed in the following sections See the file cas db text cstation input sample foran example of how to populate the input file What you need to know to create an input file 1 The types of alarm events for which alarm notifications are to be forwarded to the Central Station system for each type of Picture Perfect database object 2 Th
238. efined within your system and display the required information The information includes e Alarm Id e Input Group Id e Location Id For example If you want an alarm to be sent to the AlphaCom system whenever the door with the description 000 1 00 DOOR is forced open you must first generate a CCTV Doors Report to obtain the required information Generating a SQL Report Follow these steps to generate a SQL report 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pane select the category for this report When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane 3 oopen an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane then from the toolbar click Run 4 Click Print to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer Mapping CCTV Monitored Events Use the program alphacom map to add delete and print the alarms that are sent to and received from the AlphaCom system The alphacom map program does not allow you to edit an alarm To make changes to an alarm you must first delete the alarm and then add a new alarm If the AlphaCom interface has been configured for a redundant Picture Perfect environment then the changes made to the map file are reflected on the redundant host Refer to the following sections for more information Adding
239. eiver interface This appendix provides information on configuring the OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the NX 8E Ademco Radionix or any panel that can report alarms in SIA or CID formats In this appendix po 007 EM reU 236 SOMONE requirements cioelosnienlesdewbeladonre dps ena gous 237 HardWare r guiremeniy oreore rrer dre eere e Rr Ree de 238 COn 20 1 oie iara aea eid Sates Bees rea PME Hee tA ee 243 Testne Mu HENCE sero dks hae baad E EE bebe alee S 249 Extended con oOo eree dee en he dw pe hed m RE eae 249 Interface data file backup and restore 2 clle 251 234 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the NX 8E Ademco Radionix or any panel that can report alarms in SIA or CID formats It recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It does this by acting as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line When an alarm condition has been detected the OH Receiver interface picks up a unique line Partition Account contained within one of the message lines from the serial port This unique line Partition Account combined with the Receiver number must have been previously set up through the input group form from Picture Perfect along with an associated alarm fr
240. el 940 Proximity Card Reader and the OH2000 Receiver must be installed adjacent to the Picture Perfect host in order to be UL compliant Redundant systems The OH Receiver interface to Picture Perfect will support operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single OH Receiver Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the OH Receiver This allows the physical connection of the OH Receiver to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the OH Receiver software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the OH Receiver However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the OH Receiver 1 The OH Network Receiver is not part of the UL evaluated configuration Software requirements The software requirements for the OH Receiver interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Pictur
241. eld is as follows aaaa PPdata aaaa is the 4 byte ASCII communicator s account number 0000 through 9999 PPdata contains event code and device identification Each Picture Perfect input type corresponds to an SIA event code see Table 8 on page 89 When an alarm event is detected Picture Perfect determines which micro caused the event and uses that information to determine the account number from a site configurable table The message packets sent from the Central Station system to Picture Perfect contains anempty data field The Sequence Number seq field is 0000 for a negative acknowledgment and 0001 through 9999 for a positive acknowledgment Example Messageto Central Station lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt 00010203 1234 Npi123CJ C lt LF gt lt CR gt lt HT gt 00010203 lt CR gt 7C Response from ie number 03 Central Station receiver number 02 sequence number 0001 This response indicates positive acknowledgment of message receipt 89 Communications failures Communication with the Central Station system is a two way process The Picture Perfect system sends messages to the Central Station and the Central Station receives processes and sends a response back to Picture Perfect Picture Perfect will re transmit a message if it receives a NAK response with a 0000 sequence number The maximum number of retries and the delay time in seconds between re transmissions is configurable at t
242. elect a default Stentofon 9600 facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a facility value is not specified in the input file then the default Stentofon 9600 facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a SQL report using as the SQL statement SELECT id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file lt CCTVDeviceName gt lt CCTVNumbers gt and Port fields These fields are optional but if present identify a CCTV switcher which camera is to be controlled when the alarm occurs and which port the CCTV is connected on lt CCTVDeviceName gt Valid values for the field are defined in column 1 of Table 21 Supported CCTV switcher products on page 324 lt CCTVNumber gt This is the CCTV alarm number Refer to the appropriate Picture Perfect CCTV interface document for information on how to specify CCTV information 326 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Port The TTY port on which the CCTV switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port use only the tty portion of the name For example if the CCTV switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 0 system 4 0 01 Request Station 01 Request 1 allegiant o tty2 01 Connect Station amp 01 Connect 1i allegiant 1 tty2 01 B
243. election If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you desire to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait 300 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 13 14 The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 Building 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center Head Office Building 1 Garage Building 2 Garage Building 3 Garage Building 4 Garage Building 5 Garage Head Office Garage 18 Penthouse Press RETURN for more 19 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A 22 Facility B 23 Stentofon Facility Enter the value of the default Stentofon facility 1 23 1 31000 120Y UI i 00 IND ES PRPRPPPP PH UYDUBRWNHNHOW WW Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Stentofon interface This value will be used when creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Stento
244. em you must know the Alarm Id Input Group Id Location Id and the CCTV alarm number These reports detail the alarm conditions defined within your system and display the required information The information includes e Alarm Id e Input Group Id e Location Id For example If you want an alarm to be sent to the CCTV system whenever the door with the description 000 1 00 DOOR is forced open first generate a CCTV Doors Report to obtain the required information Generating an SQL report Follow these steps to generate a SQL report 1 From the Reports menu select the Report menu item then click the Report tab 2 From the Select a Report Category list pane select the category for this report When you select a category the existing reports in that category display in the Select a Report list pane To open an existing report select it from the Select a Report list pane then from the toolbar click Run 4 Click Print to display the Print Preview page From this window you may Save to pdf or Print to your local printer Mapping CCTV monitored events Each CCTV interface package has an assigned prefix American Dynamics amdyn Burle Allegiant alle Burle Allplex allp Grundig grundig Javelin jav Kalatel ktd MaxPro maxpro Panasonic Proteus pfw Panasonic 550 panasonic Pelco pelco Pelcob pelcob Vicon Viper viper Usethe program package prefix cctv map to add delete and print the alarms that are sent to and received from
245. em to OH Network Receiver sssssssssssssssssssssssssesssceccecceseessssssssssssssssssusunuseesseceeeseeeeeeees 236 Picture Perfect AIX system to OH 2000E ue eeesessssssscssssescccceccsssecesssssssnssssusssnusssssessessseseceesesssssssssssssusussusssessecseeseseeseees 257 Picture Perfect Linux system with a Digi Port expander to OH 2000E eee 237 Picture Perfect Linux system to OH 2000E ttti ttttttttttennnenttttttttnttocttt ttt ttti 237 Overview of the stand alone Picture Perfect and OH Receiver interface s 238 Picture Perfect AIX system to Splitter tust nininini nainii 239 Picture Perfect Linux system with a Digi Port expander to splitter s 239 Picture Perfect Linux system to splitter oo ccssssssccscccesceceesessessnsssussssssssssesssessseseeseesesssssssssssssssunsssssseseeceeceseees 239 Cable pinouts Splitter to OH Network RECEIVED Q cccssssssssssssssssssssssssussssessesscseseceeceeseessssssssssssuuusssssssesceceeeseeseseesesseees 239 Cable pinouts Splitter to OFH 2000E u iade eterne iiin 240 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 240 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and OH Receiver interface s 240 Sample input groups screen ttt tttttttt tenni ttt ttttt tette tttttttt ttt ttt ttt tto ttocattiis 243 SGUMPIS CGM Sree EE E scat das aa a eiti i eia 245 Sample Glan MONO SEES i coe amt eatin tit e n e ren ide titio 246 Cable pinouts Picture Pe
246. emoval script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script In a redundant environment messages similar to the following will also appear Bring host backupl up to date with host primaryl Successfully copied primaryl cas db text ktd map to backupl cas db text ktd map Successfully copied primaryl cas db text allp map to backupl cas db text allp map Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty2 Sending signal USR2 to task allp tty3 Sending signal USR2 to task msan 148 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Using Picture Perfect to configure the DMP SCS 1 interface For a successful configuration follow these steps 1 Add or modify input groups for the possible messages Add or modify alarms 2 3 Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired 4 Monitor alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific DMP SCS 1 receiver messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the receiver for a specific device type Due to the numerous device types statuses and possible locations a set of rules must be established for the interface when defining an input group description The rules are basically formatting issues so that the interface can look for matches in the database using input groups in the de
247. en established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the Stentofon interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the Location and Alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor 337 338 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the Stentofon 9600 input group to which it will be linked Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm for example one alarm per paging station but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The alarm description field has no restrictions other than a maximum length of 30 characters or required format since all of the unique information for the intercom s protocol message is located in the input group description However each alarm description in the database must be unique The recommended format for alarm descriptions is to identify the paging station and the type of action that occurred For the example input group descriptions given previously the corresponding alarm descriptions might be as follows Station 01 Request Station 01 Connect Station 01 Busy Station 01 Disconnect An example of a valid alarm record is shown in Figure 126 on page 339 Alternatively a single alarm could be defined for all three actions as follows Intercom Station 7 The Alarm Rou
248. entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you desire to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building 2 Building 3 Building 4 Building 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO BLDG 2 DESIGN AID Security Control Center Head Office Hmpwo ou m5u 0bN Hm 142 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 11 12 13 14 15 12 Building 1 Garage 13 Building 2 Garage 14 Building 3 Garage 15 Building 4 Garage 16 Building 5 Garage 17 Head Office Garage 18 Penthouse Press RETURN for more 19 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A 22 Facility B 23 SCS Facility Enter the value of the default SCS facility 1 23 1 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the SCS interface This value will be used when creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be dis
249. equired No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs lanual Reset Outputs 4 Ls Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records You are now finished with the basic configuration of the RAN package It is important to note that in a network Picture Perfect environment when communications are lost with the remote system someone must be monitoring the alarms on the network host If no terminals are configured to receive alarms or no one is monitoring alarms when communications are interrupted the break in communications will go undetected This would impact the operator monitoring the remote system terminals who may not be aware that alarms are not being routed to that system The lost connection alarm should be routed to a constantly monitored system where the appropriate personnel can be informed immediately When the lost connection alarm is displayed on the Alarm Monitor it displays the Alarm Description and Location from the data just modified above The Condition of the alarm will be either Alarm or Reset and the Input State is always N A Refer to Standalone on page 260 for a discussion of alarm priorities and parameters The process state changes from Alarm or Reset state to Remote when forwarded A sample Alarm Monitor form displays in Figure 102 Figure 103 Alarm monitor form 267 li qx amp gi Q New Alarms 3 Total Alarms 3 Display is now active Highest Priori
250. er Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 2 to 4 digits 1 to 60 chars 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits i I n or N 00 9999 l1 or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type Column one is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce i Secondary Schedule Changed I Temporary Schedule Changed n Primary Schedule Changed N Permanent Schedule Changed Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who changed the schedule It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Alarm Desc Column four is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input field data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use
251. er Port DB25F DB25M e Cable to connect from the splitter master port to the DMP SCS 1 receiver See figure below o NAA B UM Fn HG Uu UM Ww Hp Figure 47 Cable pinouts Splitter to SCS 1 receiver DB25F to DB25F Splitter Master DMP SCS 1 Port Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG Figure 48 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB25F To DMP SCS 1 Receiver To Primary Host DB25F To Redundant Host DB25F DB25M nese aT Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter Figure 49 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intrusion interface 9301432A 123 124 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Configuring DMP SCS 1 The SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line These messages types and formats used by the SCS 1 interface were derived from the SCS 1 Host Output Specification document version 801 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the scsgen data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the scsgen command line t
252. er is only applicable for Zone Disable message types The nfrgen tool will specifically check for the uppercase Z character and that the column is a total of four characters when the Zone Disable message type is used ALARM DESCRIPTION The fourth column is used as the basis for the Alarm Description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This column should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector It can be up to 59 characters in length and either be upper or lower case 203 204 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that nfrgen checks before any data is generated FACILITY The fifth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the nfrgen program you will be prompted to select a Default Notifier Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default Notifier
253. er metr eURRPPREERE SEES NEA ERE A Y REFER E Ed 83 Sirigle device SUpDOPL rrr aa ennai MRR a ae PPM ORC ssbreqedebnndas ag wea d DR amon 84 Interface data file backup and restore ssssssssssssssssssssss I ene en eee 85 Picture Perfect output to the Central Station system 0 cence nent eee 85 Interface port requirements 2 0 2 0 need tb need e e ee e eee ens 85 Interface design and operation iiiisssssssssssssssssssssssssss sss e e een 86 Alarm event triggering of SIA message OUtpUt 0 cece cnn ene e 86 SIA MESSAGE packet ToRmat esee stes o iA ae OGoda dde dbi Er EERRRE EVE 87 Interface specific message packet format 0 cence nee eee 88 COMMUNICATIONS fdil res s echec ERE eR er De PREPARAR ende ex etu etu xo vr UE CEU RR AT 89 Message processing 22s a ret hed bobbed a ahead meninis 1545 crea meen ONU ERE DD 89 vi Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix D Appendix E Configuring a Commend interface cece cece cece eee eee eeeee 91 INTFODUCHON wdc nig ee RO ES ERE UK ERREUR eens ese AN d CU E R E HMM 92 Redundant systems cive Bee ai aias e eret Prid MY RR REP DREAADEIIDPRRERT 92 Software requiremerlts 5 e zhieth er re weht FER UR CREER RU CR RR EUR KR UR e RR Ri Ga keds 93 Standesalorie Systerm zs see ER eter o aa REIN AA ORT dO DEDANS tre ia REPI 93 Redundant System x21 se pe va x cov teet da bidders sae daa RS Epp bittet OES 93 Hardware requirements
254. er ports Refer to Figure 130 Figure 130 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M e Sample ofa cable pinout to connect from the splitter master port to the intrusion system s receiver See figure below Picture Perfect System DB25F o Uu PB UM Ww HG Splitter Port DB25M o Uu 5 UM Ww HL Figure 131 Sample cable pinouts Splitter to intrusion system receiver DB25F to DB25F Splitter Master Intrusion System Port Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG Figure 132 Overview of a cable configuration using a splitter DB25F DB25F To Redundant Host DB25F To Intrusion System To Primary Host Receiver DB25M DB25M DB25M Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 351 352 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 133 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intrusion interface Port 2 Master Port RISC 6000 or PC RISC 6000 or PC Primary Host Smoke Detector Console Port Monitor Intrusion Interface 353 Configuration The Universal Intrusion interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for an external device It is a general interface for processing alarm and device failure messages that satisfy a defined format and are received over a seri
255. ere previously using the multiple device support feature you must re activate the multiple device support feature after installation 43 Multiple device support To configure a Picture Perfect system to support the sending of commands to multiple output devices in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event use the msan set multiple utility A sample execution of this utility is provided below Note You should configure the Picture Perfect software for multiple device support only if commands are to be routed to more than one output device for an alarm event There is a slight performance penalty for this configuration as the output device mapping tables must be fully SEARCHED to find all matches indicating the routing of a command for the specific alarm event To change the Picture Perfect output device support option to multiple perform the following steps 1 Log in to the system as root 2 Enter the command cas bin profile 3 Enter the command cas bin msan set multiple The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan m modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 44 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual
256. erent depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running and this tool can generate different output depending on the version e The paging locations pager station ID s to be monitored e For each paging location whether or not an alarm condition should be generated for the various types of communication activities possible as discussed later e For each paging location and communication activity whether or not that activity requires CCTV activation and if so the CCTV switcher device name and CCTV number There are eleven CCTV switcher products currently supported as listed below The last three bullets comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the stngen9600 tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Table 21 Supported CCTV switcher products Switcher name Manufacturers product designation allegiant Burle Allegiant TC8x0y allplex Burle Allplex TC8928B amdyn American Dynamics grundig Grundig VAZ300 javelin Javelin JO326HI kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 maxpro MAXPRO RD AT100 panasonic Panasonic PFW Model 500 panasonic550 Panasonic WJ SX550A pelco pelcob Pelco CM9750 viper Vicon Viper VPS1330 and VPS1344 325 Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the stngen9600 tool to determine the databa
257. ese steps 1 Defining input groups on page 29 2 Identifying location types on page 29 3 Using SQL reports on page 30 4 Mapping CCTV Monitored Events on page 31 Defining input groups In the Picture Perfect system there are many possible sources of alarms The fundamental concept is that alarms are triggered through input groups There are several components of the system that use input groups These are Areas Doors Readers Input Points Micros Hosts and Input Groups themselves All of these windows allow you to select an input group for the various events that can occur at these locations Only the Input Group window has a field to define the alarm associated with this group To trigger an AlphaCom event for an input point you should create an input group for that point only Then you can associate the AlphaCom event to the alarm on that individual input group and therefore the point itself Boolean input group alarms are not supported in this interface Identifying location types An area is a group of one or more readers and represents a location type A single area may be assigned to multiple readers and doors Areas are similar to input groups in they group a large number of readers together to make configuration easier Unlike input groups areas cannot contain other areas This means that whenever an area event occurs the unique location of the event reader is also reported This gives you the ability to specify the exact
258. est Alarm 01 06 2005 07 02 21 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that used the input group prefix STNO1 and has appropriate input group and alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the Stentofon intercom Below is an explanation of the information shown by the display The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created manually or by the stngen tool The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate input group record which was created manually or by the stngen tool Lines 1 3 Paging Station 1 completed a communication sequence with the Stentofon Exchange It issued a request for communication received a connection and then terminated the connection Lines 4 5 Paging Station 10 is in the process of communicating with the Stentofon Exchange It issued a request for communication and received a connection which has not yet terminated Line 6 Paging Station 3 has requested communication with the Stentofon Exchange but has not yet been connected Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Al
259. et Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Loop f The loop number is a three digit string with a range of 000 999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the acility idthat will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a De
260. eter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must be 5 characters with the last two being numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be STNO1 and the next interface that is installed could be STNO02 H HHHHHHHH HH db db Hb Hb Hb db dO HH HH HH H dt 315 The following values are unique to the STN interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI Icanon y The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix STNO1 PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 7 Parity e StopBits di Xon y Xoff y cas db text stentofon redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Stentofon redundant configuration file cas db text stentofon redundant cfg
261. ette 172 Sample alarm screen 174 Sample alarm monitor screen s 175 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 182 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M eee 183 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 183 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel Interface ss 184 The input ROM SOLS SIA aussi cete eot mr Ete mL Ee Ra te ette eed 187 Theesaldrrms SCEE sisakunata eini i inii 189 Thealarm Montor SCPE CM s t teneo ne AA NE EREE ROON UES 190 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AFP 400 System 25 pin to TB1 197 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Notifier interface ee 197 Cable Pinouts Picture Perfect System to Splitter DB25F to DB25M t 198 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AFP 400 25 pin to TB1 ttt 199 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 199 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 200 Sample input groups screen tette tttttttt nennt titt tnnt tttttt ttt ttt tttttt ttt nnra ntra araar an 224 Sarmple dlarm SGEFe8t uttter te UR E EE RE Def vases 226 Sarriple adlarmotionitef SeFBer cette tette ia e dettes ian 228 Picture Perfect AIX System to OH Network Receiver eese ttt 236 Picture Perfect Linux System with a Digi Port Expander to OH Network Receiver 236 Picture Perfect Linux Syst
262. f the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Firesine communication program is started e A standard splitter box e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 61 Figure 61 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System DB25F o Uu PB UM Ww HG Splitter Port DB25M o Uu 5 UM Ww HG Figure 62 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter DB9M To Redundant Host DB25F To Primary Host DB25F To Firepanel DB25M DB25M HOM Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F Splitter 183 184 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 63 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a Firepanel Interface 185 Configuration Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Firesine fire and other life safety alarms The Firesine Interface for Picture Perfect processes Alert Fault Fire and System Reset messages from the Firesine panel All other Firesine messages such as General Fault Time and Date Zonal Output Control will be ignored In addition it should be noted that because the communications link between Picture Perfect and the Firesine panel is uni directional the Picture Perfect system can
263. face cas db text stn ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the Stentofon device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The Stentofon interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Stentofon device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text stn tty5 cfg stn tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script stentofon inst 1 18 06 18 03 This file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This param
264. face component of Picture Perfect can be configured to issue alarms using the Alarm Monitor screen whenever a camera video signal has been lost Burle Allplex Currently only model TC8298B is supported This interface supports up to ten Burle Allplex TC8298B controllers on a Picture Perfect host computer Grundig The interface between the Grundig Matrix VAZ300 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Javelin The interface between the Javelin Model JO326HI communication arbitrator and Picture Perfect is bi directional and provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras as well as monitor camera video or sync loss Kalatel The interface between the Kalatel KTD 312 Computer Interface Unit and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras The full KTD 312 Computer Interface Unit command set is available to the interface providing support for camera position and zoom operations MAXPRO The interface between the MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras 3 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Panasonic Proteus The interface between the Panasonic Proteus Model 500 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras The Picture Perfect system will communicate with a bridge PC running a Windows program called PFW P
265. faces that Picture Perfect supports In this chapter IU FOJHDHDRE V c641 244 bens Ged deaur hed req ed dde 2 CCTV control systems supported by Picture Perfect lusu 3 Firepanel systems supported by Picture Perfect 2 lle ss 5 Intrusion detection systems supported by Picture Perfect 6 Intercom systems supported by Picture Perfect 0 0000 ees 7 Miscellaneous systems supported by Picture Perfect 8 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction Picture Perfect supports the following types of interface packages Closed Circuit Television CCTV systems Firepanel systems Intrusion Detection systems Intercom systems Other miscellaneous systems These interface groups are discussed in detail in subsequent chapters Chapter 1 Interface overview CCTV control systems supported by Picture Perfect All CCTV control systems can exist in stand alone subhost network host and redundant versions of Picture Perfect Once the CCTV control systems are set up and configured operation of the CCTV control feature will be a hands free procedure American Dynamics The interface between the American Dynamics 2150 and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Burle Allegiant Models TC8500 to TC8901 are supported For controllers providing video loss monitoring and reporting using the controller printer port an optional video loss inter
266. fault SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified 129 in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column descriptions for z Loop Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 5 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8 Msg Type Account Loop Loop Type Loop Status Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 2 chars 3 chars 1 to 60 chars 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits z 0 999 BL FA BA SU ALM TBL RST 1 or 1 500 HU EM A1 A2 FRA FLT BYP or 1 2 147 483 647 LRS Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is con
267. fault SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column descriptions for S System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Msg Type Account Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits S l or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type This column is always S for System Alarm Trouble Supervisory messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Facility The sixth column is used to specify the facility id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid acility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be
268. fied the default facility id specified by the user will be used lt cctvDeviceName gt and lt cctvNumber gt fields These fields if present identify a CCTV switcher and which camera is to be controlled when the alarm occurs lt cctvDeviceName gt Valid values for this field are defined in column 1 of Table 9 Supported CCTV switcher products on page 98 lt port gt The port on which the CCTV switcher is connected Use only the tty portion of the name For example if the CCTV switcher is connected to dev tty4 then use tty4 as the port value Refer to Appendix B Configuring a CCTV interface for information on how to specify CCTV information 99 100 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect system 0 F23 FF13 21 22 F23 FF13 10 30 F23 FF13 12 31 4 F LK 23 STA 13 Request 1 grundig 25510 tty3 F F FF10 FFF3 21 22 F F F F LK 23 STA 13 Clear 0 LK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge 0 LK 10 STA 3 Request 10 grundig 10007 tty3 F10 FFF3 10 30 BLK 10 STA 3 Clear 10 F10 FFF3 12 31 BLK 10 STA 3 Acknowledge 10 F23 FF13 0A BLK 23 STA 13 Release 0 grundig 00301 tty3 F23 FFO1 1D BLK 23 COD 01 Duress 0 grundig 00301 tty3 wW tU UU tU tU w An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section Input group and alarm records generated by cmdgen on pa
269. fied in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 127 Column descriptions for s System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 5 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Message Modifier Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 1to 15 chars 4 digits 1to 60 characters 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits S DEVICE MISSING 0 9999 lor 1 500 DEVICE RESTORED 1 2 147 483 647 or ABORT Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is always s for System Alarm Trouble Supervisory messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Message This column is up to 15 characters in length and contains one of these three valid messages DEVICE MISSING DEVICE RESTORED or ABORT Modifier The modifier is a four digit string with a range of 0000 9999 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm re
270. find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the extended configuration file alphacom cfg 1 6 Gb Copyright C 2000 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved alphacom cfg 1 6 04 21 03 This file contains the configuration information for the AlphaCom interface RemoteConnAlarm Defines the Picture Perfect alarm used to display a communication loss alarm with the AlphaCom system to the operator on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor HHH HH db db db HH OH 39 40 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual db db cb db db db cb Hb HH db db db db HHH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HHH HHH HHH HHH db db db db d RemoteConnInGrp Defines the Picture Perfect input group used to display a communication loss alarm with the AlphaCom system to the operator on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor Each configured AlphaCom has a unique input group but all use the same RemoteConnAlarm alarm NumOfAlphaCom Total number of AlphaCom connected to this interface PipeName PipeSize Defines a buffer area and size for temporary storage of commands when the connection is broken to the AlphaCom system The interface will buffer commands until the area is full or communication is restored MaxRetries The maximum number of additional attempts to resend a command
271. following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt ACCOUNT NUMBER gt lt MSG TYPE gt lt DEVICE ADDR gt lt USER NUMBER gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 00 to 99999 MSG TYPE isthe string ACCS GRNTD DEVICE ADDR is atwo digit string 01 to 08 USER NUMBER is a two to four digit string 00 to 9999 The length of this field is based on SCS 1 programming and is specified for this interface during installation S System Alarm Trouble Supervisory Message To recognize S System Alarm Trouble Supervisory message types use the following format in the input group description The exception to this format is that the following list of S messages do not have an account number S20 S22 S57 S58 S59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S68 S69 S70 S98 S99 154 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER MESSAGE where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters e ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five character alphanumeric string e MESSAGE isa two digit string range 00 to 99 which represents a message lookup into a table of system messages Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each Input Group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type ndividual
272. fon Facility Is this ok y n yl Entera y toconfirm oran n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a v the facility you selected will be displayed and the input data will be checked If there were errors they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors and begin the process again If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Default Facility chosen is Stentofon Facility rr PC cp k kk End of Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion NOI a fa et ta a ay a at Ta fs et a a a a a aah a aa e Em ue pe Ha E a S LE eu e es k Checking input group file data Checking alarm file data Installing Records 15 301 DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAD J328673 Table input group had 12 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 6 row s loaded into it Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE input group Statement processed OK Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE alarm Statement processed OK igd STN01 F401 Request cctvName kalatel cctv 0 kalatel 1548 518 1548 0 ktd tty2 Creating CCTV device kalatel map addition file tmp stn kalatel deltaigd STNO1 F401 Connect cctvName kalatel cctv 1 kalatel 1549 519 1549 1 ktd tty2
273. for the firepanel and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect Communication from the firepanel to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the firepanel and does not send anything back The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the firepanel The Firesine interface acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line When an alarm condition has been detected the Firesine interface picks up a Start of Text STX Hex02 character over the serial connection The character following the STX character an F A or D determines the alarm or message type This is followed by a 6 digit code that along with the alarm type creating a 7 character alphanumeric id is combined with the input group prefix for the interface to create a unique string that is looked up in the Picture Perfect input group table This unique prefix and 7 character id must have been previously set up through the Input Group form in Picture Perfect along with an associated alarm from the Alarm form If there is a match meaning that the prefix and 7 character id was found along with an alarm an alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect and displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor will display the
274. g picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm 173 174 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 58 Sample alarm screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors AlarmEvents AlarmMessages AlarmResponses Description Q amp J XI B x g aay Se E g 2 Alarm Description Instructions Description Pull Station Bldg 2 South Wall Facility GLOBAL Ka wa Priority j 150 Route Definition Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY x 1 Online ii j Color Picker O No Color Picker Ca Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs
275. ge 101 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Un installs are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not un installed using cmdgen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the cmdgen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Commend interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established at installation time of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Commend interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the in
276. ge TENE Rep Epi rr 19 Verifying the installation 4 rte IER DP Ee EID Ro percer RR RERDEROE REESE KE DRE 20 lup ERERUTMUTTIEST 21 Redu uridarntsysteltris 12 2 bectuee reb be dete ete PEE re pee ebbe ed aae ui 22 Configuring an AlphaCom interface cc cece cece ee eee eee eens 23 INTODUCTON concise rere metes eie EA TEN U NO E UC RR opo edel b sate RD EAT ONU maui V Rd 24 Reduridartsystetris i as caseonosso bbb EE E tret bia aepo d bebat e d Ea er d 24 Software requirements ve vea ve ever ane rra e E plv E e YR e eer Wer ree EE 24 Staridsalone Systelm suot stretti aut bei ied ati dama i euet etat detis ete te tet donas 24 Red ridcrit SVSEtelT zii d we ec oat adda e EU HESS a on d dace qe eed dude ue atte ivt 25 Hardware requirements cr ya er ev rere hr eme Ged RIIV E TAY eens 25 Standesglone SYStem ois cesare thbbes d he SERERE RA RR Dass vere riddles HAE UP eat 25 Red ndant systerm usate oos en eeceE E aa a EA san EE UPPER Dba Senn neon oads oan iA 26 Config rdtion ene emere Rete tn hosveren esame etPse eset ust dee ded sve ene de ilem eges 29 Defining Input groups sesers a i a uDecbec PPP RUD S P NIRE pe quisa 29 Ideritifylrig location tVDES vr seed thd diete ee t oa ade Roe e REEERE CEEE RENS 29 being SOL FeDOFS edere beide Up DE ERR Mo Eee bii ed ebd i ERE EE EI 30 Mapping CCTV Monitored Events isssssssssssssssssssssssssses e e e e e eee 31 Adding Wea
277. gen Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database record Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name stn inp Is this correct y n yl To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Ever Enter n to change the name 10 11 12 299 If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 4 to 5 characters with the last character s numeric For example STNO1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n yl To confirm the input group prefix accept the default y by pressing Ever Enter n to re enter the prefix If you entered n you w
278. gen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text scs XXX cfg file where XXX is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the SCS 1 interface for that port Input Group Prefix Usage When Installing When using the install portion of the scsgen tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the SCS 1 interface that is being targeted Input Group Prefix When Un installing The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the scsgen tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 3 to 4 characters will be removed from the database except for the slots that were reserved during package installation for the dynamically created unknown alarms The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the scsgen tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the scsge
279. gment from the Central Station system has been received 2 Acommunications fault has been detected and the message has been resolved by an operator 88 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The main body of the message isthe data field and this portion of the message has the largest amount of variability See Table 8 on page 89 for a full list of messages event codes and corresponding message formats supported by this interface The size of the entire message packet is limited to 128 characters The Central Station system is expected to respond to Picture Perfect with a positive acknowledgment response packet Since Picture Perfect can send up to eight messages without acknowledgments per the SIA standard the Central Station system must indicate using the sequence number field to which message the response applies Response packets from the Central Station system take the general form lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt lt seq gt lt rec gt lt line gt lt CR gt If the Central Station system cannot interpret a message received from Picture Perfect it sends a negative acknowledgment response packet where the sequence number field seq has the special value 0000 Interface specific message packet format The message packets sent from Picture Perfect to the Central Station system contains an account number event code and device identification in the data field portion of an SIA formatted packet The format of this fi
280. group and alarm records generated by stngen on page 297 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Uninstalls are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not uninstalled using stngen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the stngen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Stentofon interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established during the interface s installation for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Stentofon interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a req
281. gure 128 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Intrusion Receiver DB25F to DB25F Picture Perfect Host Intrusion System Computer Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG 350 Ed 5c rt x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 129 Overview of a Picture Perfect system and an intrusion interface Smoke Detector gt Monitor RS 232 NA Intrusion Interface RISC 6000 or PC Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Universal Intrusion system receiver provided by the manufacturer Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Universal Intrusion communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitt
282. h cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 39 95 96 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 39 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitter Port DB25F DB25M NAA PB UM Fn HG Un UM Nw Hp Figure 40 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface 5 97 Configuration The Commend interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined messages that are received over the serial line The messages used by the Commend interface were derived from the Commend protocol as described in Commend Intercom System Message Structure on page 115 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the cmdgen data generator tool 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the cmdgen command line tool Using cmdgen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 108 with the section entitled Using Pictur
283. hanged the RAN interface must be restarted by shutting down and restarting Picture Perfect How long to wait for a connection Because the connection between Picture Perfect and the remote system is over a network that utilizes TCP IP each system immediately knows if the connection between them has been broken for any number of reasons RAN provides for two separate timers that are used in detecting a lost connection alarm The first timer variable called the RemoteConnColdTO is used when the RAN system is started with Picture Perfect During startup there is no connection with the remote system Expect the connection to take some time to be established If the timer expires and a connection with the remote system has still not been made a lost connection alarm is generated The default value for the cold timer is 60 seconds The second timer variable is called RemoteConnWarmTO It is used when the system has already been connected to the remote system When the connection is lost to the remote system this timer is started If the timer expires and there is still no connection the lost connection alarm generates The default value for the warm timer is 10 seconds This allows for a momentary glitch in communications as long as the communications are restored within 10 seconds If any glitch in communications is not acceptable then this timer can be set to 0 seconds for immediate reporting of a lost connection alarm Options for CONN lost alarms
284. he COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CBAS communication program is started e Null modem cable to connect the Picture Perfect system and the Facility Integrator Figure 93 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Facility Integrator DB25F to DB9F Picture Perfect Host Facility Integrator Computer System DB25F DB9F Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx RIS 4 8 CTS CTS 5 7 RTS SG 7 5 SG DSR 6 DCD 8 4 DTR DTR 20 1 DCD 6 DSR 254 2 E E c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 94 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CBAS interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual Facility Integrator system provided by Siebe CBAS Refer to your CBAS manual for dip switch settings Use the default settings Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they
285. he DMP SCS 1 interface that is being targeted for un installation Follow these steps to use the scsgen tool to uninstall database records l Loginas root orsu root if already logged in but not as the root user You should see a prompt Change to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct path environment variable that will give you access to the scsgen tool and the database tools it uses Type scsgen Messages similar to the following appear on the screen SCS 1 Data Generator 1 2 Would you like to i nstall or u n install data records i To use the uninstall option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to un install the SCS 1 database records This is the first 3 to 4 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each SCS 1 interface should have a different input group prefix that is used specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefix and want to continue y n y To continue accept the default y by pressing Ener To stop p
286. he Picture Perfect system to the CCTV switcher printer port Refer to Figure 26 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface Figure 26 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e CCTV controller provided by the CCTV manufacturer Refer to your CCTV manual for dip switch settings They should be set to the default e CCTV cameras and monitors e Serial ports x One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an 53 54 r x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CCTV communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 27 Figure 27 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Pi
287. he customer site during software installation Message processing The Picture Perfect host computer will communicate with the Central Station system whenever an alarm is activated or deactivated that is using micros Upon detecting that an alarm has been activated or deactivated Picture Perfect will format a message and send it to the Central Station system Picture Perfect will only send N type new real time messages Based on the SIA standard for event block data code definitions SIA Digital Communication Standard 1993 and discussions concerning the types of events or incidents likely to trigger an alarm in Picture Perfect the following table was derived which lists the SIA supported event codes and their format Table 8 SIA messages event codes corresponding message formats and Picture Perfect alarms Message Event code Data field portion of SIA message PP alarm device type Open and Close Messages Late to Close CJ aaaa NpidddCJ Door held open door Access Messages Access Denied DD aaaa NpidddDD Unknown badge reader OR nvalid badge reader Door Forced DF aaaa NpidddDF Door forced open door Access Lockout DK aaaa NpidddDk Suspended badge reader Access Trouble DT aaaa NpidddDT Lost badge reader Alarm Messages Holdup Alarm HA aaaa NpidddHA Duress reader Tamper Alarm TA staaaa NpiddaTA Antipassback viol
288. he description field of the input group record A unique Event Code will be required for each specific ALARM type and DEVICE FAIL type alarm This value in combination with the input group Prefix discussed in the following section enables the Universal Intrusion interface to look up in the input group along with the associated alarm for the specific alarm for the panel running that instance of the interface to determine if the alarm should be sent to Picture Perfect The combination Prefix Event Code must be the first item in the description field Other information may follow the input group Prefix and the Event Code portion of the description for a maximum of 60 characters The actual description of the alarm is set up in the Alarm form and tied to each input group Input group prefix The Universal Intrusion interface uses the concept of an input group prefix to more readily identify the input groups that are defined You must use the following combination of the Pre ixand Event Code in the beginning of each input group record description Combine the Prefix with the Event Code of the messages you wish to recognize There must be one space between the Prefix and Event Code The Event Code is described in the section Alarms recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface on page 353 For example For an ALARM type message with Event Code 01010101 for the Universal Intrusion panel with Prefix UI02 attached to port dev tty02 for a
289. he file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Notifier device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text notifier tty5 cfg notifier tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script notifier inst 1 18 06 18 03 This file contains the configuration information for the NOTIFIER Fire alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must m
290. he following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COMO are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Simplex communication program is started Figure 104 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 2 Ed x Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COM
291. he input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the Stentofon 9600 interface that is being targeted Input group prefix when uninstalling The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the stngen9600 tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the Alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Input group and alarm records generated by stngen9600 The input file processed by stngen9600 produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining
292. he options are Input Group Id Alarm Id Location Id AlphaCom Alarm Number or print the report without sorting Continue with step 4 If you selected n to not sort the file the file will be printed and the mapping options display Enter the number of the field you wish to sort on The file will be printed and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option Refer to Figure 13 Example of printing an AlphaCom alarm file on page 37 Figure 13 Example of printing an AlphaCom alarm file URN UN oce eese e ehe e che e ehe sese ehe e see e e see ce che ce che e cheese dece e ce ce ce e ce ce e e e e e he e e ke ke e amp A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection p Print the CCTV controlled alarm translation file Printer name 1p0 Sort the map file y n yl y 1 Input Group Id 2 Alarm Id 3 Location Id 4 AlphaCom Alarm Number 5 Exit Print without sorting Enter the number of the field to sort on 1 request id is 1p0 47 1 file kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom
293. he provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Notifier input_groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y to exit the scriptoran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Notifier interface if you wish then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you want to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait 12 13 14 The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility J DEFAULT FACILITY 2 Building 1 3 Building 2 4 Building 3 5 Building 4 6 Building 5 d BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING 8 BLDG 2 STUDIO 9 BLDG 2 DESIGN AID 10 Security Control Center 11 Head Office 12 Building 1 Garage 13 Building 2 Garage 14 Building 3 Garage 15 Building 4 Garage 16 Building 5 Garage 17
294. her than the Alarm Priority specified on the Setup Parameters window this would be a numerical value equal to or lower the alarm has to be responded to before the Alarm Delay time on Setup Parameters expires If the alarm delay time has expired and no one has responded the alarm is sent to the remote system For example the alarm priority specified on the Setup Parameters window is twenty five 25 An alarm occurs and is sent to Picture Perfect This alarm has a priority of ten 10 Since this priority is less than twenty five 25 which is the alarm priority specified on the Setup Parameters window a countdown begins If the time expires and no one has responded the alarm is sent to the remote system When an alarm has been routed to the remote system the Alarm Monitor changes the process state of the alarm from Active to Remote This confirms that the alarm has not been responded to in time and has now been sent to the remote system When the remote system responds to the alarm its process state changes to the appropriate value pending completed etc Typically the alarm completes and when it resets it is removed from the Alarm Monitor display Networked The networked version of Picture Perfect works in a similar fashion In the networked Picture Perfect environment there is one network host connected to many subhosts When an alarm is received from a subhost it is routed directly to the network host that is the network host Alar
295. hey are as follows PositionDateAlarm The position of the alarm date in the messages received from the remote system PositionTimeAlarm The position of the alarm time in the messages received from the remote system InGrpPrefix The input group prefix for this interface It was Selected during installation and should not be changed AlarmTimeIsSystemTime Indicates whether or not we will use the system time for tagging messages that come in from the remote system or whether the remote system will provide the time of the message ExternalSysAlarmNumLgth Specifies the length of the alarm number that is set from the remote system PortName The name of the port being used by this interface PortBaud The baud rate of the port being used by this interface CharacterSize The size of a character in messages that flow on the port Parity Indicates whether or not parity checking is done on the port StopBits Number of stop bits used on the port Xon Xon port setting from the remote system Xoff Xoff port setting Icanon Icanon port setting EchoAlarm Indicates whether or not ALARM type messages received from the remote system are to be echoed back to it EchoSystemReset from the remote system are to b choed back to it EchoDeviceFail Indicates whether or not DEVICE FAIL messages received from the remote system are to be echoed back to it EchoDeviceReset from the remote system are to be echoed back t
296. ial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon communication program is started e Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 114 Figure 114 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect Splitter System Port DB25F DB25M 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 8 8 20 20 Cable to connect the splitter master port to the Stentofon Intercom System Refer to Figure 115 292 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 115 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25M to Port C Picture Perfect Stentofon TouchLine Host Computer Intercom System DB25M Port C GND 7 Pin 80B GND Rx3 Pin 82B Tx Pin 83B CTS Pin 84B RTS Figure 116 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface uS 53013224 293 Configuration The Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect acts as a filter by recognizing predefined
297. ial up to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection The OH Receiver interface is available for standalone enterprise or redundant systems Chapter 2 Installing and removing This chapter provides information on installing or removing Picture Perfect interfaces on a standalone enterpries or a redundant system In this chapter 47 7 C O m 10 rU Iq AF 11 Installing Picture Perfect base software scele 13 Installing on a Redundant system scele 13 Installing the interface software eee tenes 14 Perit ie Hie THEE chat edhe b ee ee ede y es 20 21 INR D uL eter eefscetatestui Ne Eolo te dns Wes eke toa bet ded Ie E uS 10 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Overview An interface package can be installed at the same time the Picture Perfect system is installed or any time later If installing an interface at the same time that the Picture Perfect base system is being installed follow the base installation instructions in the Picture Perfect 4 0 Installation Manual to install the base package and then refer to this document for interface installation For redundant configurations you must install the Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package before installing the interface software Prior to installation you should configure the port on the interface device for example CCTV switcher receiver panel by which the device will send
298. ick Find Edit the desired information Qu de os do When completed save the alarm by clicking Save Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when Stentofon Exchange messages are received you will need to configure an Output Group and a Output The output group must be linked to the input group for the message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect User Manual All fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Stentofon Exchange and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional If the stngen tool is used to uninstall database records any outputs and output groups that you defined will be lost Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Stentofon interface The Exchange messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the paging station and action fr
299. icture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Facility Integrator and recognizes only alarm and dismissed message types sent from the Facility Integrator as described in the Engineer s Guide Building the FI Database Revision A Part Number MAN FIEG All other messages are ignored The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the Facility Integrator Alarm messages generate entries in the Alarm Monitor containing the prefix CBAS the alarm ID the time value from the message and the alarm type keyword ALARM ALMHI or ALMLO and as much of the alarm description as can be held in the Alarm Monitor s description string Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the Facility Integrator and its associated printer Dismissed messages cause the matching Alarm Monitor entry to be reset The Facility Integrator Computer Is A PC based Platform Communication With The Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection using the PC s serial port The communication is uni directional meaning the interface only receives data from the Facility Integrator and does not send anything back During installation 40 to 200 database slots are reserved in the Picture Perfect Informix input group and alarm tables These represent the number of Facility Integrator alarms of those that Picture Perfect handles that can be simultaneously displayed on the Alarm
300. iguration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 64 The input group screen B Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones D Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Q 4 eal Exo x amp Q Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description FIRESINE F001 FIRE Facility GLOBAL Input Group State Disabled Enabled Open Condition Ignored Detected Boolean Type OR Any O AND All Individual Short Condition Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No O Yes Alarm FSINE DN 101 lt GLOBAL gt Delay Time 0 ital indo Results 1 records Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 2 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups In the Description field of the Input Groups form enter FIRESINES as the search criteria Click Find All of the configured Firesine input groups will be loaded Locate the desired input group on the grid Edit the desired information When completed save the input group by clicking Save 187 188 Picture Perfect 4
301. igured then you will get a message informing you that the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number you specified is mapped to that AlphaCom node number The mapping data you have specified will be added to the alphacom map file You will be returned to step 1 where you may make another mapping option selection If multiple AlphaCom nodes were configured a list will be displayed showing each node number that was configured and the name of the port it is on You will need to enter the node numbers of the 10 33 AlphaCom devices to which the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number you specified is to be sent when the Picture Perfect alarm occurs Enter the Node Numbers The node numbers you specified will be verified against the ones configured and if they are valid you will be asked to confirm the node number selection that you made If the alarm number to node number mappings are correct select y and the mapping data you have specified will be added to the alphacom map file You will be returned to step 1 where you may make another mapping option selection If the mapping data is incorrect select n and you will return to step 9 where you will once again be prompted for the node number mappings 34 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 11 Example of adding an AlphaCom alarm f alphacom map UN tke e he te e e he she e de hehe sese ehe he ce e ee see ehe se ce ehe se ce he che e ce e echec ce e ce e e ce ke kc e ke k
302. ill be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the Stentofon interface IIE mt ah eremi ad ues RE es nue SEA ES dee eu uA ES mee Rd mne es uius toe eu ene ess Reden aah aaa a une EE meus c Re LES eS S ee dum k Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion M s em ese m EE es cem E Ls eue esi estes e EE Exe EE a i end ma E ue aut ER emen k When the input group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility Specifically for the Stentofon input groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n Entera y to exit the scriptoran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Stentofon interface if you so desire then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a s
303. in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Universal Intrusion panel and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Universal Intrusion package The Universal Intrusion messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the alarms form for each alarm The alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the alarm and input group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the panel and location of the reported alarm depending on the descriptive information used in the alarm creation The complete message of the alarm should be read from the Universal Intrusion panel or from a printer hooked up to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Universal Intrusion panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Universal Intrusion interface will show a condition and input state As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times Figure 136 S
304. ine Yes Immediate Reset Input Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing facility and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor and to allow control of CCTV cameras Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 118 Sample alarm screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses nn oC xo V x Qe Alarm Description Instructions Description Station 01 Connect Facility GLOBAL Priority j 50 cute Definition Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY f Online Color Picker O No Color Picker F ss Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Q ves Immediate Dial Required No ves Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs O Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Cl
305. ing value 8 Move to the field STTY attributes for RUN time a b C Delete the default entry Replace with cread clocal Press Ente 9 Move to the field STTY attributes for LOGIN a b c d Delete the default entry Replace with cread clocal Press Erter Note the tty number assigned 10 If multiple interfaces will be configured or you intend to use video loss monitoring and alarm reporting capability repeat step 6 through step 9 as necessary for the additional ports 11 Press to exit the SMIT utility and complete the procedure Installing Picture Perfect base software If you have not yet installed the Picture Perfect base software refer to the Picture Perfect 4 0 Installation Manual for information about installing Picture Perfect base If you have previously installed the Picture Perfect base software continue with the next section Installing on a Redundant system For redundant configurations you must install the Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package before installing the interface software If you have not yet installed the pprs software refer to the Picture Perfect 4 0 Redundant Edition User Manual for more information about installing the pprs package If you have previously installed the pprs software continue with the next section 14 2 x gt x E 2 c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Installing the interface software Befor
306. input group Each Simplex alarm must have an individual input group assigned which includes an eight digit identifier between the and symbols These symbols must be part of the alarm description on the Simplex system however they should not be entered as part of the description on the Picture Perfect system The description field in the Input Group screen which allows for 60 alphanumeric characters as shown in Figure 109 must be such that it is meaningful and must include the eight digit identifier number as part of its description Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group 282 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 109 The input group screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events gm lad4uxe x Qao Define input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description MAIN ENTRANCE STAIR 01010201 Facility GLOBAL Ea Ls Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected puc Type Short Condition O OR Any AND AI Individual Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No
307. input group record which was created Line 1 A panic alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 001 Lines 2 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 002 Lines 3 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 003 Lines 4 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 004 Lines 5 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 02 on Line 1 from zone 006 Line 6 A panic alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 01 on Line 1 from zone 001 Lines 7 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 01 on Line 1 from zone 002 Lines 8 A burglary alarm message was sent from OH Receiver 01 on Line 1 from zone 003 Monitoring events The Event Monitor displays the armed disarmed open close type messages The priority description and the date and time of the occurrence of the event is displayed in priority order Messages of the same priority are sorted by Date Time with the oldest at the top If a record appears on the event monitor the panel described is disarmed Open If no records are displayed all panels are armed Closed Testing the interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface Extended configuration The OH Receiver interface supports an extended configuration that all
308. ion of the Stentofon 9600 interface The intercom messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the paging station and action from the reported alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Stentofon 9600 since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Stentofon 9600 interface will show a condition of Alarm and an input state of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times To remove Stentofon 9600 alarms from the Alarm Monitor use the purge button to remove all alarms or click on the alarm to bring up an individual window and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect received the message from the Stentofon 9600 device Figure 127 Sample Alarm Monitor screen w Alarm Monitor 7 LU UT Ju k Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor
309. ions NFR1 TROUBL SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACK TB SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 CLR TB SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACL TB SMOKE ION 905 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Zone Disable Message Type To recognize Zone Disable message types use the following format in the input group description 219 IGP STATUS DEV TYPE ZXXX where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS can be one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB or ACL TB e DEV TYPE is one ofthe zone device types in Table 13 Device Types on page 228 e ZXXXis the zone identifier Z and zone number XXX 1 240 For example to configure for a FORWARD ZONE with a zone number of 150 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 TROUBL FORWARD ZONE Z150 NFR1 ACK TB FORWARD ZONE Z150 NFR1 CLR TB FORWARD ZONE Z150 NFR1 ACL TB FORWARD ZONE Z150 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation System Trouble Message Type To recognize System Trouble message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt STATUS SYSTEM TROUBLE where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS can be one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB or ACL TB e SYSTEM TROUBLE is a fixed field Note When monitoring this message type
310. iority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 128 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Column descriptions for X Loop Bypass and Y Loop Reset Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account Loop User Alarm Facility Priority Description 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 3 digits 1 to 60 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 characters digits X or Y 0 999 0 999 I or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Note Three additional optional fields may be specified identifying a CCTV switcher name see the list of Picture Perfect supported CCTV names in the section Mapping CCTV monitored events on page 59 such as kalatel or allplex a CCTV number the CCTV alarm number that will be sent to the switcher when the SCS alarm is received and the TTY port by which the switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce X Loop Bypass Y Loop Res
311. is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a DMP SCS 1 device attached to the dev tty5 Scs tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix CASI All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script Scs inst 1 5 5 14 02 This file contains the configuration information for the SCS alarm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect System must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix that the interface will use to recognize specific input group database records using this prefix The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed 4 characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in db db db db db db db db db db db Hb db HHH db dt dt db HH H dt here will be read when the interface is started If more than one 161 interface is installed then the input group prefix
312. is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Column Descriptions for p Code Number Deleted P Code Number Added and U Code Number Changed Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account User Added Alarm Description Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 3 digits 3 digits 1to 60 characters 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits p PorU 0 999 0 999 lor 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations p Code Number Deleted P Code Number Added U Code Number Changed Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Added The number added is a 3 digit string with a range of 000 999 Alarm Description The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and
313. itcher products on page 294 296 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual lt CCTVNumber gt This is the CCTV alarm number Refer to the appropriate Picture Perfect CCTV interface document for information on how to specify CCTV information lt Port gt The TTY port on which the CCTV switcher is connected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port use only the tty portion of the name For example if the CCTV switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 0 system 4 0 F401 Request Station F401 Request kalatel 0 tty2 F401 Connect Station F401 Connect kalatel 1 tty2 F401 Disconnect Station F401 Disconnect kalatel 2 tty2 F110 Request Station F110 Request kalatel 1 tty3 F110 Connect Station F110 Connect kalatel 2 tty3 F110 Disconnect Station F110 Disconnect kalatel 3 tty3 FFF3 Request Station FFF3 Request kalatel 4 tty3 FFF3 Connect Station FFF3 Connect kalatel 5 tty3 FFF3 Disconnect Station FFF3 Disconnect kalatel 6 tty3 FFFO Request Station FFFO Request kalatel 1 tty2 FFFO Connect Station FFFO Connect kalatel 2 tty2 FFFO Disconnect Station FFFO Disconnect kalatel 3 tty2 An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section Input
314. ite the oldest alarm Redundant Systems The DMP SCS 1 system interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single intrusion receiver Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the DMP SCS 1 receiver This allows the physical connection of the intrusion receiver to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the DMP SCS 1 interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the DMP SCS 1 receiver Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the receiver is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the DMP SCS 1 receiver Software requirements The software requirements for the DMP SCS 1 system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect DMP SCS 1 interf
315. ith the Stentofon 9600 It issued a request for communication and received a connection which has not yet terminated Line 6 Paging Station 3 has requested communication with the Stentofon 9600 but has not yet been connected Testing the Interface Once the input groups and alarm database records have been set up and the interface is running it should be tested to make sure messages are being correctly recognized by the interface The Alarm Monitor should receive the appropriate messages if they have been set up correctly If the Alarms are not being shown on the Alarm Monitor then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groupssection of this document Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the stn9600 ttyN cfg configuration file Also check the alarm routing field of the corresponding alarm record to make sure that the routing includes Monitor If there is a printer hooked up to the Stentofon 9600 then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do
316. itor DISPOSE Equivalent of pressing Remove on the T ck cb cb cb Gb bb kb bb Gb DE kB Gb Gb bb WE db HHH HHH db GE H monitor If is a set alarm goes to Completed state If immediate reset or already received the reset then it is removed from the monitor PURGED Equivalent of pressing Purge on the monitor Removes the alarm from the monitor regardless of state RemoteConnResetReqd Yes RemoteConnColdTO 60 RemoteConnWarmTO 10 ReplyToAlarmTO 5 PipeName tmp CAD pipe PipeSize 100 RANRedundant No AlarmLossChk Yes The following values should only be adjusted by qualified GE Interlogix CASI Support personnel MaxBindRetries 120 AlarmDisposition DISPOSE These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RemoteConnAlarm 33778 RemoteConnInGrp 33778 ReplyToAlarm 33779 ReplyToIngrp 33779 269 Variables that require a yes or no setting take either yes no true or false Any line that begins with the pound symbol or a space is a comment line and is not construed as a variable setting To modify the settings of any of these variables you need to edit the cas db text rantcpip cfg file with an editor such as vi The permissions on this file are read write for the super user and read only for all other users This means that only the super user has authorization to modify this file Note Any time a variable in rantcpip cfg is c
317. itored which includes the account number loop number loop type loop status user number and area number This kind of report can be obtained from the SCS 1 receiver Creating an Input File The input file describes the types of messages and devices to be monitored by the DMP SCS 1 interface It is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the scsgen tool 125 To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important since the layout of the database records may differ depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running e The message type you wish to monitor for a device type The message types that can be monitored are discussed in later sections e For each device to be monitored the device type and one of the following depending on the message type account number loop number loop type loop status user number and area number A report containing the installed devices can be obtained from the SCS 1 receiver Please see your SCS 1 operation manual e A brief description that gives more detail about the device This information will be used as the alarm description field for an alarm record The last three check boxes comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the scsgen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Picture Perfect version The first line of th
318. ived by Picture Perfect a message is sent to the CCTV system to turn on the linked CCTV cameras and monitors The CCTV system will then control the appropriate cameras and monitors No operator intervention is required As an alarm is cleared by the operator from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen the CCTV system will be informed that the alarm has been reset and the appropriate camera will turn off The CCTV interface to Picture Perfect supports the configuration of multiple CCTV devices connecting to the Picture Perfect host Refer to Figure 26 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CCTV interface on page 53 Redundant systems The CCTV interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single CCTV switcher Connectivity is achieved by using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the CCTV switcher This allows the physical connection of the CCTV switcher to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the CCTV interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the CCTV switcher Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redunda
319. k station data after an initial installation If there are new block stations to be monitored by the Commend interface after an cmdgen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the cmdgen tool If you are going to be changing block station data in the input file for existing database records then use Method 2 below 106 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke cmdgen and use the new input file Method 2 1 Use cmdgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Output and output group information is lost whenever the cmdgen tool is used to uninstall database records 2 Modify or add the new block station data to the input file 3 Invoke cmdgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records Cmdgen uninstall This portion of cmdgen removes the database records associated with a specific Commend interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup th
320. ke to delete For example The following Picture Perfect packages are currently installed base graph image impexp kalatel Enter the name of the package to remove Type the name of the package you are removing for example kalatel Messages similar to the following will be displayed Removing the kalatel package Picture Perfect Kalatel interface package removal Version 1 2 7 6 02 Removing tty2 entry for Kalatel interface from the port database table Updating Picture Perfect backup configuration The Kalatel CCTV Interface package has been completely removed from the system Exiting 22 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The removal process has completed Program Exiting The system needs to be rebooted for the changes to take effect Reboot the system y n y Enter y the default value to reboot the system or type n if you do not want to reboot at this time Redundant systems If the interface package was running in a redundant Picture Perfect environment then you will also see messages similar to the following Redundant kalatel interface configuration detected This host primaryl Other host backup1l Redundant kalatel operation is ENABLED Map file changes will be reflected on the other host Updating Picture Perfect backup configuration Removing entry for Kalatel interface from the port database table Removing redundant Kalatel interface installation from the remote system
321. l port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the EST communication program is started 168 be E c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 53 Overview of a stand alone Picture Perfect and a Firepanel interface 5301130018 Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual EST panel with available printer port connection provided by the manufacturer Serial line cable to connect to the splitter master port to the EST system This cable should be a standard RS 232 serial cable that would normally work with a serial printer connected to the EST panel Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the EST communication program is started A standard
322. larm for example one alarm per block station input group record but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The alarm description field has no restrictions other than a maximum length of 30 characters or required format since all of the unique information for a Commend protocol message is located in the input group description However each alarm description in the database must be unique The recommended format for alarm descriptions is to identify the block station and the type of action that occurred For the example input group descriptions given previously the corresponding alarm descriptions might be as follows BLK 23 STA 13 Request LK 23 STA 13 Clear LK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge LK 23 STA 13 Release LK 23 COD 01 Duress w t tu w An example of a valid alarm record is shown in Figure 42 Sample alarm screen on page 112 Alternatively a single alarm could be defined for all three actions as follows BLK 23 STA 13 The Alarm Routing should be set to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist 112 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows e Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Se
323. larm from occurring The initial settings are shown in Figure 101 Figure 101 Input groups form 63 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Uf Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description a EE X 5 4 x amp 9 Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description REMOTE ALARM HOST Facility GLOBAL Input Group State Disabled Enabled Boolean Type OR Any O AND All Individual Broadcast State Changes No Yes Al Delay Time sl Results a x Open Condition Ignored O Detected Short Condition Ignored Detected larm REMOTE HOST NOT RESPO 229 mill mom 1records 5 When completed save the description by clicking Save 265 Follow these steps to modify the alarm description 1 2 3 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms form enter REMOTE as the search criteria Click Find Result At least two alarm entries will be found Locate the REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN LOST alarm in the grid Edit the Alarm Description field Note This alarm description displays in the Alarm Description column on the Alarm Monitor form Therefore you may want to enter a specific alarm desc
324. larms Adding or modifying output groups and outputs if desired Monitoring alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description is the key to identifying specific Stentofon Touchline Exchange protocol messages The format of the description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the Exchange for each paging station as identified in the Exchange protocol as described in Message types on page 342 The following is the structure of an input group record description lt IGP gt lt IntercomStation gt lt MessageType gt lt IGP gt 336 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The 5 character input group prefix described on page 326 lt IntercomStation gt This is the 2 character Intercom Station identifier valid values are 01 through 96 as described in Message types on page 342 lt MessageType gt Identifies the type of message and is one of Request Connect Busy or Disconnect corresponding to the Intercom protocol messages as defined in Message types on page 342 There must be a single period between the parts of the input group record description and spaces are not allowed anywhere within the description This structure must be followed in defining input group records so that the Stentofon 9600 interface software can look for matches in the database using input group descriptions constructed from protocol messages received from the Intercom For
325. ld have four input groups that could point to one alarm record The alarm record could further describe the location of the detector An example of this alarm record is shown in Figure 49 The Alarm Routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows e Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Immediate Reset Input Yes Set the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 51 Sample Alarm Screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description 10 e uExo4 x Qno l Alarm Description Instructions i Description USER 666 CHANGED TO 555 Facility GLOBAL x ra ra Priority 1 Route Definition Yes inhibit Schedule Changes 50 Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY df
326. llow these steps to add a Simplex alarm 1 2 3 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab Complete the Alarms form Make sure that Alarm Routing is set for at least MONITOR but preferably MONITOR AND HISTORY Online and Inhibit Schedule Changes are set to Yes Reset Outputs is set to Auto Reset Outputs so the alarm can be removed from the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor without being reset Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 110 The alarms screen Facilities Micros Alarms Alarm Colors Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses J Description l Results 0 records Qa gx 54 X Alarm Description Instructions Description SIMPLEX ALARM Facility GLOBAL Priority 50 Route Definition Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY 229 Online Color Picker No Color Picker Yes Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes O No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input O No Yes Immediate Dial Required No Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Duration Reset Outputs 284 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to modify the alarm 1 Select Configuration
327. local and remote sites from a single location In this appendix MUOGA ON i Re RESET CbRE RR DER ad a Di vU ou aos 72 CE oou d Gal Od ede odd edite ets RU 74 Advanced configuration ccce 82 72 x r c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Central Station interface provides a communication mechanism between Picture Perfect and central monitoring systems that allows control of activities for multiple systems and both local and remote sites from a single location The interface supports the ABM Data Systems Inc and Monitoring Automation Systems MAS Central Station products Once Picture Perfect and Central Station interface systems are set up and configured alarm notifications are routed from Picture Perfect to the Central Station system for handling This allows monitoring and response to activities from the Central Station system The first step is to set up the Picture Perfect system and configure the Central Station system for a new receiver or verify set up if this is an existing system Refer to the Central Station system product documentation for configuration information Next specify to the Central Station interface which alarms are to be routed to the Central Station system After this has been accomplished alarm notification events will be routed from Picture Perfect to the Central Station system automatically without operator intervention Detailed information on the specific
328. lowing 21 22 request 10 30 clear 12 31 acknowledge OA release 1D duress Note These message types are searched for in the Commend interface software when searching for the alarm record The Commend software will be unable to locate any others without modification There must be a single period between the parts of the input group record description and spaces are not allowed anywhere within the description This structure must be followed in defining input group records so that the Commend interface software can look for matches in the database using input group descriptions constructed from protocol messages received from the Commend system For each block station that is to be monitored you should define an input group record for each message type An example of the input group record descriptions to monitor Block FF23 Station FF13 for a Commend interface using input group prefix CMDO7 is CMD0O7 FF23 FF13 21 22 CMD0O7 FF23 FF13 10 30 CMD0O7 FF23 FF13 12 31 CMD0O7 FF23 FF13 0A CMD07 FF23 FF13 1D See Figure 41 Sample input groups screen on page 110 for an input group record containing a valid input group description The procedure for adding or modifying input groups is described below Note that alarm records must be created prior to input group records as you must specify the alarm when defining the input group record A description of the procedure for defining alarm records may be found in Adding or modifying alarms
329. lphaCom Exchange to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the AlphaCom interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the AlphaCom Exchange Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the AlphaCom Exchange is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the AlphaCom Exchange Software requirements The software requirements for the AlphaCom interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Alphacom interface alphacom package gt E r c x 25 Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e Picture Perfect Alphacom interface alphacom package Hardware requirements The hardware requiremen
330. m This section describes how to configure a redundant system The instructions are listed below Informational messages followed by a question display to give you the option of installing the interface on a redundant host The messages will be similar to the following Updating Picture Perfect backup configuration Picture Perfect backup configuration update completed Is this interface to run in a redundant Picture Perfect environment y n n 1 Press y to accept the default setting or n depending on whether or not the interface is to run in a redundant Picture Perfect environment If you selected n skip to Configuring additional interfaces on page 19 as the installation process for this interface is complete If you selected y a message similar to the following will appear Installation MUST be performed on the primary host It is assumed that this host primaryl is the primary host The redundant host name must be different from the primary host name Please enter the name of the redundant host 2 Enter the name of the redundant host The host name you specified will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Redundant host is backupl Is this correct y n yl 3 Entery to accept or press n to change the redundant host name If you selected n you will be asked to re enter the redundant host name If you selected y the following messages will appear Checking to verify backupl is reachable
331. m accept the default y by pressing Ene Enter n to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script 143 144 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual If you entered y a message will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script In a redundant environment messages similar to the following will also appear Bring host backupl up to date with host primaryl Successfully copied primaryl cas db text ktd map to backupl cas db text ktd map Successfully copied primary1 cas db text allp map to backupl cas db text allp map Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty2 Sending signal USR2 to task allp tty3 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using scsgen to generate new device data after an initial installation If there are new devices to be monitored by the SCS 1 interface after an scsgen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the scsgen tool Use these methods when you are adding new devices to be monitored by the interface If you are going to be adding or changing message types in the input file for existing database records then proceed to the Using scsgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation on page
332. m Monitor contains all of the alarms on the system If all the alarms are to be routed to a single remote system then the RAN package should be loaded on the network host and the RAN process flow will be the one described previously for the standalone configuration If a different remote host will be handling the alarms from each subhost then each subhost should be loaded with its own copy of the RAN package and similarly the RAN process flow will be the one described previously for the standalone configuration 261 Redundant In a redundant configuration the RAN package executes on both Picture Perfect hosts Both the primary and backup hosts are connected to the remote system using two ethernet networks thus the remote system needs to have two network cards to run in this environment The RAN subsystem on both hosts produces the alarms but only the software running on the primary host routes the alarms to the remote system using the primary network If one of the networks goes down communication switches to the other network In the case of a failover the RAN software on the redundant host takes over the routing of alarms to the remote system Note During installation RAN may be configured to safeguard against alarm loss during failover This means if the redundant host did not receive a response to an alarm sent by the primary host the redundant host resends the alarm when it takes over as primary Software requirements The softw
333. m alarm central receiver and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix M sn MC 118 HOPPE FegWDementg ocolos ou ree breed ae ba 119 Hardware requirements esee 120 Configuring DMP SGF otk chee los iR ee RE ES 124 Advanced Cont sro cess seen eee oeste ee e inc 160 Interface data file backup and restore 2 llle 163 118 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The DMP SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intrusion system alarm central receiver and recognizes only the predefined messages types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect These predefined messages are of the format and description as defined by the SCS Host Output Specification document version 801 The interface will display as much of any unknown messages as it can The Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor may be used to monitor messages from the DMP SCS 1 receiver The information displayed in the Alarm Monitor will show the account number status loop and detector module number and a user defined description field of message types known to the interface Messages for an unknown account number but a known message type along with messages of an unknown message type will also be displayed For these messages the Location field Input Group Description on the Alarm Monitor will begin with the Input
334. m that the mapping file has been changed However if Picture Perfect is restarted the current mapping file is read automatically In other words all your changes will be read at that time whether or not you are done with them Refer to Figure 15 Example of exiting the program on page 39 to see the prompts and messages that display when exiting from the alphacom map program Figure 15 Example of exiting the program T UN tke ee te e ehe ce he e he he se se ehe she see hee see ehe se se EKER ehe e ce ce ee ce ce e ce e ce ke kc ke k ke ke amp A Add an AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection x You have made changes to the mapping file Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n Y Sent SIGUSR2 signal to AlphaCom interface task alphacom comm on this host Sent SIGUSR2 signal to AlphaCom interface task msan on this host Se A Advanced configuration The AlphaCom interface software supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the cas db text alphacom cfg file The file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you
335. matically generate AlphaCom alarms in response to Picture Perfect alarms for Picture Perfect alarms that have been mapped to the AlphaCom alarms The messages sent to the AlphaCom Exchange follow the format described in the AlphaCom Data Protocol System Integration Implementation 1999 09 30 The interface between the Stentofon AlphaCom Exchange and Picture Perfect is bi directional with the option to configure the AlphaCom interface to resend messages if communication is lost The first step is to configure the Picture Perfect system and the AlphaCom Exchange or to verify the set up if this is an existing system Next use the provided alphacom map script to link or map the desired Picture Perfect alarms to the appropriate AlphaCom Exchange alarms When the mapped alarm is received by Picture Perfect the AlphaCom alarm to which the Picture Perfect alarm is mapped is sent to the AlphaCom Exchange No operator intervention is required The AlphaCom interface supports the configuration of multiple AlphaCom Exchange devices being connected to the Picture Perfect host limited by the number of available ports Redundant systems The AlphaCom interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single AlphaCom Exchange Connectivity is achieved by using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the AlphaCom Exchange This allows the physical connection of the A
336. may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the CBAS communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 95 Figure 95 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F TO DB25M e Null modem cable to connect from the splitter master port to the Facility Integrator PC s serial port Picture Perfect System DB25F ON Uc UM mw PB Splitter Port DB25M U UM Ww HG See figure below Figure 96 Cable pinouts splitter to Facility Integrator DB25M to DB9F Splitter Master Port DB25M Tx Rx RTS CTS SG DSR DCD DTR 20 Oo mn FW DY Facility Integrator System DB9F an On W aor 5 Rx Tx CTS RTS SG DTR DCD DSR Figure 97 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter To To Redundant Host DB25F Splitter To Primary Host DB25F DB9F CBAS System 4 DB25M DB25M DBRN Master Port 1 Port 2 Port DB25F DB25F DB25F 255 256 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 98 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CBAS interface 257 Extended configuration The CBAS system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in
337. mber lost input grp lost badge input group record number unk input grp unknown badge read input group record number apb input group anti passback violation input group record number duress input group duress input group record number 76 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Table 5 Database tables referenced by the cstgen tool continued Table Field Name Description input group id input group record number alarm alarm record number input id input record number input group input group record number alarm id alarm record number host id host record number hcomm_ingrp host communication failure input group record number 1 Host information is present only in an enterprise networked Picture Perfect configuration Assigning account numbers The Central Station interface requires that alarm notification messages contain an account number This account information is specific to the Central Station system and not a part of the Picture Perfect system The Picture Perfect to Central Station interface software uses an accounts table to define the account numbers required by the Central Station system This table contained in the file cas db text cstation accounts table provides a Central Station account number for each Picture Perfect micro defined in the Picture Perfect database The table must be created prior to using the cstgen tool and should be updated
338. mera 1 for this input group specification After CCTV switcher mapping table files are updated signals may be sent to the CCTV switcher interface tasks to force a reload of the mapping files to make CCTV control for the Stentofon active There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly 298 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Using stngen install Before you start You must have root permission to run the stngen tool The database must be running The tool will check this when stngen is invoked and if not attempt to start it A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section nput group prefix on page 296 for more information Follow these steps to use the stngen tool to install database records l 2 3 4 5 Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen tool and the database tools it uses Type stn
339. mpted for the CCTV alarm number Enter the CCTV alarm number The mapping file is checked to see if there are any lines that match the information entered e If there are no lines the message NO MATCHING LINES FOUND displays and the mapping options display e Ifa matching line is found you are asked to confirm the deletion If the entries are correct select y and all matching lines in the mapping file are removed and the mapping options display If you select n the mapping options display Refer to the section Exiting the program on page 66 for more information about making changes and exiting the program Refer to Figure 31 Example of deleting a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 63 Figure 31 Example of deleting a Kalatel CCTV alarm oe ktd_cctv_map TN ecce ee ce she eee se e ehe e EERE EEE EERE EKER ERE ce che ce ce e che ce he cede he cech echec ce ce cese ck ce e ke kc e kv A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection d Deleting an outgoing CCTV controlled alarm Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Location ID 1 999999 45 When installing you configured the kalatel interfaces to use the following ports tty5 tty7 Enter the name of the port t
340. n explanation of the uninstall portion Note Ifthe Notifier interface is running in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment nfrgen must be run on the current primary machine only The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep the database updates made by nfrgen on the primary machine over to the backup machine nfrgen install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Decide whether you would like the fixed message types installed e Create a list of the points that are going to be monitored which includes the device type loop detector loop module or zone number This kind of report can be obtained from the Notifier panel Creating an input file The input file describes the types of messages and devices to be monitored by the Notifier fire alarm interface It is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the nfrgen tool 202 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Before creating an input file you will need to know The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important since the layout of the database records may differ depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running The message type you wish to monitor for a device type The message types that can be monitored are discussed in later sections For each
341. n field just like the input group records The alarm record description field generated for the fixed message types is NOTIFIER PANEL For example if the input group prefix used is NFR1 and the fixed message type is SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED then you would find the following input group description NFR1 SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED The associated alarm record that this input group would point to would have the description NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL Input group and alarm records generated by nfrgen The input file processed by nf rgen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix message status possibilities device type and loop detector or zone number into the description field of an input group record For example use the following line of data and assume an input group prefix of NFR1 A SMOKE PHOTO 103 BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 25 10 This message would generate e four input group records with a facility id of 25 and the following description fields NFR1 ALARM SMOKE PHOTO 103 NFR1 ACK AL SMOKE PHOTO 103 NFR1 CLR AL SMOKE PHOTO 103 207 208 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual NFR1 ACL AL SMOKE PHOTO 103 e One alarm record would be generated with a facility id of 25 a priority of 10 and the following description field BLDG 3 ROOM 7
342. n tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This prevents accidental removal of alarm records linked to other input group records Input Group and Alarm Records Generated by scsgen The input file processed by scsgen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix message status possibilities device type and loop detector into the description field of an input group record For example let s use the following line of data and assume an input group prefix of SCS1 A 12345 123 HU BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 23 25 kalatel 12 tty2 This message would generate one input group record with the following description 139 SCS1 12345 123 HU ALM e one alarm record would be generated with the following description BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD The input group record would be linked to this alarm In addition a new entry specifying that CCTV camera 7 connected to the Kalatel switcher should be activated when this alarm occurs will be added to the Kalatel switcher map file There are other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically are completed by the generator For the input group reco
343. n was selected you will return to the 4 prompt or back to the removal script If y was selected messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task grundig comm Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using Picture Perfect to configure the Commend interface For a successful configuration follow these steps l Adding or modifying input groups for the three possible message types for each block station to be monitored Adding or modifying alarms Adding or modifying output groups and outputs if desired Monitoring alarms Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description is the key to identifying specific Commend protocol messages The format of the description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the Commend system for each block station as identified in the Commend protocol as described in Commend Intercom System Message Structure on page 115 The following is the structure of an input group record description lt IGP gt lt Block gt lt Station gt lt MessageType gt 109 lt IGP gt The 5 character input group prefix described on page 107 Block Station This is the 4 character block station identifier valid values are FFF1 through 9999 as described in Commend Intercom System Message Structure on page 115 MessageType This is the type of Commend activity and is one of the fol
344. nd the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Checking input group file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAB C705595 100 Row s loaded so far to table input group Table input group had 117 row s loaded into it 100 Row s loaded so far to table alarm Table alarm had 114 row s loaded into it Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE input group Statement processed OK Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE alarm Statement processed OK Added entry SCS1 20 1278 296 Added entry SCS1 22 1280 298 Added entry SCS1 99 1349 367 igd SCS1 30122 123 HU ALM cctvName kalatel cctv 12 kalatel 1239 260 1239 12 ktd tty2 igd SCS1 23411 LATE CLOSE 333 01 cctvName allplex cctv 99 allplex 974 414 974 99 Generated 2 new entries for CCTV switcher device kalatel map table Generated 4 new entries for CCTV switcher device allplex map table Successfully appended new entries to map table for CCTV deviCei iC a4 9e 3 OMS dee sds Oe Ca Ows dus eecueerialabel Successfully appended new entries to map table for CCTV device ica ei bes by Ws eR enses oi bee i ee taliplex Installation complete You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n yl To inform the syste
345. ndition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be BLANK Output Group should all be BLANK Facility Facility id specified for this input group alarm pair The default values for the alarm records are Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority 50 Facility Facility id specified for this input group alarm pair Using stngen9600 install Before you start You must have root permission to run the stngen9600 tool The database must be running The tool will check this when stngen9600 is invoked If the database is not running the tool will attempt to start it up A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon 9600 interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section nput group prefix on page 326 for more information Follow these steps to use the stngen9600 tool to install database records 1 GP ee qe Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you acce
346. ne line at a time Redundant systems The Stentofon Touchline Intercom System interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Touchline Exchange Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Touchline Exchange This allows the physical connection of the Stentofon Touchline Intercom System to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Stentofon Touchline Intercom System interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the Touchline Exchange However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Touchline Exchange gt x c x 289 Software requirements The software requirements for the Stentofon interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required
347. nected to the Picture Perfect host When specifying the port only use the tty portion of the name For example if the switcher is connected on dev tty2 only specify tty2 Msg Type This column is always z for loop messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 Loop f The loop number is a three digit string with a range of 000 999 Loop Type The loop type is a two character alpha numeric string that corresponds to an SCS 1 numeric type range 0 7 interpreted as follows 0 BL BLANK 1 FA FIRE 2 BA BURGLARY 3 SU SUPERVISORY 4 HU PANIC 5 EM EMERGENCY 6 A1 AUXILIARY 1 7 A2 AUXILIARY 2 Loop Status The loop status is a 3 character alphabetic string description of the loop Valid statuses are as follows ALM Alarm TBL Trouble RST Restore FRA Force Arm FLT Fault BYP Bypass and LRS Reset Alarm Desc The fifth column is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case 130 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when i
348. need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has data added to it without doing an uninstall first Un installs are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not un installed using scsgen then you should uninstall or put it in a separate input file Once the new data is added to the 138 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual system the information should be added back to your original input file so that one file exists from which all the scs records can be generated Input File Error Checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the scsgen tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Identifying the Input Group Prefix The DMP SCS 1 interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established during installation of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the DMP SCS 1 interface is stored in the configuration file for that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the scs
349. nes if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then process the alarms received from the Firesine system 181 Software requirements The software requirements for the Firesine system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect Firesine interface iresine package Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package e Picture Perfect redundant system pprs package e Picture Perfect Firesine interface iresine package Hardware requirements The hardware requirements for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Firesine 4100 panel e A three wire full duplex serial data link that operates at 1200 baud 8 data bits even parity and one stop bit e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial
350. new entries to switcher device kalatel map table Installation complete You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y Entera y toinform the system oran n to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script If you entered y a message will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task alle tty2 Sending signal USR2 to task allp tty3 Sending signal USR2 to task ktd tty4 Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using stngen9600 to generate new paging station data after an initial installation l 2 If there are new paging stations to be monitored by the Stentofon 9600 interface after an stngen9600 installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the stngen9600 tool If you are going to be changing paging station data in the input file for existing database records then use Method 2 below Method 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines Invoke stngen9600 and use the new input file 333 Method 2 1 Use stngen9600 to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associate
351. ninstall portion Cmdgen Install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the Blocks Stations that are going to be monitored This kind of report can be obtained from the Commend Intercom system e f necessary create a facility specifically for use with the Commend interface Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Input file An input file is required when using the install portion of the cmdgen tool It describes the types of messages to be monitored by the Commend alarm interface The input file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the tool The installation portion of the tool will ask you the name of the input file you want to use The input file will be parsed by the tool and the appropriate input group and alarm records will be created If the input specifies activation of CCTV devices the appropriate definition records will be generated and appended to the mapping file specific to each CCTV switcher interface The CCTV switcher interface tasks can be signalled to access the new information making CCTV control active with the new information The format and rules for the file are discussed in the following sections To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very importa
352. nique to all table types for instance each table type has Record ID numbers starting at 1 See the Picture Perfect User Manual for information on the relationship between the tables and how to enter information using the graphical user interface When populating the Picture Perfect database tables it is important to define the objects in a manner that uniquely identifies the alarm events that may occur This is especially important in cases where objects typically input groups can be shared since Record ID numbers are not unique across table types The cstgen tool analyzes the object definitions and relationships in the Picture Perfect database tables to extract information defining the alarm events that are to be forwarded to the Central Station Unique identifying information is required for each alarm event to be forwarded and excessive sharing can impact on this uniqueness There are some general guidelines that should be followed when defining objects in the database as described below In general sharing of object definitions should be done on a limited basis with directly related objects The following rules should be followed when defining objects in the Picture Perfect database to ensure uniqueness in identifying alarm events 75 1 When defining an area micro or door object it is permissible to share a single input group and hence the alarm indicated by that input group within that object b
353. not determine if there is a communications break in the line Therefore no alarm is reported in this situation Prior to defining alarms and input groups on the Picture Perfect system the Firesine system must be already configured Alarm points must have a three digit identifier as part of their description on the Firesine system Firesine message structure The Firesine messages are delimited by STX hex 02 and ETX hex 03 and have the following format lt STX gt A123textStringMessage lt ETX gt or lt STX gt A123456textStringMessage lt ETX gt where e Ais one of the following type of commands A Alert pre alarm D Fault F Fire G General Fault R System Reset T Time and Date Z Zonal output control e 123 3 digit ID null for R System Reset Or 12345206 digit ID null for R System Reset e textStringMessage maximum 24 character text string ignored Any other type of command is ignored by the interface An example of an incoming Firesine message stream separated by lines for clarity ype of Alarm message 1 character F 6 digit ID 001101 STX FO01101Fire Message string ETX STX TTue Feb 11 15 37 59 EST 2003 ETX STX AO01101Alert Message ETX 186 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Picture perfect input group description The Picture Perfect input group description is constructed by concatenating a prefix string default FIRESINE a blank space the 1 character command type F A or D and the
354. notifier type Checking input file for formatting errors Enter the default alarm priority It is the priority that will be used for fixed messages and any alarm that has no priority specified Value may be in the range 1 500 default 50 Enter the value for the default alarm priority or to accept the existing default The alarm priority you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Selected default alarm priority is 65 Is this correct y n yl Entera y toconfirm or an n to re enter the default alarm priority If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y the input data will be checked If there were errors they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors and begin this process again If no errors are found the input group and alarm records will be entered into the Picture Perfect database You will see messages similar to the following Checking input file data Installing Records DBLOAD Load Utility INFORMIX SQL Version 9 30 UC4 Copyright C Informix Software Inc 1984 1997 Software Serial Number AAB J328673 Table input group had 49 row s loaded into it Table alarm had 6 row s loaded into it Statement update statistics for table input group Statement processed OK Statement update statistics for table alarm Statement processed OK Installation complete 213 Using nfrgen to generate new device data after an initial installati
355. nput file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the tool The installation portion of the tool will ask you the name of the input file you want to use The input file will be parsed by the tool and the appropriate input group and alarm records will be created If the input specifies activation of CCTV devices the appropriate definition records will be generated and appended to the mapping file specific to each CCTV switcher interface The CCTV switcher interface tasks can be signalled to access the new information making CCTV control active with the new information The format and rules for the file are discussed in the following sections To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important because the layout of the database records may be different depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running and this tool can generate different output depending on the version e The paging locations pager station ID s to be monitored e For each paging location whether or not an alarm condition should be generated for the various types of communication activities possible as discussed later e For each paging location and communication activity whether or not that activity requires CCTV activation and if so the CCTV switcher device name CCTV number and the port to which it is attached There are eleven CCTV switcher products currently supported as list
356. nput group description lt IGP gt SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED is a fixed field For example NFR1 SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation System Test Message To recognize System Test message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt TEST TYPE gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e TEST TYPE is one of three fixed fields DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESS DETECTOR TEST ALL OK DETECTOR TEST FAIL For example to configure for System Test messages for the 3 test types you would configure the following input group descriptions NFR1 DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESS NFR1 DETECTOR TEST ALL OK NFR1 DETECTOR TEST FAIL The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Note When monitoring this message type you must consult the Notifier panel or printer for the list of detectors on each lib in the case of DETECTOR TEST ALL OK The Notifier panel or printer must be consulted for a list of detectors that fail in the case of the DETECTOR TEST FAIL message Lamp Test Message To recognize Lamp Test message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt LAMP TEST TYPE where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e LAM
357. ns SET pathname cas bin msan modify date 2 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 Multiple device support The original design of the switcher interfaces supported only a single CCTV switcher device and allowed only one CCTV command to be sent to a switcher in response to a Picture Perfect alarm event With the introduction of enhanced switcher interfaces the design was extended to support multiple CCTV switcher devices connected to a single Picture Perfect host system In addition any Picture Perfect alarm event can cause output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices For compatibility with existing systems the default mode during CCTV switcher interface software installation or upgrade is single device support You must shut down and restart Picture Perfect for the change to take effect Note If anew CCTV switcher interface is installed or you are upgrading an existing CCTV switcher interface and you were previously using the multiple device support feature you must re activate the multiple device support feature after installation To configure a Picture Perfect system to support output of CCTV commands to multiple switcher devices in response to a single Picture Perfect alarm event usethe msan set multiple utility A sample execution of thi
358. nstalling the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the acility idthat will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used 131 Column descriptions for O Disarmed C Armed and L Late to Arm Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7
359. nt because the layout of the database records may be different depending on the version of Picture Perfect that is running and this tool can generate different output depending on the version The blocks stations to be monitored e For each block station the alarm condition generated for the various types of communication activities possible as discussed later e For each Alarm Condition generated whether or not it requires a CCTV activation the CCTV switcher device name and CCTV number The last three items comprise the data format part of the input file With this information the cmdgen tool will generate and load the database with the appropriate input group and alarm database records Table 9 Supported CCTV switcher products contains a list of the current nine CCTV switcher products supported Table 9 Supported CCTV switcher products Switcher name Manufacturers product designation allegiant Burle Allegiant TC8x0y allplex Burle Allplex TC8928B amdyn American Dynamics grundig Grundig VAZ300 javelin Javelin JO326HI kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 maxpro MAXPRO RD AT100 MAX1000 panasonic Panasonic Proteus panasonic550 Panasonic 550 WJ SX550A pelco Pelco CM9750 pelcob viper Vicon Viper VPS13xx Picture Perfect version The first line of the input file must contain the Picture Perfect version that is running The version number is used by the cmdgen tool to determine the database in
360. nt host are processed but output to the switcher is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the CCTV switcher Refer to Figure 29 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CCTV interface on page 55 47 Software requirements The software requirements for the CCTV system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required e Picture Perfect Base base package e One of the following Picture Perfect CCTV interface packages e American Dynamics amdyn e Burle Allegiant allegiant e Burle Allplex allplex e Grundig grundig e Javelin javelin e Kalatel kalatel e MaxPro maxpro e Panasonic Proteus panasonic e Panasonic 550 panasonic550 e Pelco pelco e Vicon Viper viper Redundant system If you are using a redundant Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect Base base package Picture Perfect Redundant System pprs package e One of the following Picture Perfect CCTV interface packages e American Dynamics amdyn Burle Allegiant allegiant e Burle Allplex allplex e Grundig grundig e Javelin javelin e Kalatel kalatel e MaxPro maxpro e Panasonic Proteus panasonic e Panasonic 550 panasonic550 e Pelco pelco
361. o 511 can be used for CCTV alarm numbers or 2048 to 1 if using a Kalatel command string mapping Indicate if you want to enter an alarm description The alarm description is useful when identifying a mapping entry on a report Enter y to add an alarm description or n to omit the description If you select y you are prompted for the alarm description The Picture Perfect alarm description may be used although any description that enables the user to identify which alarm it is may be used The description must fit on one line The entry should be as concise as possible because when the report is printed the entries that are larger than the width of the paper will be wrapped to the next line and the report may not be readable If you select n the information you have entered displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries Skip to step 9 Enter the alarm description The information you have entered including the alarm description displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries If the entries are correct select y and the mapping options display Select another option Refer to the section Exiting the program on page 66 for more information about making changes and exiting the program If you select n the mapping options display If the information entered is not correct add the alarm again If the information entered is invalid delete the alarm Refer to the section Exiting the program on page 66 for more information abo
362. o configure the DMP SCS 1 interface 2 0 cece ccc cence een eee 148 Testing ThE IBterface iesise beso pH TRE Ope dde irpo b e nena EEG 159 Advanced configuration 0 cece cece cence ee ee eh hh ehh nnn 160 cas db text Scs ALY NICO osse Sete t tt ERR nic beh ad bte tere d e be Patin 160 cas db text scs signals ttyN cfg or cas db text scs_signals cfg 00 ccc eee eee cece eee 162 Icas db test scs red ndamt ctg o odo eS andes ewe Den UY YN RAN EP eee ee 163 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece eee tent e ence ehh nen 163 Appendix F Appendix G Configuring an EST interface Sos dua os SR HER eoe a PDOduUE RE Rd ERA RE AIR 165 IntrodUction voie Ste xn ER ISO EERE RR RE REOR RE RTUUET PL NUVERE REA T VERRE ER IUE 166 Redundant Systems ipie e hadrectatek essen Re PODER I VAE EE O LCD ET Iudae 166 Software requirements 5 o rx ease sab ce dials CPGE ERSEREOU NR RE eL aee ne Re bae 167 Stand alotie System isse ERR he die RO Sedep deb ERI AARAA ODDS UM UE 167 Red ndarit Syste Miss coro pu pre Xv ev Vb PRU HH EE RIA RA RENE pce NIAE OR 167 Hardware req iremeris rcr e rx dea er her cadena CR HEATER ORE Seton aee RUE R EU 167 Stand alone Systemi 5s sooo reug gpr d ee E A ED Re WE YAN Ea ALITER RENE PE 167 Red ndarnt SYSTEM i set eco tan dsceecet bilden TER RA Ra pedido ees CUR dec 168 Config rgdtion rele ect Wi dn abet dade deci dabes eae weet e RR ERIRMD
363. o it PortReInitializationTime Specifies the time to wait in minutes in which if there are no messages received from the remote system will never be reset The following values are unique to the UNIV INTR interface do not change unless instructed by CASI These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH Gb GE Hb Hb cb db GE GE db HH PositionDateAlarm 22 PositionTimeAlarm 30 H The following values are setup based on your installation responses InpGrpPrefix UIO1 AlarmTimeIsSystemTime 1 ExternalSysAlarmNumLgth 7 PortName dev tty1 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 7 Parity e StopBits 1 Xon y Xoff y Icanon y EchoAlarm y EchoSystemReset y EchoDeviceFail n EchoDeviceReset n PortReInitializationTime 30 Indicates whether or not SYSTEM RESET messages received Indicates whether or not DEVICE RESET messages received the port will be reset A value of 0 indicates that the block read of the port wil never time out and the port 361 362 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual cas db text univ_intr redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the Universal Intrusion redundant configuration file cas db text univ_intr redundant cfg
364. o the following Making alarm id checks Deleting records Complete The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp nfr inpgrp del log tmp nfr alarm del log Un install completed The un installation is complete You will return to the prompt or back to the removal script Using Picture Perfect to configure the Notifier interface For a successful configuration follow these steps which will be detailed in the sections that follow 1 Add or modify input groups for the 13 possible messages 2 Add or modify alarms 3 Add or modify output groups and outputs if desired 4 Monitor alarms Note Ifthe Notifier package is installed in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment all operations should be performed on the current primary machine The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep any database changes made over to the backup machine 217 Adding or modifying input groups The input group record description field is the key to identifying specific Notifier panel messages The format of the input group description is defined such that it can be set up to identify the specific message types coming from the panel for a specific device type Due to the numerous device types statuses and possible locations a set of rules must be established for the interface when defining an input group description The rules are basically formatting issues so that
365. o the Central Station system Upon successful transfer of an alarm event it will be removed from the Picture Perfect runtime database and Alarm Monitor This approach guarantees that operator notification and alarm response is handled by only one system Those alarm events not designated for transfer to the Central Station system will be handled normally by Picture Perfect Note For logical alarms removal of the alarm event from the Alarm Monitor screen is immediate For physical alarms the alarm event remains on the Alarm Monitor screen as an operator acknowledged pending event until the condition causing the alarm has reset See below for a discussion of logical and physical alarms Alarm event triggering of SIA message output There are currently five main types of input events in Picture Perfect These input events trigger alarm messages which may be logged displayed on a monitor printed or formatted into SIA messages for transfer to the Central Station system The five input types listed below cause logical alarms unless specifically indicated as physical alarms 1 Input events for a micro Badge History Overflow physical alarm Alarm History Overflow physical alarm Upstream Communication Failure Downstream Communication Failure Reader Communication Failure physical alarm 2 Input events for an area Invalid Badge Unknown Badge Lost Badge Suspended Badge Anti passback Violation Duress 87 3 Input events for a door Doo
366. o uninstall database records 2 Modify or add the new paging station data to the input file 3 Invoke stngen and use the modified input file to re create the data records stngen uninstall This portion of stngen removes the database records associated with a specific Stentofon interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the stngen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 4 to 5 characters will be removed from the database The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the alarm record is associated with any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed no records will be removed and the user will be notified of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the stngen tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted in
367. o use from the list above e g ttyD001 or ttyl tty5 Outgoing Kalatel site number 0 511 OR Kalatel Command Strings Table index 2048 to 1 123 Are you sure y n y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kaa ee eem p Selection Changing an alarm The lt package_prefix gt _cctv_map program does not permit editing an entry If you need to change any of the information for an alarm follow these steps 1 Delete the existing alarm Refer to Deleting an alarm on page 62 2 Add a new alarm Refer to Adding an alarm on page 60 Typically only the CCTV alarm number might change which requires re entering the information 64 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Printing the map file This section describes how to print the package map file Follow these steps to print the file 1 Atthe Selection prompt type p to print the CCTV controlled alarms 2 Enter the printer name 3 Indicate if you want to sort the report If you selected n to not sort the file the file will be printed and the mapping options display If you select y you are then prompted to select how the report should be sorted The options are Input Group Id Alarm Id Location Id ala
368. of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you reach the facility that you choose to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility 1 DEFAULT FACILITY 2 Building 1 3 Building 4 Building 5 Building 6 7 8 9 e wN BUILDING 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO i BLDG 2 DESIGN AID 10 Security Control Center 11 Head Office 12 Building 1 Garage 13 Building 2 Garage 14 Building 3 Garage 15 Building 4 Garage 16 Building 5 Garage 17 Head Office Garage 18 Penthouse Press RETURN for more 19 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A 22 Facility B 23 Stentofon 9600 Facility Enter the value of the default Stentofon facility 1 23 1 13 14 331 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Stentofon 9600 interface This value will be used when creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Stentofon 9600 Facility Is this ok y n yl Entera y toconfirmoran
369. olled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms e OF X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection d Deleting an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Location ID 1 999999 45 Outgoing AlphaCom alarm number 1 9999 15 Are you sure yn y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all AlphaCom controlled alarms X Exit oa dado dedidit iu e ccu addu A Changing an alarm The alphacom map program does not permit editing an entry If you need to change any of the information for an alarm follow these steps e Delete the existing alarm Refer to Deleting an alarm on page 35 e Add anew alarm Refer to Adding an alarm on page 32 Typically only the AlphaCom alarm number might change which requires re entering the information Printing the map file This section describes how to print the a1phacom map file Follow these steps to print the file 1 Atthe Selection prompt type p to print the AlphaCom controlled alarms 2 Enterthe printer name 3 Indicate if you want to sort the report 37 If you select y you are then prompted to select how the report should be sorted T
370. om the reported alarm The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Stentofon Exchange since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the Stentofon interface will show a condition of Alarm and an input state of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times To remove Stentofon alarms from the Alarm Monitor use the purge button to remove all alarms or click on the alarm to bring up an individual window and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect received the message from the Exchange 309 310 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 119 Sample Alarm Monitor screen H Alarm Monitor ddd Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor il Q x e New Alarms 6 Total Alarms 6 Display is now active Highest Priority 50 iption Location Condition Device Time Station 1 Request STNO1 01 Request Alarm A 01 05 10 17 09 Station 1 Connect STN01 01 Connect Alarm 10 17 22 Station 1 Disconnect STNO1 01 Disconnect Alarm 10 17 51 Station 10 Request STNO1 10 Request Alarm 07 04 50 Station 10 Connect STNO1 10 Connect Alarm 07 03 48 Station 3 Request STNO1 3 Requ
371. om the alarm form If there is a match meaning that the 1ine Partition Account was found along with the alarm an Alarm message is sent to be processed by Picture Perfect Further message information should be obtained from the primary monitoring device which is the NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel Communication can be using dial up or ethernet connection Dial up communication is between the OH2000E Receiver and any of the following panels NX 8E Ademco Radionix or any panel the can report alarms in SIA or CID formats Network communication is between the OH Network Receiver and an NX 8E with an NX 590E network module Communication from the OH Receiver to the Picture Perfect host is using a serial line connection The communication is unidirectional meaning the interface only receives data from the OH Receiver and does not send anything back Messages or alarms recognized by the OH Receiver are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the Input Group table Picture Perfect must be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Note The monitoring function set up using Picture Perfect OH Receivers and NX 8E panels can be used in conjunction with access control using Picture Perfect Micro 5 controllers and Model 940 readers When using this configuration the NX 8b keypad must be installed adjacent to the Mod
372. ommunication from the intercom system to the host is unidirectional No handshaking is required for the interface The protocol of the interface is the serial transfer of information one line at a time Redundant systems The Commend interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single intercom controller Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the intercom controller This allows the physical connection of the intercom system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Commend interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications from the intercom controller However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarms Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the intercom controller 93 Software requirements The software requirements for the Commend Intercom system interface and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system
373. on If there are new devices to be monitored by the Notifier interface after an nf rgen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the n rgen tool Use these methods when you are adding new devices to be monitored by the interface If you are going to be adding or changing message types in the input file for existing database records then proceed to the section Using nfrgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation on page 213 Note Ifthe Notifier interface is running in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment nfrgen must be run on the current primary machine only The normal operation of the redundant Picture Perfect system will sweep the database updates made by nfrgen on the primary machine over to the backup machine Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke nfrgen and use the new input file Do not install the fixed message types if they have been previously installed The n rgen tool will always ask whether you want to install these message types 3 Oncethe new inputs have been added you can append them to the original input file for that interface so that there exists a single input file with all the data Method 2 1 Use nfrgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any inp
374. on page 111 Note Be aware that input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the cmdgen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix For all input groups and associated alarms that are created an entry should be added to your input file so that it may be automatically recreated at a later date 110 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups tab 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows e Delay Time Boolean Type Input Group State Open Condition Short Condition Broadcast State Changes Alarm Click Save 0 Individual Enabled Ignored Ignored No Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 41 Sample input groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description a 4E XO 7 Xx g Q Define Input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description CMDO7 FF23 FF13 12 31 Facility GLOBAL Input Group State Disabled Enabled Boolean
375. on file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names Appendix N Configuring a Stentofon 9600 interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Intercom System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix Pa e 6 sn E kw Ue Ee RR Db a DER aba bi vU pee 322 SOWGre Fegutrementg ocolos ou debeat ae ee oa 323 Hardware regulrements saccos erectos eger tiaa bx ed ee 323 CURRERE 1d uot epe soie Ud bide che GIA dude e 327 IA ORS OD YVHEE Lu occ c ees reste Win soe Rakes Rance dae oes 346 Extended configuration cc ck he ed oa ee ha we Re 347 Interface data file backup and restore 2 cles 349 318 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Intercom System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Stentofon 9600 Intercom System communicates with the Picture Perfect host through a serial line connection Messages or alarms recognized by the Stentofon interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the Input Group table Picture Perfect will have to be set up with the appropriate input groups
376. one way communication between the OH Receiver and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the OH Receiver package The OH Receiver messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the appropriate routing must be selected from the Alarms form for each alarm The Alarm Description and Location columns correspond to the Alarm and Input Group record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell the receiver line partition and account of the reported alarm The complete message of the alarm should be read from the OH Receiver or from a printer hooked up to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the OH Receiver panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the OH Receiver interface will show a condition of Alarm and an Input State of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times The only way to remove OH Receiver alarms from the Alarm Monitor is to use the remove button to remove all alarms or to respond and remove them individuall
377. onitored The following message types can be configured for monitoring Alarm Message Trouble Message Zone Disable Message Annunciator Trouble Message Walk Test Message Module Activation Message Supervisory Activation Message Each of the above message types require four columns of data except for Annunciator Trouble messages which only require three Column Descriptions for All Message Types Except Annunciator Trouble Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6 MSG TYPE DEV TYPE LDD or ZXXX ALARM FACILITY ALARM or FFF DESCRIPTION PRIORITY MSG TYPE This column is a one character abbreviation of the message type to be monitored The following list defines the message type abbreviations and the possible status information that the message type can produce Abbreviation Message Type Status A Alarm Message ALARM ACK AL CLR AL ACL AL T Trouble Message TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB ACL TB Z Zone Disable Message TROUBL ACK TB CLR TB ACL TB W Walk Test Message UNPROG UNINST TESTXX UNTEST M Module Activation Message ACTIVE CLEAR S Supervisory Activation Message ACTIVE CLR ACT The status information that can be produced for each message type will be used as part of the input group record description For each message type to be monitored there willbe X number of input group records generated for that message type where X is the number of statuses available for that message type The message status is used in com
378. ool Using scsgen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular receiver on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 148 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the DMP SCS 1 interface Note Database records added manually using Picture Perfect should be added to an scsgen input file so they may later be recreated in the event scsgen uninstall is used Using the scsgen Data Generator Tool Use scsgen to install or uninstall database records that are associated with the SCS 1 alarm interface This tool is part of the SCS 1 alarm interface package for Picture Perfect and is installed with the package The scsgen tool will create the temporary files that it needs inthe tmp directory as it processes an input file and later generates the associated database records The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See scsgen removal on page 145 for an explanation of the uninstall portion scsgen Installation The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the points that are going to be mon
379. or defining alarm records may be found in Adding or modifying alarms on page 307 Note Input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the stngen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Therefore it is recommended that any manually created input group alarm pairs be added to the stngen input file so they will be recreated if stngen uninstall then stngen install have to be performed 306 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Facility Facility the input group resides in 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 117 Sample input groups screen 48 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones D Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description a 4E Exo x s Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description STNO3
380. or occurred while sending an alarm to the remote system This usually happens when the network connection is lost between the two systems The alarm re sends until it is received by the remote system Server short send error xx of yy sent An error occurred while sending an alarm to the remote system xx bytes out of yy were sent This usually happens when the network connection is lost between the two systems The message re sends until it is received by the remote system SERVER Maximum number of BIND attempts exceeded RAN is having trouble establishing a connection with the remote system If this message displays repeatedly try increasing the MaxBindRetries variable SERVER accept error This message indicates that the RAN and remote systems are having trouble connecting with one another over the Ethernet network SERVER IPC call name failed errno xx An error has occurred while trying to talk on the network RAN usually recovers by itself with no data being lost TPS does not appear to be running Picture Perfect is not completely running Shut down and restart Picture Perfect If this problem persists call a GE Security Customer Support representative for assistance Unable to establish RANTCPIP services RAN was unable to establish the necessary requirements for operating on the network Possible reasons for this can be a bad or missing etc servicesor etc hosts files Unable to open configuration file filename errno
381. ormation may follow the Input Group Prefix and the panel device id part of the description The actual description of the alarm is set up in the Alarm form and tied in to each input group Input group prefix The EST interface uses the concept of an input group prefix to more readily identify the input groups that are defined and to separate the input groups of one instance of the EST interface from another You must use the following combination of the prefix EST and panel device id in the beginning of each input group record description Combine this with the panel device ID of the message s you wish to recognize There should be one space between the prefix and panel device ID The Panel Device ID field is described in the section Alarms recognized by the EST interface on page 170 For example If the Panel Device ID is 0103 and was located in Room 304 of a building and this is an alarm for the EST interface with the prefix ESTOI configured you would enter the Input Group Description as ESTO1 0103 Room 304 The ESTO1 0103 portion is the required part where Room 304 is the descriptive portion The Alarm that is linked to this input group could be used to further describe the alarm Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group 172 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual These fields must be se
382. ors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for a Stentofon 9600 device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text stn9600 tty5 cfg HHHHHHHH db b Hb db db db db HH HH HHH HH stn9600 tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script stentofon9600 inst 1 7 05 14 03 his file contains the configuration information for the STENTOFON larm interface Each interface that is running on a Picture erfect system must have its own configuration file which contains he information on the specific serial line port the interface is oing to read from It also contains the unique input group prefix hat the interface will use to recognize specific input group atabase records using this prefix Q cr Q ctf r0 9 H The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must be 5 characters with the last two being numeric The input group prefix de
383. ou have just specified will be mapped Enter the number of the AlphaCom alarm that causes the AlphaCom Exchange device to perform the actions you want for this event when the Picture Perfect alarm occurs The range of 1 to 9999 can be used for AlphaCom alarm numbers You will now be given the option to enter an associated alarm description for this mapping The alarm description is useful when identifying a mapping entry on a report Enter y to add an alarm description or n to omit the description e Ifyou select y you are prompted for the alarm description The Picture Perfect Alarm description may be used although any description that enables the user to identify which alarm it is may be used The description MUST fit on one line The entry should be as concise as possible because when the report is printed the entries that are larger than the width of the paper will be wrapped to the next line and the report may not be readable e Ifyou select n the information you have entered displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries Skip to step 8 Enter the Alarm Description The information you have entered including the alarm description displays and you will be asked to confirm the entries If the entries are not correct select n and the mapping options display that is you will return to step 1 where you may perform another selection or exit the program If the entries are correct select y If only one AlphaCom node is conf
384. ould be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The OH Receiver software installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the OH Receiver interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 15 OH Receiver Interface Data Files Data file name Description cas db text oh receiver cfg TTY port extended configuration definition files is the port name for example tty1 for AIX ttyD001 for Linux cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg OH Receiver redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names 249 250 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix J Configuring a Siebe CBAS interface This appendix provides information on configuring the Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CBAS interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Facility Integrator In this appendix IUD ONEHOR SL rbd ad rye dba od E e T Wierd 254 Extended configuration ccce 259 Interface data file backup and restore 0 0 000s 260 252 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CB AS interface to P
385. outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant systems The Notifier Fire Alarm System interface to Picture Perfect also supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single fire alarm system Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the fire alarm system This allows the physical connection of the fire alarm system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Notifier fire alarm system interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarm and forwards it to the Alarm Monitor Normal pprs processing will result in the alarm appearing on the backup host s Alarm Monitor Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then process the alarms received from the Notifier fire alarm system 195 Software requirements The software requirements for the firepanel system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using
386. ows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is kept in the following files cas db text oh receiver ttyN cfg cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg where ttyN is the name of the port specified for the interface cas db text oh receiver ttyN cfg This file contains configuration information specific to the copy of the interface that connects to the OH Receiver device attached to the ttyN port It consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting The OH Receiver interface reads the file upon startup to configure the port and the interface Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change the file you must be knowledgeable about text editors such as vi Before you begin please call GE Security Customer Support for assistance 248 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual The following is an example of the contents of the port configuration file for an OH Receiver device attached to port dev tty5 cas db text oh receiver tty5 cfg HHH HHHHHHHHH HH HH HHH H oh receiver tty5 cfg Copyright C 1995 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated from the following installation script oh receiver inst 1 4 06 09 03 This file contains the configuration information for the OH Receiver Alarm Interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configur
387. pE Ee MA et kqedida t ose EGER Eg 53 Config rdtion Sere e EDEN Rer E IR CR RP RENE RS REDE ER IRDONUNE EE CRI ES s 56 DeTINING INBUE GIOUPS s 0 DC RS 56 identifying location Vpes uus rd est ep RU M Sie Da pretone de andar ANARE EEEE VAREGI 57 USING SOLE POMS tp Em 58 Mapping CCTV monitored events 0 se e e e e e eere 59 Configuring and monitoring alarms in Picture Perfect esee 67 Advanced configuration ires Re be leere etee eno o E Ee sU Fei E ED DER EDUC E 67 Sifigledevice SupDpORhbuu un eet RR da tee oen AE cp dd eaten edes EE EE unin 68 Multiple device Support ecco o er ERU MRIBED I RP DURO Nen anne 69 Interface data file backup and restore cece ccc cence eee eee enhn 70 Configuring a Central Station interface ccc eee c ee eee eee ee eee 71 ucro 72 Software requirements eet bL abbr ea Ad dno ena tile cia ULP REM 72 Hardware requirements 2 2 0 per IU RHRTDERRRMRERRVEC PR V RR RE PREDDDD ERE NAM 72 refe iU opio p r ais 74 Creating Picture Perfect GIOrMS 2 2 6 nen e eere 74 Assigning account nurmbGels secos xwetpbad eru Iba due cea ER REOR RRRRPPPPE UP LLILA DIM 76 Credtiag armipul Tile sooo nieto pr ebbe RR HR Ide pep E ERR UE 77 RuAning the cstgen tool 2 aree ts RI EX E AA dude 4e Ra CI ERR TERR EP PEE RAT 81 Advanced configuration ssl ph petet Rh heekt RR EPERECESR E AREE aah ao E E eere E 82 M ltiple device support IS8UGS i eh
388. pander check The Kalatel Interface requires the use of a port Do you have a digiboard or port expander attached to the host y n y Press or y to indicate that you have a Digiboard or port expander or press n to indicate no Digiboard or port expander is attached If you entered n the following message displays NOTE The installation of this interface REQUIRES the usage of a port to continue Do you wish to use the comm ports y n yl Press or y to use the comm ports or press n to indicate that you will not use the comm ports The installation program will verify if there are ports available on the system If there are no ports available a message will display and you will exit the installation program If the check finds a port the installation will proceed Messages similar to the following displays Verifying if serial ports are available for the Kalatel Interface OK Loading Kalatel CCTV Server Package Extracting files from media 32 blocks The files have been read from the media Creating Kalatel cctv map file cas db text kalatel map gt x Ley x gt x E x Chapter 2 17 Installing and removing Select the port to be used for the interface server package from the list provided A message similar to the following displays You must select a tty port for the Kalatel interface The following tty ports are available For RS 6000 The port name created previously using the SM
389. played and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility SCS Facility Is this ok y n yl Entera y toconfirm oran n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected and its id will be displayed and you will be prompted for the default alarm priority to use for the alarms created Default Facility chosen is SCS Facility Default Facility s id is 35 Raa eae T EORR UE 2 9L 3 92 1 ee 9 5 he rc End of Default SCS Facility assignment portion E Dx t tI Enter the default alarm priority It is the priority that will be used for any alarm that has no priority specified Value may be in the range 1 500 50 Enter the priority to use for the alarms created from the input file that do not have an explicit priority specified The priority entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it Selected default alarm priority i8 30 Is this correct y n yl Entera y toconfirm oran n to re enter the default alarm priority If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the script will proceed to check the input data 16 If there are errors with the input data they will be displayed and you will need to correct those errors the re run the scsgen script again to process the corrected input file If no errors are fou
390. port Stentofon Intercom systems with multiple call handlers a firmware enhancement and to provide paging station monitoring on an individual call handler basis Stentofon 9600 The Stentofon 9600 interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon P 9600 intercom system and recognizes only the predefined intercom message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The data transfer is uni directional from the Stentofon P 9600 intercom system to the interface on the Picture Perfect host across a serial line connection Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Miscellaneous systems supported by Picture Perfect These systems can exist in stand alone subhost network host and redundant versions of Picture Perfect as noted Central Station This interface provides a communication mechanism between Picture Perfect and central monitoring systems that allow control of activities for multiple systems and both local and remote sites from a single location The central station software can process alarms from the Picture Perfect system This allows a Central Station operator to work from one screen and process alarms from both the Picture Perfect Access Control System and from their intrusion detection system The communication is two way using a serial line connection and is available for stand alone systems Siebe CBAS The Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CB AS interfa
391. ppendix po EM UD 292 SOME requirements iicelosnienlesdeweladonre bipes ena caw 293 Handware r gatrementy occse ee ee ee eee 293 doo MMC 297 Message YPES lius rni UA e CENENE CHR Ve CHR Vae 315 TOdeddedn COH SUP Losses dee te ees m plan E om RO Ie S In a nd 318 Interface data file backup and restore 0c ccc eens 320 288 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The Stentofon interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the Stentofon Intercom System and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Stentofon Intercom System communicates with the Picture Perfect host through a serial line connection Messages or alarms recognized by the Stentofon interface are looked up in the Picture Perfect database using the Input Group table Picture Perfect will have to be set up with the appropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be tied to an input group This is the standard method for setting up other hardware on a Picture Perfect system The details of setting up the appropriate database records will be covered in more detail in Configuration on page 293 The communication from the Stentofon Intercom System to the host is unidirectional No handshaking is required for the interface The protocol of the interface is the serial transfer of information o
392. prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Manual Evacuate To recognize the Manual Evacuate messages use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt MANUAL EVACUATE gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e MANUAL EVACUATE is a fixed field For example NFR1 MANUAL EVACUATE The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation 224 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding an input group Follow these steps to add an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Complete the Input Groups form for each input group These fields must be set as follows Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition Ignored Short Condition Ignored Broadcast State Changes No Alarm Facility 3 Click Save Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Facility the input group resides in 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 73 Sample input groups screen 68 Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Lf Input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Descripti P aeneo GE xo x iO Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description jlFaciity GLOBAL
393. ption 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab In the Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria Click Find Edit the desired information Ut eo Um d When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 227 Adding or modifying output groups and outputs If you would like to trigger an output that is door strikes lights or sirens when notifier panel messages are received you will need to configure an output group and a output The output group must be linked to the input group for the Notifier message to trigger an output for that output group The instructions for setting up outputs and output groups are described in the Picture Perfect manual AII fields and options in the Outputs forms may not apply since this is a one way communication between the Notifier panel and Picture Perfect Note Configuring output groups and outputs is optional nfrgen does not create outputs or link them to input groups so if the nfrgen uninstall option is used to remove the Notifier records then they are recreated with nfrgen install the output group linkings will need to be recreated manually Monitoring alarms You are now finished with the basic configuration of the Notifier package The Notifier messages that have been recognized through the input groups and linked to an alarm can be monitored through the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor For any alarm to be monitored or recorded the
394. put The current versions that are supported by the cmdgen tool are e Picture Perfect 1 7 2 0 and 4 0 AIX and Linux Input file data format The lines of data that follow the version information should contain rows of delimited text data that define the block station identifier the message type the alarm description and optionally a CCTV device or switcher name and the CCTV number The delimiter character between fields must be the symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination that is going to be monitored The format of a data record is as follows Block Station MessageType AlarmDesc facility cctvDeviceName cctvNumber lt port gt lt Block gt lt Station gt This is a four character identification number Valid values for this field are FFF1 to 9999 lt MessageType gt This is the type of Commend message and is one of the following 21 22 request 10 30 clear 12 31 acknowledge 0A release 1D duress Note These message types are searched for in the Commend interface software when searching for the alarm record The Commend software will be unable to locate any others without modification lt AlarmDesc gt This is the unique alarm message text to be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen and or logged to the history file lt facility gt Facility id to use for the input group and alarm record that is created If no facility is speci
395. put group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed That means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 303 Using stngen uninstall Before you start You must have root permissions to run the stngen tool The database must be running stngen will check this when the tool is invoked You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon interface that is being targeted for uninstallation Follow these steps to use the stngen tool to uninstall database records 1 Ho pee qusc dS Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file name is located Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the stngen tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to uninstall the Stentofon database records This is the first 4 to 5 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will
396. put groups There are several components of the system that use input groups These are Areas Doors Readers Input Points Micros Hosts and Input Groups themselves All of these windows allow you to select an input group for the various events that can occur at these locations The Input Group window is the only one with a field to define the alarm associated with this group For the purposes of CCTV control it does not make sense to associate a CCTV event to an input group alarm Input groups that are made up from other input groups such as Boolean input groups do not necessarily report the actual triggering location For example with a Boolean AND group all input points must be on so which camera would you turn on Boolean input group alarms are not supported in this interface To trigger a CCTV event for an input point you should create an input group for that point only Then you can associate the CCTV event to the alarm on that individual input group and therefore the point itself Detailed information may be found in the Picture Perfect User Manual 57 Identifying location types An area is a group of one or more readers and represents a location type A single area may be assigned to multiple readers and doors Areas are similar to input groups in that they group a large number of readers together to make configuration easier Unlike input groups areas cannot contain other areas This means that whenever an area event occurs
397. puts Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Q J SE Exo xX f Q Define input Group Parent input Groups Output Groups Description DH RO2 L01 P01 001000 BA005 Facility GLOBAL Input Group State Disabled Enabled inl ahn Open Condition Ignored Detected Boolean Type QOR Any AND All Individual Broadcast State Changes No O Yes Short Condition Ignored Detected Delay Time BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge v eee a 0 2 Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group Note The Input Group description must follow the format described in Input group records on page 241 If you want the alarm message to be more easily identifiable such as by location a unique alarm record may be defined for each input group and the alarm record description may be modified to include more descriptive data See Alarm records on page 244 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desired information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save 243 244 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Alarm records
398. r Held Open physical alarm Door Forced Open physical alarm 4 Picture Perfect system events Host host communications failure 5 20 DI Board alarm events DIPoint physical alarm Logical alarms are one time events without any specific duration time Picture Perfect will generate one SIA formatted message for transfer to the Central Station system whenever an event of this type occurs Physical alarms are events with a duration The condition occurs and remains in effect until some future time when the condition is finally removed Picture Perfect will generate two SIA formatted messages for transfer to the Central Station system whenever an event of this type occurs The first message will be generated and transferred when the condition first occurs and the second when the condition is removed SIA message packet format The SIA message packet format between two communicating devices typically called the receiver and the computer provides two way communication with sequenced message acknowledgment The format has the general form lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt lt seq gt lt rec gt lt line gt data CR The minimum allowable message form is lt LF gt lt CRC gt lt HT gt lt seq gt lt rec gt lt line gt lt CR gt Messages always begin with the flag character lt LF gt Cyclic Redundancy Check lt CRC gt field andthe lt HT gt horizontal tab character The sequence number lt seq gt receiver lt rec gt and line l
399. r Linux cas db text scs redundant cfg DMPSCS 1redundant configuration file Indicates that this is a redundant configuration Contains the host names cas db text scs signals cfg Signals to ignore configuration file for a specific copy of the SCS interface is the port name for example ttyl for AIX ttyDOO1 for Linux cas db text scs signals cfg Default signals to ignore configuration file Unless overridden by a specific signal configuration file this file will apply to all copies of the SCS interface installed 164 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix F Configuring an EST interface This appendix provides information on configuring the EST interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the EST panel and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect In this appendix DU ODORE a etse been e iad ata pis seats 166 SOWIE FEQIERERES oec lose rehenes 167 Hardware r guirements ooo ee creerea esee ede Dx ed Be 167 COn GPAD cooler chain ide eiu devi Shia dude 170 Advanced Cam SUFIDE icu Rote Reb ORG et e CR 176 166 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Introduction The EST interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the EST panel and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect The Picture Perfect
400. rds the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type ndividual Input Group State Enabled Open Condition gnored Short Condition gnored Broadcast State Changes o Alarm Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group Parent Input Group should all be lt BLANK gt Output Group should all be lt BLANK gt Facility lt facility specified gt The default values for the alarm records are Online Yes Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Alarm Routing Monitor and History Priority lt priority specified gt Immediate Reset Input Yes Facility lt facility specified gt Installing using scsgen Before you start e You must have root permission to run the scsgen tool e The database must be running This will be checked by scsgen when the tool is invoked e A valid input file must exist that contains the Picture Perfect version and data lines for the message types to be monitored for the described devices e You must know the input group prefix used by the SCS 1 interface that is being targeted for data generation See the section Identifying the Input Group Prefix on page 138 for more information 140 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to use the scsgen tool to install database records 1 Login as root or su root if already logged in but not as the root user You should see a prompt Change to the directory where the input file is located Type c
401. re Perfect Linux OH Network System Receiver T o a DB25F Null Modem Cable DB9F Figure 78 Picture Perfect Linux System to OH Network Receiver Picture Perfect Linux OH Network System Receiver IL DB9F Null Modem Cable DB9M e OH Dial up system e OH2000E Receiver e NX 8E Ademco or Radionix panel 2 x E x 237 Note Any panel that connects to the OH2000E Receiver must transmit using one of the following protocols in order to be recognized by Picture Perfect e SIA e CID e Radionics Modem 6112 e Radionics Modem 8112 e Radionics Modem 7112 e Radionics Modem 9112 e Radionics Modem 7212 e Serial Line Cable to connect from the Picture Perfect system to the OH Receiver The figures that follow reflect the various cable configurations You can create the necessary cable configuration by adding a null modem adapter a gender changer and or a DB9 DB25 serial port adapter to a straight DB9F to DB9M cable Note The only connection verified by UL is the DB8F to DB8M using a null modem cable Figure 79 Picture Perfect AIX system to OH 2000E Picture Perfect AIX OH 2000E System DB25F Straight Serial Cable DB9M Figure 80 Picture Perfect Linux system with a Digi Port expander to OH 2000E Picture Perfect Linux OH 2000E System A C o RAS DB25F Straight Serial Cable DB9M Figure 81 Picture Perfect Linux system to OH 2000E Picture Perfect Linux
402. re Perfect RD AT100 System Controller DB25F DB25M Tx2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 Tx GND 7 7 GND DSR 6 DCD 8 DTR 20 Figure 22 Panasonic 550 cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Panasonic 550 DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect Panasonic 550 Host Matrix Controller DB25F DB25M oan wn Tx 2 Rx Rx 3 Tx GND 7 GND DSR 4 DCD 5 DTR 20 52 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 23 Panasonic Proteus Pelco Pelcob cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Bridge PC Panasonic Proteus Pelco or Pelcob CM9750 DT DB25F to DB9F Picture Perfect System DB25F Tx 2 Rx 3 GND 7 RTS 4 CTS 5 DSR 6 DCD8 DTR 20 Panasonic Proteus Pelco Bridge PC Pelcob CM9750 DT DB9F Rx Tx GND DTR DSR RTS CTS on O f OW n Figure 24 Pelco cable pinouts pelco only Bridge PC to controller DB9F to DB9F Pelco Bridge PC DB9F Tx2 GND 5 RX3 Pelco CM9750 Controller DB9F 3 Rx 2 Tx 5 GND Figure 25 Vicon Viper cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to switcher DB25F to DB9M Picture Perfect System DB25F Tx 2 Rx 3 RTS 4 CTS 5 GND 7 Viper Console Port DB9M Rx Tx RTS CTS GND NF On oU Video loss monitoring and reporting If you are using a controller that provides video loss and alarm reporting you will also need the items listed below e A second RS 232 C serial port e A second cable is wired to connect t
403. re Perfect system to intercom system DB25M to DB25F s 322 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intercom interface 322 Sample rnput Groups SCEBGFL i ieri teres tetro tte tete eter sta reete peteeist esee etie pesb teer lastre irte 337 Sample AlI SCTE Elinee tec tte etre etn o ten eei caede hioc 339 Sarmiple AlarnmiMoniterScEeehs snc stie tede doc intai 340 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to Intrusion Receiver DB25F to DB25F s 349 Overview of a Picture Perfect system and an intrusion interface 350 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M ens 351 Sample cable pinouts Splitter to intrusion system receiver DB25F to DB25F s 351 Overview of a cable configuration using a splitter ttt 351 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and intrusion interface s 352 Samplenput GroupsSClGent screen ie teet edid ee is netter i e De RR TREE ERRARE 355 Sample Alarm Screens tnde tree an ebat deg celat die 357 Sample Alarm MOrniter Screener tea cc i t biet te DERE tee e Piden 358 XV Preface This manual provides instructions to install Picture Perfect interfaces the initial setup and configuration for both the interfaces and the Picture Perfect systems and to configure changes to an existing system It also contains information for operating the system once it is installed The material in this manual has been prepared for persons responsible for and familiar with
404. reader CSTATION LostBadge Unknown Badge Read UnkBadge reader CSTATION UnkBadge Anti Passback Violation APBBadge reader CSTATION APBBadge Duress Violation DurBadge reader CSTATION DurBadge Reader Failure ReaderFail reader CSTATION ReaderFail 77 78 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Table 6 Forwardable alarm notification events Alarm Event Description Alarm Event Name Database Table SQL Report Name Upstream Communication UpStream micro CSTATION UpStream Failure Downstream Communication DownStream micro CSTATION DownStream Failure Alarm History Overflow AlmHistOvfl micro CSTATION AlmHistOvfl Badge History Overflow BdgHistOvfl micro CSTATION BdgHistOvfl Host Communication Failure HostComm host CSTATION HostComm DI Board Input Point DIPoint input CSTATION DIPoint 1 Available only in enterprise networked Picture Perfect configurations Input file format The cstgen tool s input file consists of optional comment lines denoted by a leading pound sign character followed by data lines specifying the alarm events to be forwarded to the Central Station system Each data line consists of an alarm event name taken from Table 6 on page 77 followed by one or more Picture Perfect database Record ID numbers in the following format alarm event name record id amp 1 record id 42 5 erecord id 4n where the delimiter character between fields is the
405. recognize specific alarm database records These values are setup at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines InpGrpPrefix CBAS NumberOfDatabaseSlots 200 First InputGroupNumber 1950 FirstAlarmNumber 1920 The following values are setup based on your installation responses PortName dev tty5 PortBaud 9600 CharacterSize 8 Parity n StopBits 1 Xon n Xoff n 258 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual cas db text cbas redundant cfg The presence of this file indicates that it is a redundant installation The file contains the names of the two redundant hosts and an indication of whether or not the interface is to run redundantly The following is an example of the contents of the CBAS redundant configuration file cas db text cbas redundant cfg cbas redundant cfg 1 11 Copyright C 1997 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved cbas redundant cfg 1 4 05 28 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Siebe Environmental Control s Facility Integrator CBAS Interface for redundant operations These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RedundantOper Y RedundantHosts primaryl backup1 Interface data file backup and restore The CBAS interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in
406. record description fields respectively From this information the operator should be able to tell which EST interface instance the panel device id and the type of the reported alarm If the Alarm Description field was used properly it should provide more descriptive information about the location of the alarm or panel The complete message of the alarm should be read from the EST panel or from a printer hooked up to that panel The operator will be able to respond and remove these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the EST panel since this is a one way communication All messages recognized by the EST interface will show a condition and input state according to the alarm mapping See EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor on page 176 for more information on mapping As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times Figure 59 Sample alarm monitor screen iz Alarm Monitor om B Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor il a 8 x e New Alarms 4 Total Alarms 4 Display is now active Highest Priority 50 Location Condition D Device Time N A 06 2005 12 44 35 Pull Station Bldg 2 South Wall EST01 0103 Room 304 Alarm Electrical Panel Bldg 2 EST0104 Room 304 Alarm 06 12 44 48 Smoke Det
407. red information 5 When completed save the input group by clicking Save Adding or modifying an alarm Each EST input group will need to be linked to an alarm record which can be routed to show up on the Alarm Monitor and be recorded by alarm history The linking is done through the Input Group form after the alarm record has been established Creating alarm records that the input group records are linked to is required for the EST interface to operate It is the combination of the input group description and alarm description that make up the location and alarm columns displayed on the Alarm Monitor The alarm record description field should be used to further identify or describe the EST input group it is going to be linked to Several input group records can be linked to the same alarm but it would be prudent to set up one alarm record for each input group record s that have the same device and location The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized The alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routin
408. ress n If you choose to continue a message similar to the following will display Enter the input group prefix c l ee ee et Enter the input group prefix 147 The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was SCS1 Is this correct y n y To continue accept the default y by pressing Enter To re enter the prefix press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following Making alarm id checks for input group prefix scs1 Deleting input group and alarm records The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp scs inpgrp del log tmp scs alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device kalatel map file Successfully deleted entries from switcher device allplex map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more cctv mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n yl If this script was called from the removal script then select n to not inform the system now since it s not running When re started the changes will take effect If the Picture Perfect system is running select y if you want these changes to take effect now or n if you want them to take effect at the next restart If n was selected you will return to the prompt or back to the r
409. result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed each Stentofon interface should have a different input group prefix that is used Specifically for that interface Do you know the input group prefixand want to continue y n y To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the following message will display Enter the input group prefix Enter the input group prefix 304 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 10 11 The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n yl To continue press y To stop press n If you chose to continue the records will be deleted and you will see messages similar to the following The input group prefix being used is STNO1 Making alarm id checks Deleting input group and alarm records The following log files contain the SQL statements and errors logged during the delete process tmp stn inpgrp del log tmp stn alarm del log Successfully deleted entries from switcher device allplex map file Successfully deleted entries from switcher device kalatel map file Un install completed You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want
410. rfect system to Facility Integrator DB25F to DB9F 1121121 253 Overview of the Picture Perfect and CBAS interface seestinnennntntttt ettet 254 xiii xiv Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual ure 95 ure 96 ure 97 g g g igure 98 igure 99 igure 100 igure 101 igure 102 igure 103 igure 104 igure 105 igure 106 igure 107 igure 108 igure 109 igure 110 igure 111 igure 112 igure 113 igure 114 igure 115 igure 116 igure 117 igure 118 igure 119 igure 120 igure 121 igure 122 igure 123 igure 124 igure 125 igure 126 igure 127 igure 128 igure 129 igure 130 igure 131 igure 132 igure 133 igure 134 g g ure 135 ure 136 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F TO DB25M ens 255 Cable pinouts splitter to Facility Integrator DB25M to DB9F ttes 255 Overview of the cable configuration using a splitter ttt 255 Overview of the redundant Picture Perfect and CBAS interface es 256 Overview of a standalone Picture Perfect and a RAN interface ttes 262 Overview of a redundant Picture Perfect and a RAN interface ttes 262 IipubgroUps TOFITI ctc c ette eret ie ete ice iemeceiil tette eel ecebatire dc deett eek 264 AGBS TOLLIS esee etatem emen endure iude du ricco Eten eosdem OS 266 Aldo EOn FORTES ssec ettet entera eese tte get tpe tbe te bier cie reti ertet tes
411. ription Modify the Alarm Priority to an appropriate level Refer to Figure 102 Alarms forms on page 266 as an example Note Ifthe priority is equal to or higher than the RAN alarm priority this would be a numerical value equal to or lower and was not responded to within the time specified in the Alarm Delay field on the Control Parameters form this alarm is sent to the remote system when communications are restored Modify the Alarm Routing to meet your requirements Refer to Figure 102 as an example Note The alarm must at least be routed to MONITOR Attach any instructions you want to the alarm When completed save the alarm by clicking Save 266 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 102 Alarms forms A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description x d amp Gl s E D I gt x ERREN Alarm Description instructions Description REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN LOST Facility GLOBAL Set Alarm Route Definition priority Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY v f Online Color Picker iNo Color Picker e Yes Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes O No Background Foreground Yes Immediate Reset Input No Yes Immediate Dial R
412. rity that an alarm must be equal to or lower than before the alarm can be sent to the remote system 4 Click Save 5 Restart Picture Perfect 264 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Remote Connection Lost Alarm During installation RAN automatically creates a default alarm and input group to be used when communications are lost with the remote system The alarm description is REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN LOST The alarm is set up with a priority of 15 and a routing to both the Alarm Monitor and history The input group used for this alarm has a description of REMOTE ALARM NOTIFICATION HOST However you may want to modify the alarm and input group to provide a more site specific description of the alarm condition Follow these steps to modify the input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 In the Description field of the Input Groups form enter REMOTE as the search criteria 3 Click Find At least two input group entries will be found Locate the REMOTE ALARM NOTIFICATION HOST input group in the grid 4 Editthe input group Description field Note The input group description or location displays as the Description on the Alarm Monitor form Therefore you may want to enter a more specific description such as the actual remote alarm system s name such as REMOTE RAN HOST hostname DO NOT edit any other field on this form most fields are ignored but others can prevent the a
413. rm number or print the report without sorting Continue with step 4 4 Enterthe number of the field you wish to sort on The file will be printed and the mapping options display which allows you to make another selection Refer to Figure 32 Example of printing a Kalatel CCTV alarm file on page 65 Figure 32 Example of printing a Kalatel CCTV alarm file f ktd_cctv_map E koe eee se eee see ee se ede ce e REE ERE EERE she dece ce cech ce e cec ce che ce cede che e ce che ce ce e ce ce ce e ke ck e ke kc e ke A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete an KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkk kkkkkkkkkkk kkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection p Print the CCTV controlled alarm translation file Printer name 1p5 Sort the map file Y N y Input Group Id Alarm Id Location Id Kalatel Site Number or Command String Index Ui e WN PR Exit Print without sorting Enter the number of the field to sort on 4 Request id is 1p5 12 1 file kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
414. rom the serial port When the EST interface finds this pattern it then searches for the panel device id by first advancing past the initial alarm line a set number of lines depending on the alarm type Once that line is found EST looks for the first colon After the first colon there will be a four digit id This is the panel device id EST then searches the input groups category of the Picture Perfect database for the combination of the Input Group Prefix and the panel device id See Input group prefix on page 171 for more information If it is found an alarm is sent to Picture Perfect from the EST interface with an input state that maps to the particular alarm The different alarm types are recognized by Picture Perfect and the Alarm Monitor The Alarm Monitor maps the alarm types in the Condition and Input State fields The mapping of the Alarm to Condition and Input fields is discussed in EST alarm mapping to the alarm monitor on page 176 The following is a sample message stream as typically seen from a printer Alarm Type J Panel Device ID field Qckckckokckckckckckck ckckck ckockckckockckckckckckck kok Ck KK k kk 11 23 93 07 54 59 SUPERVISORY OPEN 0206 07 54 1st Floor Strobe Circuit VLE KKK KKK KKK ckckck ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ck ck ck kk kk kk 11 24 1993 09 09 34 SUPERVISORY SHORT 0301 09 09 Air Handler 1 HOA Switch 0 0000 kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 11 24 1993 09 09 39 FIRE ALARM 02
415. ropriate input groups and alarms before they can be recognized Optionally an output group and associated outputs can be associated with an input group Redundant Systems The EST interface to Picture Perfect also supports operations in a Picture Perfect Redundant System PPRS environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single fire alarm system Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the fire alarm system This allows the physical connection of the fire alarm system to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the EST system interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host processes the alarm and forwards it to the Alarm Monitor Normal pprs processing will result in the alarm appearing on the backup host s Alarm Monitor Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are not processed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then process the alarms received from the EST system 167 Software requirements The software requirements for the firepanel system and the Picture
416. roteus For Windows Panasonic 550 The interface between Panasonic 550 WJ SX550A controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Pelco The interface between the Pelco CM9750 CCTV switcher and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Vicon Viper The interface between a Viper VPS13xx VPS1300 or VPS1344 controller and Picture Perfect provides the capability to automatically control CCTV cameras Chapter 1 Interface overview Firepanel systems supported by Picture Perfect All firepanel systems can exist in a Picture Perfect stand alone redundant two Picture Perfect hosts have connectivity to a single system receiver port by means of a splitter or enterprise environment which generate Picture Perfect alarms when an alarm is tripped or reset Communication is uni directional using a serial line connection meaning the Picture Perfect interface only receives data from the interface and does not send data back EST The EST interface to Picture Perfect acts as a secondary monitoring system for the EST panel and recognizes only the predefined message types built into the interface and set up through Picture Perfect It acts as a filter that recognizes predefined alarm conditions coming in over the serial line Once an alarm is detected the EST interface picks up a unique panel device ID contained within one of the message lines from the serial port This
417. rotocol and Data Formats for the AM2020 Fire Alarm Control Panel document revision 7 These messages must be configured on the Picture Perfect system There are two methods available to configure these messages 1 Automatically using the Notifier Fire Alarm data generator tool nf rgen 2 Manually using Picture Perfect If you plan to enter many messages at once we strongly recommend you use the nfrgen command line tool Using nfrgen exclusively to create or modify data records will enable you to keep track of the specific messages that are being monitored for a particular panel on a specific port This tool is explained in detail in the following section However if you choose to use Picture Perfect to insert the database records this procedure is explained starting on page 216 with the section entitled Using Picture Perfect to configure the Notifier interface Using nfrgen The Notifier Fire Alarm data generator tool nfrgen isa command line tool that installs or un installs database records that are associated with the Notifier fire alarm interface This tool is part of the Notifier Fire Alarm Interface package for Picture Perfect and is installed with the package The nfrgen tool will create the temporary files that it needs in the tmp directory as it processes an input file and later generates the associated database records The install portion of this tool is explained in the next section See nfrgen uninstall on page 214 for a
418. roup Redundant systems The Universal Intrusion system interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single intrusion receiver Connectivity is achieved by using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the intrusion receiver This allows the physical connection of the intrusion receiver to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the intrusion interface software executes on both Picture Perfect hosts and both receive alarm notifications However only the interface software executing on the primary host communicates with the intrusion receiver Whenever an alarm notification is received by the interface software it determines if it is executing on the primary host Alarm notifications received by the interface software executing on the redundant host are processed but output to the receiver is suppressed In the case of a failover the mode on the redundant host will change to indicate that it is now the primary and the interface software will then conduct communications with the Universal Intrusion receiver Software requirements The software requirements for the Universal Intrusion system and the Picture Perfect system are listed below Stand alone system If you are using a stand alone Picture Perfect system the following items are required Picture Perfect base base package Picture Perfect
419. roup Id of the alarm to be deleted Once a valid Input Group Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Alarm Id Enter the associated Alarm Id Once a valid Alarm Id has been entered you will be prompted for the associated Location Id Enter the associated Location Id Once a valid Location Id has been entered you will be prompted for the Outgoing AlphaCom Alarm Number to which the Picture Perfect alarm you have just specified is mapped Enter the number of the AlphaCom alarm The mapping file is checked to see if there are any lines that match the information entered If there are no lines the message No Matching Lines Found displays and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option to perform If a matching line is found you are asked to confirm the deletion If the entries are correct select y and all matching lines in the mapping files are removed and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option to perform If you select n the mapping files are not altered and you are returned to the Selection prompt where you may choose another mapping option to perform 36 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 12 Example of deleting an AlphaCom alarm TET ON kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add an outgoing AlphaCom controlled alarm D Delete an outgoing AlphaCom contr
420. roup description IGP ACCOUNT NUMBER MESSAGE lt MODIFIER gt where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 MESSAGE is up to fifteen characters and can be DEVICE MISSING DEVICE RESTORED or ABORT MODIFIER is a four digit string 0 to 9999 Loop Bypass X Message Type To recognize Loop Bypass message types use the following format in the input group description IGP ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER USER NUMBER STATUS where IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters ACCOUNT NUMBER is a five digit string 0 to 99999 LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 USER NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 STATUS is the string Bypass Loop Reset Y Message Type To recognize Loop Reset messages use the following format in the input group description IGP ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER USER NUMBER STATUS where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters e ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string 0 to 99999 e LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 e USER NUMBER is a three digit string 0 to 999 e STATUS is the string Reset Loop z Message Type To recognize Loop messages use the following format in the input group description 152 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual IGP ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER LOOP TYPE LOOP STATUS gt where IGP is th
421. rrected by the user before any records can be removed using the stngen9600 tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed That means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file It is recommended that any input group alarm pairs created manually be added to the stngen9600 input file so they can be recreated if the uninstall option is used Using stngen uninstall Before you start e You must have root permissions to run the stngen9600 tool e The database must be running stngen9600 will check this when the tool is invoked If the database is not running the tool will attempt to start it up e You must know the input group prefix used by the Stentofon 9600 interface that is being targeted for uninstallation 334 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Follow these steps to use the stngen9600 tool to uninstall database records 1 E ey Log in as a user with system permission Open a new window Type su root to become the root user Change to the directory where the input file n
422. s on how to program the Stentofon to forward data to an external system This configuration must be done prior to installation of the Picture Perfect Stentofon 9600 Interface Software package e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COMO are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the Stentofon 9600 communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system to the intercom console port Refer to Figure 120 320 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 120 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to intercom system DB25F to DB25M Stentofon 9600 Intercom System Black Box Converter Picture Perfect Host Computer DB25F DB25M GND 7 7 GND Tx 2 3 Rx Rx 3 2 TX Figure 121 Overview of the Picture Perfect and intercom interface 2 prg r c x Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual
423. s Head Office Garage 18 Penthouse Press RETURN for more 193 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 Facility A 22 Facility B 23 Notifier Facility Enter the value of the default Notifier facility 1 23 1 Enter the number of the default facility to use with the Notifier interface This value will be used when creating input group and alarm records from the entries in the input file for which a specific facility is not specified The facility you selected will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You have selected as the default facility Notifier Facility Is this ok y n yl Entera y toconfirm oran n to re enter the default facility If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered a y the facility you selected and its id will be displayed and you will be prompted for the default alarm priority to use for the alarms created Default Facility chosen is Notifier Facility k End of Default Notifier Facility assignment portion k Do you want to install the fixed message types y n y Enter y to install the fixed message types or n 211 212 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 15 16 Using the prefix specified the Notifier type will be retrieved from the configuration file The input file will then be checked for formatting errors and you will be prompted to enter the default alarm priority as follows Getting
424. s SET pathname cas bin msan modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 85 Interface data file backup and restore The Central Station interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 7 below Normal use of the interface software may cause changes to one or more of these files Backups should be done on a regular basis A good practice is to do it at the same time the Picture Perfect database is backed up The Central Station interface installation procedure automatically updates the Picture Perfect backup configuration list file cas db text backup cfg so that future backups will include the files required for the Central Station interface Refer to the Picture Perfect documentation for information on how to backup and restore files Table 7 Central Station interface data files Data file name Description cas db text cstation comm cfg TTY port extended configuration definition file isthe port name eg ttyl forAIX ttyDOO1 for Linux cas db text cstation map Alarm map file that defines the Picture Perfect alarm events to be forwarded to the Central Station system cas db text cstation input Protected input file used
425. s of the Central Station interface and the tool that is used to specify which alarms are to be routed to the Central Station system is provided in Configuration on page 74 It is strongly recommended that this section be read before installing the Central Station interface software The Central Station interface to Picture Perfect can exist in standalone subhost and network host versions of Picture Perfect It is not available for Redundant Picture Perfect systems due to the single serial connection between the Picture Perfect host and Central Station system In all applications there is a one to one correspondence between Picture Perfect and a Central Station system receiver port You will not be able to connect all subhosts in a network to a single Central Station system receiver port Each subhost must interface with its own Central Station system receiver port Software requirements e Picture Perfect Base base package e Picture Perfect Central Station interface CStat ion package Hardware requirements The following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e Serial ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem
426. s utility is provided below Note You should configure the Picture Perfect software for multiple device support only if CCTV commands are to be routed to more than one switcher device for an alarm event There is a slight performance penalty for this configuration as the switcher device mapping tables must be fully searched to find all matches indicating the routing of a CCTV command for the specific alarm event To change the Picture Perfect CCTV switcher device support option to multiple perform the following steps 1 Log in to the system as root 2 Enterthe command cas bin profile 3 Enterthe command cas bin msan set multiple The following is a sample output from this command Querying the tps daemons table Updating tps daemons entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 Statement UPDATE tps daemons SET pathname cas bin msan m modify date 20030423 modify time 195449 WHERE id 54 statement processed OK 1 rows affected WHERE id 54 Statement processed OK 1 rows affected Successfully update tps daemons table entry 54 cas bin msan R A 20030421 175910 70 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Interface data file backup and restore The CCTV interface software requires several data files for its operation These files are created during the software installation process and are summarized in Table 4 Normal use of the interface software may result in changes to one or more of these files A ba
427. scription field These rules will vary depending on the message type to be monitored Message types that have device and or status variability are as follows Message type abbreviation A T R Message type Alarm Trouble Restore Force Arm Fault System Alarm Trouble Supervisory System Message with Modifier System Alarm Trouble Supervisory 92 unique messages Loop Bypass Loop Reset Loop messages with subtypes Alarm a Restore r Fault w Reset y Trouble t Force Arm b and Bypass x Disarmed Armed Late to Arm Code Number Added Code Number Deleted Code Number Changed Permanent Schedule Changed Message type abbreviation Message type Temporary Schedule Changed n Primary Schedule Changed i Secondary Schedule Changed J Door Access Granted V Variable length message with Type It is crucial to understand the format for each message type when setting up an input group since this is the key to monitoring messages from the SCS 1 system The input group description field is limited to 60 characters which will be fully utilized in many cases to uniquely identify a specific message type and status for a particular device Each message type will always use the input group prefix as the first part of the description See Identifying the Input Group Prefix on page 138 for more information If you are going to add a number of input group records for the DMP SCS 1 interface it is suggested that you use
428. se input The current versions that are supported by the stngen9600 tool are e 1 7 2 0 and 4 0 AIX and Linux Input file data format The lines of data that follow the version information should contain rows of delimited text data that define the paging station identifier the communication activity and optionally a CCTV device or switcher name and the CCTV alarm number The delimiter character between fields must be the I symbol There should be one line of data for each unique combination that is going to be monitored The format of a data record is as follows lt IntercomStation gt lt messagetype gt lt AlarmDesc gt lt Facility gt lt CCTVDeviceName gt lt CCTVNumber gt lt Port gt lt IntercomStation gt This is the 2 character Intercom station identification number valid values are 01 through 96 as described in Message types on page 342 lt messagetype gt Identifies the type of message and is one of Request Connect Busy or Disconnect corresponding to the Intercom protocol messages as defined in Message types on page 342 AlarmDesc This is the unique alarm message text to be displayed on the Picture Perfect Alarm Monitor screen and or logged to the history file The maximum length of this field is 60 characters Facility This is the id ofthe facility that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the stngen9600 program you will be prompted to s
429. so and they are being printed then call GE Security Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 342 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Message types All message types that will be recognized by the Stentofon 9600 interface software follow a uniform structure The format will always be a 5 character record preceded by a start of text Stx 02hex character and followed by a carriage return CR20D hex character and line feed LF 0A hex character pair The following is a representation of this line structure lt STX gt TSXXY lt CR gt lt LF gt lt STX gt This is the start of text character AT This is the ASCII character transmit from master designator S A specific code defining the type of message line e A Call from substation Request B Master selected substation Connected Busy e C Master released substation Disconnect XX This represents a substation number 01 96 Y Used to determine if there was a successful connection If S A and Y 1 2 or 3 Button Pushed e If S B and Y 1 Connected If S B and Y 2 Busy lt CR gt lt LF gt This is the carriage return and line feed message line terminator pair The types of message lines as defined by the S field that are accepted and processed by the Stentofon 9600 interface software are described in the following paragraphs Message Type A Request This message type defines an intercom request to connect to the Stentofon 9600
430. soa Enter product number s separated by to select 4 q to quit B Type the corresponding product number for example 12 to install the Kalatel KTD 312 CCTV Interface kalatel package and press You will be asked to confirm your choice You have selected the following product s 12 kalatel Kalatel KTD 312 CCTV Interface Is this correct y n y To confirm type y You will be asked to confirm the installation Installing kalatel Picture Perfect Multi package Installation 1 14 2 7 02 Copyright C 1991 2003 GE Interlogix Inc 15 16 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Installing from image in mnt cdrom pp 663 blocks Do you want to install the Picture Perfect Kalatel package y n y To confirm type y Ene Messages similar to the following will display Checking if need to save nls or help files Picture Perfect NLS Text Save 1 16 1 19 03 Copyright C 1994 2003 GE Interlogix Inc Fri Apr 8 17 33 39 EDT 2003 This package has no nls or help files to save KALATEL INST Picture Perfect Installation Version 1 4 7 23 02 Copyright C 1992 2003 GE Interlogix Inc Installing this package will configure this machine to interface to the KALATEL CCTV system Configuring ports This section describes how to configure the ports and identify the baud rate The instructions are listed below During the installation the following message displays Digiboard port ex
431. ss to the stngen9600 tool and the database tools it uses Type stngen9600 10 11 329 Messages similar to the following will appear on the screen Stentofon 9600 Data Generator 2 0 Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records i u i To use the install option type i The following messages will display You have chosen to install database records Please enter input file name Enter the name of your input file The input file you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it You entered as the input file name stn9600 inp Is this correct y n y To confirm the input file name accept the default y by pressing Ever Enter n to change the name If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the name If you entered y the following messages will display Enter the input group prefix to be used when creating the records It must be 5 to 5 characters with the last character s numeric For example STNO1 NOTE This prefix must be the same one that is used by the interface that is being targeted Refer to the documentation for more information about input group prefixes Enter the input group prefix Enter the name of your input group prefix The input group prefix you entered will be displayed and you will be asked to confirm it The input group prefix you entered was STNO1 Is this correct y n y To confirm the input group prefix accept the default
432. ssible settings for this variable Table 17 Possible settings for alarm response states Settings Description PENDING A response has been made but the alarm has not been reset DISPOSE Removes the alarm if it has been reset otherwise it is marked as completed REMOVE A response has been made and the alarm has been reset PURGED Logs all alarms and deletes them even if they are not reset The default for AlarmDisposition is DISPOSE DO NOT CHANGE THIS VALUE unless you are an advanced user TCP IP configuration Since the RAN system communicates with the remote system using TCP IP protocol over the Ethernet network both the RAN and remote systems must know the port number of the RAN service The port number can be compared to a telephone number Both the Picture Perfect network host and the remote system must know the number in order to communicate with each other The default port number assigned at time of installation is 9011 This is recorded in the etc services file This file is a phone book of network services of which RAN is one entry The system administrator or network administrator is responsible for making sure that no two services have the same port number If the RAN 9011 number is already in use by another service it can be changed to another value by editing the etc services file If changed notify the remote system of the new number Note To support functionality in a redundant environment
433. ssociated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the appropriate input group records will point to the same alarm record Note Do not use an alarm description that matches the description field of an already existing alarm record in the Picture Perfect database This is an illegal condition that scsgen checks for before any data is generated Facility The sixth column is used to specify the acility idthat will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified 132 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid facility id values create a report using as the SQL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column
434. stem to SCS 1 receiver DB25F to DB25F Picture Perfect Host DMP SCS 1 Receiver Computer DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG P Be ze c x Figure 45 Overview of a Picture Perfect system and an intrusion interface 5301431A Redundant system If you have a Picture Perfect redundant system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Redundant Edition User Manual DMP SCS 1 receiver provided by the manufacturer Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the DMP SCS 1 communication program is started A standard splitter box Two pass through cables to connect the Picture Perfect hosts to the standard splitter ports Refer to Figure 44 121 122 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 46 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to splitter DB25F to DB25M Picture Perfect System Splitt
435. t cece ccc e eee e eee e eee e ee eenes 6 DMP SCS c E n 6 Universal Intrusio seers HESSE dp EESE A TERES 6 Intercom systems supported by Picture Perfect ccc cece cece cece eee eee ene e eee neeeeenees 7 AIDMOGOM ES 6 E 7 COMMENG mA 7 Stentofon Stentofon MCH 10 0 cece cece cece eee ees re erre ri eres 7 Stentofon J600 ETE 7 Miscellaneous systems supported by Picture Perfect cece cece cece teen eee e eee eeeeenees 8 Central StQtiOM 4 45 whites PEEEEEEMRRRTWWT ES 8 koi cC 8 Remote AlarmiNotifiCatioE ase erp ERO a eee een E ida sks eee ELE DE Ep FS 8 OH Re celVe icones tad s t ehe E OR ERRERRRETP ERR REESCPLNDUNURRUE ER RN ME RE 8 iv Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Chapter 2 Appendix A installing and TEMOVING iouis ees s due des o ar EY RP FERRO ERE ERERA TR ne 9 OVerVIe Ws o n owpIeRe er P Deo TD NE UND ETREEE RN E RE UE Geen es ERU RUNET Sates EN NA noes 10 DIXIE 11 BREL 11 ncm 11 Installing Picture Perfect base software cece cece eee eee ehh nmn 13 Installing on a Redundant SysteM cece cece cece eee e hm enhn 13 Installing the interface software l ussssesleeeleeeeee ehm hh hn 14 Cotitigurilg POMS es ciai oho oper eret pel bte oe PO at C ee RE ERE 16 Installing On d Redundant sVSter ep ER et CS o SR Rel SEES EN M MERI E 18 Gotitgurimng additionalinterfaces a epuLDDnR x Ea an uera eoo
436. t Interface Tool SMIT utility from the system console In addition the serial port baud rate connection and physical location of the port are configured using the SMIT utility Once the serial port has been configured using the SMIT utility it will be recognized by Picture Perfect during the interface software package installation Follow the directions below to configure the ports 1 Loginas root and open a terminal window 2 Type smit maktty The SMIT utility will load and a list of TTY types will display Refer to Figure 1 Figure 1 TTY type screen TTY Type Move cursor to desired item and press Enter tty rs232 Asynchronous Termina tty rs422 Asynchronous Terminal es F3 Cancel Fid t Enter Do n Find Next 3 Selectthe TTY tty rs232 Asynchronous Terminal A list of parent adapters for each available serial port will be displayed An example is shown in Figure 2 Parent adapter screen on page 12 12 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 2 Parent adapter screen Parent Adapter Move cursor to desired item and press Enter sa2 Available 10 78 IBM 2 R5 422A PCI Adapte Available 01 51 5 Available 01 52 Sta Fi Help 2 Refres F3 Cancel FS Inage Enter Do Find 4 Determine where the interface line will be connected to the RISC System 6000 At least one of the two standard serial ports is used by the support modem sal The other standard serial port sa
437. t as follows Delay Time Boolean Type Input Group State Open Condition Short Condition Broadcast State Changes Alarm 3 Click Save 0 Individual Enabled Ignored Ignored No Should point to the alarm record generated for this input group 4 Click New to add another input group Figure 57 Sample input groups screen 6A Inputs Outputs Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones input Groups Inputs Output Groups Outputs Input Group Events Output Group Events Description Q 4 Exesv4 x Qo i Define Input Group Parent Input Groups Output Groups Description ESTO1 0103 Room 304 Faciity GLOBAL fata inn i Input Group State Open Condition Disabled Ignored Enabled Detected Boolean Type Short Condition OR Any AND All Individual Ignored Detected Broadcast State Changes No Yes Alarm Pull Station Bldg 2 South Wall goo Pul i g u x E Results 1 records Modifying an input group Follow these steps to modify an input group 1 Select Configuration Inputs Outputs then Input Groups 2 Enter the input group description you are looking for as the search criteria 3 Click Find The desired input group should appear 4 Editthe desi
438. t line gt fields follow next The beginning data delimiter character follows The data field characters are all in the ASCII printable range decimal 32 to decimal 126 Multiple data blocks within the data field are separated by the data field separator for example block1 block2 The ending data delimiter is used after the last data block The message ends with a carriage return CR character The packet Cyclic Redundancy Check field is a 6 byte ASCII hex string It is calculated the same way for both receiver messages and computer responses It incorporates two different error detection schemes packet summing and column parity The packet CRC occupies digits 1 and 2 the column parity occupies digits 3 and 4 and the size is placed in digits 5 and 6 Refer to the Appendix of the SIA Computer Interface Standard 1990 document for implementation details on the CRC The Receiver rec and Line line fields are both two character ASCII text strings Valid characters in these strings are 0 through 9 and A through Z If not used they should be set to 00 The Sequence Number seq field is a four character ASCII text string The four ASCII characters represent a 16 bit BCD value that increments with each unique message packet Allowable values are 0001 to 9999 The value 9999 is succeeded by the value 0001 Picture Perfect will increment the sequence number when one of the following conditions occurs 1 A valid acknowled
439. t system that the mapping file has been changed However if Picture Perfect is restarted the current mapping file is read automatically In other words all your changes will be read at that time whether or not you are done with them Refer to Figure 34 Example of exiting the program on page 67 to see the prompts and messages that display when exiting from the package prefix cctv map program Figure 34 Example of exiting the program m ktd cctv map UN kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkk k kkkkkkk kkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms X Exit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kk kkkkkkkk kkkkkkk k kkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection x You have made changes to the mapping file Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n y Sent SIGUSR2 signal to kalatel interface task ktd tty5 pid 22704 on this host Sent SIGUSR2 signal to kalatel interface task ktd tty7 pid 22706 on this Ke host J Configuring and monitoring alarms in Picture Perfect There are no special alarms that need to be configured on the Picture Perfect system for the CCTV system Refer to your Picture Perfect User Manual for details on monitoring alarms If the optional video loss monitoring alarm reporting capability has been configured
440. t the priority alarm routing and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the Monitor for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor and to allow control of CCTV cameras Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 42 Sample alarm screen A Alarms Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors AlarmEvents Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description La d4uExo 4 9x Qi QO i Alarm Description Instructions Description Facility Priority 50 Route Definition ilm a Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY m 7 f Online Color Picker Omo Color Picker 6 Yes Color Sample Inhibit Schedule Changes 6 No Background Foreground Yes j Immediate Reset Input No O Yes j Immediate Dial Required 6 No Yes j Reset Outputs 6 Auto Reset Outputs Manual Reset Outputs Il gt l Duration Reset Outputs Results 0 records 113 Follow these steps to modify an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Inthe Description field of the Alarms screen enter the appropriate search criteria 3 Click Find 4 Editthe desired information 5
441. tall or put it in a separate input file Input file error checking The input file will be checked for error conditions before any data records are generated If an error occurs within the input file the stngen9600 tool will display the error on the screen The type of error the column it occurred in and the line it occurred on in the input file will be given The input file must be error free before any data records are generated Input group prefix The Stentofon 9600 interface uses the input group prefix to search specific input group records for messages that are to be monitored This input group prefix was established at installation time of the interface for every serial line that was configured The prefix for the Stentofon 9600 interface is stored in the configuration file for 327 that interface and is read every time it is started With this in mind it is a requirement to know the input group prefix of the interface for which the stngen9600 tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text stn ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Stentofon 9600 interface for that port Input group prefix usage when installing When using the install portion of the stngen9600 tool t
442. ter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Commend interface if you so desire then re run the script 104 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual 11 If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number of facilities on your system exceeds 18 you will need to press to continue through the list until you get to the prompt When you observe the facility that you desire to use by default with the interface keep track of the number This list will be similar to the following Acquiring facility list from database Please wait The following facilities are defined on your system and available to be chosen as the default facility DEFAULT FACILITY Building 1 Building Building Building BUILDING 5 BLDG 1 2 3 4 5 AND PARKING BLDG 2 STUDIO os BLDG 2 DESIGN AID 10 Security Control Center 11 Head Office 12 Building 1 Garage 13 Building 2 Garage 14 Building 3 Garage 15 Building 4 Garage 16 Building 5 Garage 17 Head Office Garage 18 Penthouse Press RETURN for more 19 B 1 COMP ROOMS 20 REGENT COURT 21 FAcility A 22 Facility B 23 Commend FAcility Enter the value of the default Commend facility 1 23 1 AINA d C00 INO S Ae 0 IN Enter the number of the default facility to use
443. ter pair The following is a representation of this line structure Sync MessageType Datal Data2 DataN CR LF C The underscore character represents a blank space 20 hex character Sync This is the synchronization marker NUL 00 hex character lt MessageType gt This is a 4 character field that defines the message line contents lt Datax gt These are 4 character data fields with interpretation based on lt MessageType gt lt CR gt lt LF gt This is the carriage return and line feed message line terminator pair The types of message lines as defined by the MessageType field that are accepted and processed by the Stentofon interface software are described in the following paragraphs 312 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Message Type 0307 Local Call Request The following is the structure of a Type 0307 message line Sync 0307 Station Datal CR LF Station This is a 4 character pager station number originating the call request with valid values from FFFO through 9999 leading Fs used instead of 0s lt Datal gt Information that is not important to the Stentofon interface This message type defines a pager request to connect to the Stentofon Intercom System master exchange from a local location Message Type 0507 Remote Call Request The structure of a Type 0507 message line is as follows lt Sync gt lt 0507 gt _ lt Station gt _ lt
444. terface for which the cmdgen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text cmd ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Commend interface for that port Input group prefix usage when installing When using the install portion of the cmdgen tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the Commend interface that is being targeted 101 Input group prefix when un installing The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the cmdgen tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the Alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the tool The input group user interface can be used to correct this situation by re assigning
445. the CCTV system where package prefix is the prefix for the CCTV interface package as listed above The package prefix cctv map program does not allow you to edit an alarm To make changes to an alarm you must first delete the alarm and then add a new alarm If the CCTV interface has been configured for a redundant Picture Perfect environment then the changes made to the map file are reflected on the redundant host Refer to the following sections for more information Adding an alarm on page 60 Deleting an alarm on page 62 Changing an alarm on page 63 Printing the map file on page 64 Exiting the program on page 66 Torunthe package prefix cctv map program you need to be at the command prompt of a terminal window or on the system console To open a terminal window and start the program 1 Left click on a blank portion of the screen The Clients menu displays Select New Window A dtterm window will appear with the title dtterm If you are not logged in as the root user you will need to type su root to become the root user You can now start the lt package prefix gt cctv_map program To run the package prefix cctv map program type package prefix cctv map 59 60 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Adding an alarm This section describes how to add a new CCTV controlled alarm The Kalatel ktd_cctv_map is used as an example Refer to Figure 30 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm on
446. the Notifier interface for that port Fixed messages types The n rgen tool will optionally allow you to install the fixed message types which are messages that do not have a device type associated with them These are messages that are generated by the Notifier panel rather than a specific device type It is recommended that these messages be installed as they provide information about the panel and events that are triggered on the panel Individual message types can later be disabled through the input group user interface if they are deemed unnecessary The following fixed message types will be generated for the description field of the input group records with the input group prefix attached to them in the description field An example follows the fixed message types listed below ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL e TROUBL SYSTEM TROUBLE e ACK TB SYSTEM TROUBLE CLR TB SYSTEM TROUBLE e ACL TB SYSTEM TROUBLE e SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED e SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED e DETECTOR TEST IN PROGRESS e DETECTOR TEST ALL OK e DETECTOR TEST FAIL LAMP TEST ACTIVATED LAMP TEST COMPLETE e BLOCK ACKNOWLEDGE ALARM SILENCED Notifier 400 Specific e ACKNOWLEDGE Notifier 400 Specific MANUAL EVACUATE Notifier 400 Specific One alarm record is automatically generated for all the fixed message types which means each input group created will be associated to the same alarm record It will have the input group prefix attached to it in the descriptio
447. the alarm that it is linked to so that it does not conflict with alarms that are going to be removed This is to prevent the accidental removal of alarm records to which other input group records are linked Input group and alarm records generated by cmdgen The input file processed by cmdgen produces input group and alarm database records that are inserted into the database when the tool is run The input group records created are unique for each valid line in the input file This is done by combining the input group prefix From To Station identification numbers and communication activity information into the description field of an input group record If optional CCTV information is specified a new entry will be created and appended to the mapping table file for the specified CCTV switcher interface program For example let s examine the first line of data in the example input file described earlier and assume an input group prefix of cmd07 FF23 FF13 21 22 BLK 23 STA 13 Request 1 grundig 25510 tty3 This line would generate one input group record with the following value CMD07 FF23 FF13 21 22 One alarm record would be generated with the following description field BLK 23 STA 13 Request The input group record would be linked to this alarm Since CCTV information has been provided a new entry will be added to the grundig interface program mapping table file to enable control of grundig camera 255 in block 10 for this input group specifi
448. the following ALARM ACK AL CLR ALorACL AL e DEV TYPE is one ofthe device types from the detector or monitor module types listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 228 e LDDis the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0210 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example to configure a SMOKE ION detector located at LDD 905 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descriptions NFR1 ALARM SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACK AL SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 CLR AL SMOKE ION 905 NFR1 ACL AL SMOKE ION 905 The above example assumes you are using an input group prefix of NFR1 which is established at installation Trouble Message Type To recognize Trouble Message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt lt STATUS gt lt DEV TYPE gt lt LDD gt where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to 4 characters e STATUS is one of the following TROUBL ACK TB CLR TBorACL TB e DEV TYPEis one of the device types from the detector monitor module or control module types listed in Table 13 Device Types on page 228 e LDD is the loop number and detector module number L equates to the loop number 1 9 0210 DD equates to the detector module number 1 99 For example to configure a SMOKE ION detector located at LDD 905 for the four available status types you would create four input groups each with the following descript
449. the input group prefix pager identification number and communication activity information into the description field of an input group record If optional CCTV information is specified a new entry will be created and appended to the mapping table file for the specified CCTV switcher interface program For example let s examine the second line of data in the example input file described earlier and assume an input group prefix of STNO3 01 Request Station amp 01 Request 1i allegiant O tty2 This line would generate one input group record with the following Description field STNO1 01 Request One alarm record would be generated with the following Description field Station 01 Request The input group record would be linked to this alarm Since CCTV information has been provided a new entry will be added to the Kalatel interface program mapping table file to enable control of Kalatel camera 6 for this input group specification After CCTV switcher mapping table files are updated signals may be sent to the CCTV switcher interface tasks to force a reload of the mapping files to make CCTV control for the Stentofon active 328 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual There are obviously other important fields to an input group and alarm record that automatically get filled in by the generator For the input group records the following fields are set accordingly Delay Time 0 Boolean Type Individual Input Group State Enabled Open Co
450. the input group prefix used by the Commend interface that is being targeted for un installation 107 Follow these steps to use the cmdgen tool to un install database records 1 2 Loginas root Type cas bin profile This will ensure you have the correct PATH environment variable that will give you access to the cmdgen tool and the database tools it uses Type cmdgen Messages similar to the following appear on the screen Commend Data Generator 2 0 If the Commend package was configured for operation in a redundant Picture Perfect environment you will also see messages similar to the following Redundant commend interface configuration detected This host primaryl Other host backup1i Redundant commend operation is ENABLED The commend interface changes will be reflected on the other host Would you like to i nstall or u ninstall data records To use the install option type u The following messages will display You have chosen the UN INSTALL portion of this script You must enter the input group prefix to un install the Commend database records This is the first 4 to 5 characters used in the description field of the input group records Entering this prefix will result in the removal of the input group and associated alarm records from the database If running multiple interfaces make sure you enter the prefix that matches the input group prefix used for that particular interface If properly installed
451. the message PP ascii the program number for intercom messages TT ascii the sender of the message XXXX ascii the Block number YYYY ascii the Station number ascii the Message Type SS ascii the Checksum ETX hex 03 hex end of text marker Valid values for the block station number are FFF1 to 9999 The types of message lines as defined by the field that are accepted and processed by the Commend interface software are described below Table 10 Description of Message Lines Message type Description 21 Request 22 Request 10 Clear 30 Clear 12 Acknowledge 31 Acknowledge OA Release 1D Duress The checksum SS is computed by subtracting all data bytes plus the ETX from hex FF The checksum algorithm that is used by the Commend interface software is described below checksum SS hex FF RR PP TT XX XX YY YY Where FF hex FF RR hex the receiver of the message PP hex the program number for intercom messages TT hex the sender of the message XXXX hex the Block number YYYY hex the Station number s hex the Message Type Note All ASCII bytes are converted to hex nibbles before the subtraction 116 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Appendix E Configuring a DMP SCS interface This appendix provides information on configuring the DMP SCS 1 interface to Picture Perfect which acts as a secondary monitoring system for the intrusion syste
452. the scsgen data generator tool which is capable of quickly producing input group and associated alarm records automatically given a formatted input file See the section entitled Using the scsgen Data Generator Tool on page 124 for more information on using this tool The input group prefix used in any of the listed message types must match the one established in the appropriate configuration file See Identifying the Input Group Prefix on page 138 for more information When establishing an input group record the description field must follow the format for the appropriate message type Uppercase characters are required and there should be exactly one space between each field for each of the message types described in the following sections Note Be aware that input groups and associated alarms that are created manually will be removed if the uninstall portion of the scsgen tool is run since it removes records according to the input group prefix Database records added manually using Picture Perfect should be added to an scsgen input file so they may later be recreated in the event scsgen uninstall is used Alarm A Message Type To recognize Alarm message types use the following format in the input group description lt IGP gt ACCOUNT NUMBER LOOP NUMBER LOOP TYPE STATUS where e IGP is the input group prefix Up to four characters e ACCOUNT NUMBER isa five digit string From 0 to 99999 e LOOP NUMBER is a three digit string
453. the security needs of the customer facility Read these instructions and all ancillary documentation entirely before installing or operating this product The most current versions of this and related documentation may be found on our website Refer to Online publication library on page 26 for instructions on accessing our online publication library Note A qualified service person complying with all applicable codes should perform all required hardware installation Conventions used in this document The following conventions are used in this document Bold Menu items and buttons Italic Emphasis of an instruction or point special terms File names path names windows panes tabs fields variables and other GUI elements Titles of books and various documents Blue italic Electronic version Hyperlinks to cross references related topics and URL addresses Monospace Text that displays on the computer screen Programming or coding sequences Safety terms and symbols These terms may appear in this manual A CAUTION Cautions identify conditions or practices that may result in damage to the equipment or other property A WARNING Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in equipment damage or serious personal injury xvi Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Chapter 1 Interface overview This chapter provides an overview of the different types of inter
454. the unique location of the event the reader is also reported This gives you the ability to specify the exact camera to turn on because you know at what reader the lost badge is being used See Table 3 for a listing of location types and alarm conditions Detailed information can be found in the Picture Perfect User Manual Table 3 Where input groups are used Location Type Alarm Condition Area Invalid Badge expired or no category match Suspended Badge Lost Badge Unknown Badge Anti Passback Duress Door Forced Open Held Open Pre alarm Reader Valid Badge exit button tamper only Invalid Badge all badge errors except Unknown Input Point Alarm Micro Badge History Overflow Alarm History Overflow Upstream Micro Communications Failure Downstream Micro Communications Failure Reader Communications Failure Host Host to Host Communications Failure Network Database Communications Failure 58 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Using SQL reports During the installation process nine SQL reports are installed e CCTV Areas e CCTV Doors e CCTV Inputs e CCTV Micros CommFailure e CCTV Micros Overflow e CCTV Micros ReaderFailure e CCTV Readers e CCTV Hosts e CCTV Alarms These reports provide you with the information that you will need to know about mapping alarms to a CCTV system To add or delete an alarm from the CCTV syst
455. then the appropriate input group description should be checked to make sure that it follows the format specified for that message type listed under the Adding or modifying input groups on page 108 Make sure the appropriate Input Group prefix is being used in the description field and that it matches the one established upon installation in the cmd ttyN cfg configuration file Also check the alarm routing field of the corresponding Alarm Record to make sure that the routing includes Monitor If there is a printer hooked up to the Commend system then the resulting messages that are being monitored by the interface can be compared against the printed output in terms of the parts of a message that are used to make up an input group or alarm record description field If there are messages that are not being recognized by the interface that have been set up to do so and they are being printed then call Customer Support for further assistance in debugging the problem 115 Commend Intercom System Message Structure All messages that will be recognized by the Commend interface software follow a uniform structure This structure consists of a message containing 20 bytes The first character of a message is an STX 02 hex character synchronization marker and the last is an ETX 03 hex character The following is a representation of this structure STX RRPPTTXXXXYYYYSSSS ETX Where STX hex 02 hex start of text marker RR ascii the receiver of
456. ting should be set to the desired routing If you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select None from the Set Alarm Routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows Online Yes e Immediate Reset Input Immediate Reset Input e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing facility and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor and to allow control of CCTV cameras Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 126 Sample Alarm screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms AlarmColors AlarmEvents AlarmMessages AlarmResponses l Alarm Description Instructions mena KW ECT a a a Description Station 01 Connect Faciity GLOBAL x ES ra Priority j 50 1 Route Definition uim V Alarm Routing MONITOR AND HISTORY EA j No i Yes iit Schedule Changes No Yes i Immediate Reset Input No Yes Color Picker Color Picker J Color Sampl
457. tion stngen9600 install The install portion of the tool generates input group and alarm database records Before running the install program you will need to e Create an input file e Know the input group prefix e Create a list of the paging stations that are going to be monitored This kind of report can be obtained from the Stentofon 9600 system 324 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Input file An input file is required when using the install portion of the stngen9600 tool It describes the types of messages and pager locations to be monitored by the Stentofon 9600 alarm interface The input file is a text editable file that must be created prior to running the tool The installation portion of the tool will ask you the name of the input file you want to use The input file will be parsed by the tool and the appropriate input group and alarm records will be created If the input specifies activation of CCTV devices the appropriate definition records will be generated and appended to the mapping file specific to each CCTV switcher interface The CCTV switcher interface tasks can be signalled to access the new information making CCTV control active with the new information The format and rules for the file are discussed in the following sections To create an input file you will need to know e The version of Picture Perfect you are running This is very important because the layout of the database records may be diff
458. to createthe cstation map file cas db text cstation accounts table The file defining Central Station system account numbers corresponding to Picture Perfect micro IDs Picture Perfect output to the Central Station system The Picture Perfect to Central Station System interface is generic and is recognizable by any Central Station system that accepts SIA formatted data ABM Data Systems and Monitoring Automation Systems MAS have been targeted as two candidates for the Central Station interface initial implementation Picture Perfect e Acts as a receiver of incoming alarms Processes selective types of data such as card and administrative maintenance on the Micro 5 intelligent field panels e Reformats alarm information into the industry accepted standard SIA format e Outputs the SIA formatted data Picture Perfect s primary roles are to offer the functionality of card access control and to output alarm information in standard format to the Central Station system The Picture Perfect to Central Station interface supports a single Central Station system connection per Picture Perfect host computer Interface port requirements The connection between Picture Perfect and the Central Station system conforms to the EIA standards for RS 232 serial communications The communication port must be set up to operate at 1200 baud 7 data bits odd parity Xon Xoff control enabled and 2 stop bits in the SIA mode emulating a Ra
459. to the AlphaCom system AlarmResendOnFailOver Value 1 enables resending alarm on communication resumption Value 0 disables it AlphaComNodeNum The node number of AlphaCom connected to this interface This value must be between 1 and 254 MyDevicelId The device Id of this interface as a unique device address when connected to AlphaCom This value must be between 1 and 64 PortName The name of the tty port where the cable is connected to the AlphaCom system For RISC platforms running the AIX operating system the port name is dev ttyN where N is a number For PC platforms running the Linux operating System the port name is dev ttyN where N is Dxxx digiboard port or Sxx COM port where x is a number Examples of valid port names are dev ttyl1 for AIX and dev ttyD001 for Linux PortBaud The baud rate of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system CharSize The character size of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system Parity The parity of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system Stop Bits The stop bits of the tty port used for communication with the AlphaCom system These values are set up at installation and are permanent DO NOT touch these lines RemoteConnAlarm PipeName PipeSize MaxRetries AlarmResendOnFailOver CharSize Parity StopBits The following values are installation responses Alpha
460. to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script If you entered y a message will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task ktd comm Sending signal USR2 to task msan 302 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Using stngen to generate new paging station data after an initial installation If there are new paging stations to be monitored by the Stentofon interface after an st ngen installation then one of the following methods should be used when using the stngen tool If you are going to be changing paging station data in the input file for existing database records then use Method 2 below Method 1 1 Create a new input file with the new data lines 2 Invoke stngen and use the new input file Method 2 1 Use stngen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be uninstalled that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file Output and output group information is lost whenever the stngen tool is used t
461. trol and alarm monitoring system which interfaces with the Simplex 4100 fire alarm system has been developed to receive specific alarms and resets The objective of this interface is to allow Picture Perfect to act as a secondary monitoring system for the Simplex fire and other life safety alarms This unique combination is an optional software package which generates a Picture Perfect alarm when an alarm is tripped or reset on the Simplex panel The Simplex 4100 sends this data using RS232 serial port to Picture Perfect by uni directional communication that is Picture Perfect will only receive data from Simplex it will not transmit data to Simplex With this interface the operator can now use the Picture Perfect graphical user features to observe alarm conditions detected by the Simplex system as opposed to receiving only the standard alarms such as invalid badge door held open door forced open generated by the Picture Perfect system alone Redundant systems The Simplex System interface to Picture Perfect supports operations in a Redundant Picture Perfect environment where two hosts have connectivity to a single Simplex System Connectivity is achieved using a splitter between the Picture Perfect system and the Simplex System This allows the physical connection of the Simplex System to an RS 232 serial port on each Picture Perfect host computer In a redundant configuration the Simplex System interface software executes on both Pi
462. ts for the Picture Perfect stand alone and the Picture Perfect redundant system are listed below Stand alone system If you have a Picture Perfect stand alone system the following items are required in addition to those listed in your Picture Perfect Installation Manual e AlphaCom Exchange System e Serial Ports One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a multiport asynchronous adapter EIA 232 is acceptable If any of the COM ports serial 1 or serial 2 are available they may also be used If the system uses an ASCII console then serial 1 will be reserved for the console Serial 2 is usually configured for a support modem One RS 232 C serial port any serial port on a Digi Expander board is acceptable If any of the COM ports COMI or COM2 are available they may also be used This configuration is done automatically when the AlphaCom communication program is started e Cable to connect the Picture Perfect system and the AlphaCom Refer to Figure 5 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AlphaCom exchange DB25F to DB25F on page 25 Figure 5 Cable pinouts Picture Perfect system to AlphaCom exchange DB25F to DB25F Picture Perfect Host AlphaCom Computer Receiver DB25F DB25F Shield 1 1 Shield Rxd 2 Rxd Txd 3 3 Txd 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 DCD SG 7 7 SG 26 2 E Lr c x Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 6 Overview of the Picture Perfect and Intercom interface
463. ty 15 Alarm Description cri REMOTE ALARM SYSTEM CONN REMOTE ALARM NOTIFICATION HOSTAlan MICRO 0 SA1 0 Alarm 19 35 33 UCS NOT RESPONDING 01 06 2005 19 36 55 01 06 2005 HOST TO MICRO 0 COMM FAIL UCS COMM FAILURE ERROR Location Condition Device Time m A 01 1 005 19 31 35 Advanced configuration The RAN system supports an extended configuration that allows you to alter its behavior This configuration information is keptinthe cas db text rantcpip cfg file This file consists of a series of text lines each containing a variable name followed by a value or setting Note DO NOT change this file unless absolutely necessary If you find it absolutely necessary to change this file you must be knowledgeable about text edit The following is the contents of the rantcpip cfg file HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHH HH rantcpip cfg 1 8 Copyright C 1992 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved rantcpip cfg 1 8 06 10 03 This file contains the configuration information for the RAN TCP IP service All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting True False labels can be answered with either TRUE FALSE YES NO RemoteConnResetReqd RemoteConnColdTO RemoteConnWarmTO ReplyToAlarmTO is a Yes No Value If set to yes then the loss of remote system connection alarm cannot be removed until the connection is re established Sets the n
464. ty id that will be used for the input group and alarm records generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted to select a Default SCS Facility from the currently defined facilities on the system If a Facility value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Facility that was selected will be used To determine the valid acility id values create a report using as the SOL statement Select id description FROM facility print the report and keep it handy when creating the input file Priority The seventh column is used to specify the priority that will be used for the alarm record generated During the execution of the scsgen program you will be prompted for the Default SCS Priority a number 137 in the range 1 500 If a Priority value is not specified in the input file then the Default SCS Priority will be used Example input file The following is an example of an input file for a Picture Perfect 4 0 system 4 0 A 12345 123 HU BLDG 3 ROOM 7 EXHAUST HOOD 23 25 kalatel 12 tty2 A 30122 001 BA FRONT DOOR 10 5 R 30122 001 BA FRONT DOOR 10 A 30122 002 BA BACK DOOR 10 5 R 30122 002 BA BACK DOOR 10 A 30122 003 BA VAULT DOOR 10 5 R 30122 003 BA VAULT DOOR 10 T 01277 345 BL WEST DOOR BLDG 4 ROOM allplex 34 tty3 s 34567 DEVICE MISSING 1234 DEVICE MISSING X 77777 421 888 LOOP IS IN BYPASS 15 Y 77777 421 888 LOOP IS IN RESET 15 30 kalatel 56 tty2 z 78654 123 SU TBL TBL SUPERVISORY SITUATION z
465. u db odk db db firesine cfg Copyright C 1994 2003 GE Interlogix Inc All Rights Reserved This file generated by the following installation script firesine inst 1 5 05 29 03 This file contains the configuration information for the Firesine FIRE ALARM interface Each interface that is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its own configuration file which contains the information on the specific serial line port the interface is going to read from All information is divided into two sections configuration item label and the desired setting The following values are unique to the Firesine interface do not change unless instructed by GE Interlogix CASI The ResetMsg must be established within an input group description It must contain this exact character string if the interface is going to recognize Firesine System Reset messages If changed it must not contain any spaces and it must be within the description of the input group ResetMsg FIRESINE RESET HHH GE b cb db dk ob The InpGrpPrefix parameter used as a required prefix to the alarm id This makes a unique input group description for Firesine alarms If this is changed here it must be changed in the input description as well and they are case sensitive This configuration parameter must not contain spaces In the input group description there should be one space between this prefix and the alarm id FIRESINE F101 or FIRESINE F001101 for example
466. uble etc occurs and are sometimes printed within the report itself Since the Notifier interface uses the same serial line as the printer the pending conditions will be detected by the interface and properly monitored if they have been set up to do so because a pending condition can be distinguished from an actual line contained within a report If the interface has been set up to monitor Walk Test messages then the messages that are part of the Unprogrammed Uninstalled or Untested Device reports will be recognized since that is when these kind of messages are received The messages that are part of the Tested Devices report will be ignored since the actual test messages are recognized as a device is tested during a walk test 228 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Figure 75 Sample alarm monitor screen H Alarm Monitor O A O O A AAAA Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor a x S New Alarms 4g Total Alarms 10 Display is now active Highest Priority Alarm Descri Condition NERT NOMEIER PAREL F AFRO SIGNAL SILENCE REQUESTED AH NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 SYSTEM RESET ACTIVATED Alarm 7 16 45 IONIZATION DETECTOR NFR1 ALARM SMOKE PHOTO 103 Alarm 17 00 50 FIRE ALARM PULLED NFR1 ACK TB PULL STATION 106 Alarm 17 02 48 NFR1 NOTIFIER PANEL NFR1 ALL SYSTEMS NORMAL Alarm 17 14 21 ANNUN TEST PANEL NFR1 ACK TB ANNUNCIATOR 01 Alarm
467. udent to set up one alarm record for each input group record The description field has no restrictions or required format since all the unique information for a message type is located in the input group description If there are similar alarm descriptions that apply to unique devices then separate alarm records and input group records should be created for each unique device to be recognized the alarm routing should be set up to according to the desired routing if you do not want a particular alarm to be routed to the monitor printer or history file then you should select none from the set alarm routing picklist Follow these steps to add an alarm description 1 Select Configuration Alarms then Alarms tab 2 Complete the Alarms form These fields should be set as follows e Online Yes e Reset Outputs Auto Reset Outputs Set the priority alarm routing facility and instructions as needed Note The routing must be set to one of the possible selections that includes the MONITOR for an alarm to show up on the Alarm Monitor 3 Click Save 4 Click New to add another alarm Figure 135 Sample Alarm screen Facilities Micros Inputs Outputs Doors And Readers Elevators Alarms Time Zones Alarms Alarm Colors Alarm Events Alarm Messages Alarm Responses Description 10 4 uExo4 x Qno l Alarm Description Instructions i Description Perimeter A Zone 1 Alarm 1 Facility
468. uirement to know the input group prefix of the 297 interface for which the stngen tool is going to generate database records To determine this you must look in the appropriate cas db text stn ttyN cfg file where ttyN is the tty name of the port for which the interface is configured Examine the appropriate file and look for a line that starts with InpGrpPrefix The value following this string is the input group prefix being used by the Stentofon interface for that port Input group prefix usage when installing When using the install portion of the stngen tool the input group prefix is used as the prefix for the description field for all input group records generated Again it should be stressed that the input group prefix used by the tool must match the Stentofon interface that is being targeted Input group prefix when uninstalling The input group prefix is used when using the uninstall portion of the stngen tool All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first five characters will be removed from the database The Alarm records that each input group points to will be removed with one exception If the Alarm record is linked to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situation must be corrected by the user before any records can be removed using the tool The input group user interface c
469. umber of seconds after startup that if the remote connection is still not established it will generate the remote system connection lost alarm 0 means wait forever Sets the number of seconds to wait after a remote connection is lost before an alarm is generated If the remote system reconnects before the specified number of Seconds elapses then no alarm is reported sets the number of seconds in which the remote host must reply to the alarm message or a non response from 268 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual remote host alarm will be generated Change this value to 0 zero below if the remote host will not be responding PipeName and PipeSize specifies the alarm storage file used when the remote system connection is broken RAN will buffer the alarms up to PipeSize alarms in the PipeName file RANRedundant indicates whether or not RAN is running in a redundant environment AlarmLossChk indicates whether or not to prevent alarm loss i e resend the last alarm if a network loss occurred before the acknowledgement was received from the remote system NOTE A lack of response when a nonzeroReplyToAlarmTO time expires is regarded as a connection loss situation MaxBindRetries number of times to retry a socket reconnection before exiting AlarmDisposition type of response to send to tps in response to the reply received from the remote system PENDING Equivalent of pressing OK on the mon
470. used 134 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Column descriptions for J Door Access Granted Message Types Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Msg Type Account d User Device Addr Alarm Desc Facility Priority 1 char 5 digits 2 to 4 2 chars 1 to 60 1 to 10 digits 1 to 3 digits chars digits J 00 9999 01 08 1 or 1 500 1 2 147 483 647 Msg Type Column one is always J for door access granted messages Account Column two is the five digit account number with a range of 00000 99999 User Column three is used to specify the number of the user who was granted access It is a two to four digit string with a range of 00 9999 based upon the SCS 1 programming Device Addr Column four is used to specify the address of the device where the access was granted It is a two character string with the range of 01 08 Alarm Desc Column five is used as the alarm description field for the alarm record that is created for the associated input group record This description is what appears on the Alarm Monitor when an alarm occurs and should be used as a custom device label that helps describe more information about the device or detector and the event that occurred It can be up to 60 characters in length and either upper or lower case It is acceptable to use the same alarm description for multiple input file data lines when installing the data generator records Only one alarm record will be generated in this case and the
471. usion Alarm Interface Each interface hat is running on a Picture Perfect system must have its wn configuration file which contains the information on he specific serial line port the interface is going to ead from It also contains the input group prefix that he interface will use to recognize specific input roup database records using this prefix O ct H ct O ct ct H The InpGrpPrefix parameter is a required parameter in the configuration file This parameter is the prefix that must be used in the description field for all input groups that are to be recognized by the interface If this parameter is changed here it must be changed for all the input groups that are using it as a prefix This prefix HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHH dk db 360 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual H HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH HHHH Hb HHH HH is case sensitive so the declaration in here must match the one used in the input group description This description must not exceed 4 characters and the last character or characters should be numeric The input group prefix declared in here will be read when the interface is started If more than one interface is installed then the input group prefix must be unique in each configuration file An example prefix would be UIO2 and the next interface that is installed could be UIO02 All information is divided into two columns configuration item label and the desired setting T
472. usy Station 01 Busy 1 allegiant 1 tty2 01 Disconnect Station 01 Disconnect 1 allegiant 2 tty2 10 Request Station 10 Request allplex 1 tty3 10 Connect Station 10 Connect allplex 2 tty3 10 Busy Station 10 Busy allplex 1 tty3 10 Disconnect Station 10 Disconnect allplex 3 tty3 03 Request Station 03 Request 1 allplex 4 tty3 03 Connect Station 03 Connect 1 allplex 5 tty3 03 Busy Station 03 Busy 1 allplex 5 tty3 03 Disconnect Station 403 Disconnect 1i allplex e6 tty3 05 Request Station 05 Request kalatel 1 tty4 05 Connect Station 05 Connect kalatel 2 tty4 05 Busy Station 05 Busy kalatel 2 tty4 05 Disconnect Station 05 Disconnect kalatel 3 tty4 An example of the input groups and alarm records that are generated from one line of an input file is shown in the section Input group and alarm records generated by stngen9600 on page 327 Input file recommendations Always keep the input file for future reference on how your system has been set up It will be extremely useful in understanding what database records have been generated It will be required information for Customer Support should you need help in configuring the interface DO NOT re use the original input file that has had data added to it without doing an uninstall first Uninstalls are discussed in later sections If you have new data for the generator and have not uninstalled using stngen9600 then you should unins
473. ut group Statement processed OK Statement UPDATE STATISTICS FOR TABLE alarm Statement processedigd CMD07 FF10 FF11 12 31 cctvName grundig cctv 00101 grundig 1240 261 1240 00101 grundig tty3 Creating CCTV device grundig map addition file tmp cmd grundig deltaigd CMD07 FF23 FF13 12 31 cctvName grundig cctv 00202 grundig 1243 264 1243 00202 grundig tty3 igd CMD07 FF13 FF23 12 31 cctvName grundig cctv 00102 grundig 1246 267 1246 00102 grundig tty3 igd CMD07 FF23 FF13 0A cctvName grundig cctv 00301 grundig 1248 269 1248 00301 grundig tty3 igd CMD07 FF23 FF01 1D cctvName grundig cctv 00301 grundig 1249 270 1249 00301 grundig tty3 Generated 5 new entries for CCTV switcher device grundig map table Successfully appended new entries to switcher device grundig map table Installation complete You have made changes to one or more CCTV mapping files Do you want to inform the system of these changes y n yl 13 Enter y toinform the system or n to not inform the system If you entered n the changes just made will not be sent to the interface until the next time it is restarted and you will exit the script If you entered y amessage will be sent to the running interface and the new map changes will be re read and take effect immediately Messages similar to the following will appear then you will exit the script Sending signal USR2 to task grundig comm Sending signal USR2 to task msan Using cmdgen to generate new bloc
474. ut group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 2 Add the new device data to the existing input file 3 Invoke nfrgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records Using nfrgen to change or add message types for an existing device after an initial installation If you need to add additional message types or change the defined data for an existing Device Type LDD ZXXX and Alarm Description you should do the following 1 Use nfrgen to uninstall all the data records based upon the input group prefix An uninstall removes all input group records and associated alarm records that have the given input group prefix Note Any input group using the targeted input group prefix to be un installed that was created manually through the Picture Perfect Input Group Form will be removed which means it will be permanently lost if its data was not originally part of the input file 2 Change or add the message types 3 Invoke nfrgen and use the modified input file to re create the data records 214 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual Example If you have an input file that has information for a smoke detector that is going to be monitored for alarm message types and you now want to monitor for trouble and walk test message t
475. ut making changes and exiting the program Refer to Figure 30 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm on page 61 Figure 30 Example of adding a Kalatel CCTV alarm 4 ktd_cctv_map b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm X Exit P Print a hardcopy of all KALATEL CCTV controlled alarms kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Selection a Adding an outgoing CCTV controlled alarm Picture Perfect Alarm ID 1 999999 21 Input Group ID 1 999999 102 Location ID 1 999999 45 When installing you configured the kalatel interfaces to use the following ports tty5 tty7 Enter the name of the port to use from the list above e g ttyD001 or ttyl tty5 Outgoing Kalatel site number 0 511 15 OR Kalatel Command Strings Table index 2048 to 1 123 You may now enter an optional alarm description to identify this mapping entry For example the Picture Perfect alarm description may be used Do you wish to enter an alarm description y n y The alarm description must fit on one line Enter the alarm description then hit lt ENTER gt Boiler Room Thermostat DI Is this OK y n y kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk A Add a KALATEL CCTV controlled alarm D Delete a KALATEL CCTV controlle
476. ut the alarm cannot be used by any other input group and the input group cannot be used by any other object 2 Input groups should not be shared by records of different database table types 3 Alarms should not be shared by records of different database table types 4 When alarms are defined they must be routed to the Alarm Monitor in order for them to be forwarded to the Central Station system 5 The safest course to follow when defining Picture Perfect database tables is to use different input groups and alarms for each type of alarm event for each type of object Table 5 Database tables referenced by the cstgen tool Table Field Name Description micro id micro record number micro id micro id number bdghis ingrp badge history overflow input group record number almhis ingrp alarm history overflow input group record number upstrm comm ingrp upstream micro communication failure input group record number dnstrm comm ingrp downstream micro communication failure input group record number reader comm ingrp reader failure input group record number reader id reader record number area area record number door id door record number door input door sensor input record number forced open ingrp door forced open input group record number open too long ingrp door held open input group record number area id area record number inv input grp invalid badge read input group record number susp input grp suspended badge read input group record nu
477. ve these alarm conditions from the monitor but no communication will be sent back to the Commend system since this is a one way data information communication All messages recognized by the Commend interface will show a condition of Alarm and an Input State of N A As with other Picture Perfect alarms that come into the Alarm Monitor the Count column will increment for those alarms that have come in multiple times To remove Commend alarms from the Alarm Monitor use the remove or purge button to remove all alarms or double click on the alarm to bring up an individual window and remove them individually The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect received the message from the Commend system Figure 43 Sample alarm monitor screen alar Monito LLL Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor j Alarm Monitor i I Q Ej x New Alarms Total Alarms Display is now active Highest Priority 20 Priori Alarm Description Location Condition p i Device Time j HOST TO MIERO S6 HOM FAIL MIGRO 301 MPX N A i 08 01 35 BLK 23 STA 13 Request CMDO7 FF23 FF13 21 22 07 35 33 BLK 23 STA 13 Acknowledge CMDO7 FF23 FF13 12 31 i 07 05 55 BLK 23 STA 13 Clear CMDO7 FF23 FF13 10 30 i 07 04 50 BLK 23 STA 13 Release CMDO7 FF23 FF13 0A 07 03 48 BLK 23 COD 01 Duress CMDO7 FF23 FF01 1D 01 06 2005 07 02 21 114
478. ver REPE 32 Deleting analatmm sus cscs estas das nannaseauinnrvodiaa ERU NU UUUUDOdN Erde su ERR EMEN EXER ME 35 Changing OM GIGKONs RR REI T m 36 Printing the map TS ss soe te CAN eb E ebbe CREME tre NN Ansett ace 36 Exiting the pFOgEGITTY iiiv du eesestEREE ARE ECERRR NER IF RU TIR S Ga QEPTUR NRR ADAM TP E RR as 38 Advanced configuration ree eere eI Rh pr ieee eet ar eer ree p ener Rer Rhea 39 Single devi SUPPO cnssussterr eit p REPRE E ero S EEEREN ue ERR ee EY Pier an 42 Multiple device support ISSUes iu a annie cr rrr e t e EUR PP Rer COP pd FR RR RE EERNE 42 Multiple device suppoEL oett tee PSP ELE AE MEE USE dde ea area ESSE 43 Interface data file backup and restore 0 cece cece cece ee een teen nee nnne 44 Appendix B Appendix C Configuring a CCTV Intel OE auus uoa ei ERI PRETS QR E RU RD OR ral pan 45 Introd ctlon v prO SEU ETE SUD UE TIDUNEERRREUF ER RED EARNED Rt e e Son EE quU 46 Redundant systems opp e ea abbr i re OUO EEE EE DC DH EE IN EEEbN 46 Software requirements serres ne ree vase err e i EREDE GEN REC RR e nee pe Re qn ER 47 Stand alone Systemi ec sso e SERIA RI e ERIPPadeta e pHbEEEI dm wid AAAA rp OPEM 47 Redundant system aeo ruere E vvv na UPPER NIANAISESER FORDERN D RUNE 47 Hardware requirements secre pre ERES exer eed nad CR AR eU Rene eon e RO A RR RERO 48 Standesalone systetri vss essere xd re e as A EORR Rr PY ERR qa ADAPT EE EEA 48 Red ndarnt SYSTEM ier crs ood pann avo
479. vertical bar pipe No spaces can be present within a data line If there are more Record ID numbers than can easily fit on the data line another data line can be started with the same alarm event name The data lines can be present in any order in the input file When the cstgen tool constructs the protected file cas db text cstation input it automatically sorts and packs the information into the minimum number of data lines required You can obtain the Record ID numbers for each event name by executing the corresponding SQL report as indicated in Table 6 on page 77 Note Thereis a different report for each alarm event type The Record ID numbers are always shown as the first left most column of the SQL report as described below Example input file The following is an example of an input file for the cstgen tool Note that the comments in parentheses which are provided for explanation are NOT part of the input file Central Station Input File Last Updated 06 18 96 09 00 DoorHeld 1i 3 door held open alarm for doors 1 and 3 DoorForced 9 door forced open alarm for door 9 InvBadge 1 2 invalid badge read alarm for readers 1 and 2 APBBadge 3 anti passback violation alarm for reader 3 ReaderFail 1 2 3 reader failure alarm for readers 1 2 and 3 BdgHistOv 1 1 badge history overflow alarm for micro 1 DIPoint 1 2 3 20 DI board alarms for inputs 1 2 and 3 Using SQL reports to populate the input file The relationship
480. whenever new micros are defined in the Picture Perfect database The accounts table file can be created using any text editor An empty table file is created during installation of the Picture Perfect to the Central Station interface software It is only necessary to add records to this table for those micro s whose alarm events are to be forwarded to the Central Station system A record consists of the Picture Perfect Micro ID number not the micro entry database record number and the corresponding Central Station system account number separated by a vertical bar pipe with no intervening spaces The Micro ID numbers can be determined through the Picture Perfect user interface by executing the CSTATION Micros SQL report as described in the section Running the reports on page 79 Valid account numbers are 1 to 9998 Account number 9999 is reserved for host to host communication failure alarms which are independent of micros Use the utility cetgen Validate Accounts Table to verify the contents of the accounts table It scans the entries in the accounts table and verifies that the specified Micro ID values are defined in the Picture Perfect database and that the account numbers are within the proper range Invalid records are pre pended with a pound sign 7 character which converts them into comment lines and an error message is appended to the end of the line The invalid lines can then be corrected and the utility re executed until all lines have b
481. y The time displayed in the Alarm Monitor is the time that Picture Perfect maintains and not the time from the OH Receiver Figure 92 Sample alarm monitor screen Alarm Monitor Badge Monitor Input Monitor Operator Monitor Status Monitor User Monitor Performance Monitor Alarm Monitor il AMX Sa New Alarms 8 Total Alarms 8 Highest Priority 50 Display is now active Priori Alarm Description OH Y PA PANIC ALARM Location Condition D Device Date Device Time OH RO02 L01 P01 001000 PA000 N A 01 06 15 22 35 OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y PA PANIC ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH Y BA BURGLARY ALARM OH RO2 L01 P01 001000 BA002 OH RO2 L01 P01 001000 BA003 OH R02 L01 P01 001000 BA004 OH R02 L01 P01 001000 BA006 OH R01 L01 P01 001000 PA002 OH R01 L01 P01 001000 BA002 OH R01 L01 P01 001000 BA003 15 23 33 15 23 55 15 24 50 15 25 48 15 26 21 15 27 08 15 28 12 The above figure of the Alarm Monitor shows a possible alarm sequence This scenario would be for a system that uses OH Receiver 02 and has appropriate input group alarm records to recognize the conditions coming from the receiver Below is a line by line explanation 247 The Alarm Description column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate alarm record that was created The Location column corresponds to the description field of the appropriate
482. y by pressing Enter Enter n to re enter the prefix 330 Picture Perfect 4 0 Interface User Manual If you entered n you will be asked to re enter the value If you entered y messages similar to the following will be displayed regarding the selection of a default facility for the Stentofon 9600 interface The input group prefix being used is STNO1 k k Default Stentofon Facility assignment portion k k k k When the input_group and alarm records are created they will require an associated facility You need to select the default facility that will be used when creating the input_group and alarm records if an explicit one is not specified The currently available defined facilities will be displayed and you will need to make a selection from the provided list If you need to create a new facility specifically for the Stentofon input_groups and alarms then you should exit this program create the facility using the GUI then re run this program and then choose that facility Do you wish to exit this program now y n n 12 Entera y to exit the scriptoran n to enter a facility from the choices that will be provided If you entered y you will exit the program and you may create a facility specifically for the Stentofon 9600 interface if you wish then re run the script If you entered n a list of the currently defined facilities on your system will be displayed and you will need to make a selection If the number
483. ypes 4 0 A SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 25 5 You would first use nf rgen and uninstall based upon the input group prefix You would then edit the input file and add two more lines of data to define the trouble and walk test message types The resulting input file would look like the following 4 0 A SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 25 5 T SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 W SMOKE ION 204 Second Floor Room 10 Now invoke the n rgen tool to re create the data records using the modified input file and the same input group prefix that was used to uninstall nfrgen uninstall This portion of n rgen removes the database records associated with a specific Notifier interface Before running the uninstall program you will need to know the input group prefix Note Itis a good idea to backup the database before using the uninstall portion of the nfrgen tool This can be done through the Control Backup form See your Picture Perfect documentation for more details Input group prefix All input group records that have descriptions that match the input group prefix the first 3 to 4 characters will be removed from the database The alarm records that each input group points to will be removed as well but with one exception If the Alarm record is associated to any other input group records outside of the ones to be removed the nf rgen tool will not remove any records and will notify the user of this condition This situ
484. ystetmi iieri lae denent ihhh ieena nnna Ya RA sane E MAREN LEE ane nee 235 Hardware redquirements nre Rp eue E E RU ROUEN e rer RPM C haved 236 Stand alone SYSTEM Farst cover tds pElD dee DON Exp aedes eges dim VW ER EN named gau 236 Redundant systeme erea add proe dadpenppu ope UEM ds deles hs ei a 238 jenem mE m 241 Inputgroup Tecords sae eoe EE ES t RUE pb hee m mer bbb ple d aaa e AR 241 Alarmi fECORdS 244 Output group and outputrecords vecti bep tee Rea MEER VOU RrcI Pe pde eee SE 246 Monitoting alartrls 35 nodu te ceno S RUN Ug aspe E REE EE AE vui 246 Monitoring events icukescoceececeh EC E UUUQU UU MER RR RRESCRPEEUPOSCUQI E d dU DNE NEEE 247 Testing the interface isis a a t brRRRRPIDONERAERRTRRRR VERRE RP RVERE FARA ES 247 Extended configuration cece cece vinie tiki Cista eee eee ehh ehh 247 cads db text oh recelver TINIE eic RE a e de E IR Pep COMETE REPE HERES 247 cas db text oh receiver redundant cfg 0 00 cece ccc eee eet teen eee eee nes 248 Interface data file backup and restore cece cece eee nee eee ehh nen 249 Appendix J Appendix K Configuring a Siebe CBAS interface cc ccc cece cece eee eeeeee 251 Introduction o dapen EEE EEE RUD EIER CUP enue Gente SVS ERR UEE P Re WU VER REA Y EROR ERE 252 Redundant systems repel rete e ute QA VRRWERIT CETUR heed dae Naan 252 Software requ

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents